v0.6.8: mothership tool loop

v0.6.8: mothership tool loop

.claude/commands/add-block.md

@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ When the user asks you to create a block:
 ```typescript
 import { {ServiceName}Icon } from '@/components/icons'
 import type { BlockConfig } from '@/blocks/types'
-import { AuthMode } from '@/blocks/types'
+import { AuthMode, IntegrationType } from '@/blocks/types'
 import { getScopesForService } from '@/lib/oauth/utils'
 
 export const {ServiceName}Block: BlockConfig = {
@@ -29,6 +29,8 @@ export const {ServiceName}Block: BlockConfig = {
   longDescription: 'Detailed description for docs',
   docsLink: 'https://docs.sim.ai/tools/{service}',
   category: 'tools',                    // 'tools' | 'blocks' | 'triggers'
+  integrationType: IntegrationType.X,   // Primary category (see IntegrationType enum)
+  tags: ['oauth', 'api'],              // Cross-cutting tags (see IntegrationTag type)
   bgColor: '#HEXCOLOR',                 // Brand color
   icon: {ServiceName}Icon,
 
@@ -629,7 +631,7 @@ export const registry: Record<string, BlockConfig> = {
 ```typescript
 import { ServiceIcon } from '@/components/icons'
 import type { BlockConfig } from '@/blocks/types'
-import { AuthMode } from '@/blocks/types'
+import { AuthMode, IntegrationType } from '@/blocks/types'
 import { getScopesForService } from '@/lib/oauth/utils'
 
 export const ServiceBlock: BlockConfig = {
@@ -639,6 +641,8 @@ export const ServiceBlock: BlockConfig = {
   longDescription: 'Full description for documentation...',
   docsLink: 'https://docs.sim.ai/tools/service',
   category: 'tools',
+  integrationType: IntegrationType.DeveloperTools,
+  tags: ['oauth', 'api'],
   bgColor: '#FF6B6B',
   icon: ServiceIcon,
   authMode: AuthMode.OAuth,
@@ -796,6 +800,8 @@ All tool IDs referenced in `tools.access` and returned by `tools.config.tool` MU
 
 ## Checklist Before Finishing
 
+- [ ] `integrationType` is set to the correct `IntegrationType` enum value
+- [ ] `tags` array includes all applicable `IntegrationTag` values
 - [ ] All subBlocks have `id`, `title` (except switch), and `type`
 - [ ] Conditions use correct syntax (field, value, not, and)
 - [ ] DependsOn set for fields that need other values

.claude/commands/add-connector.md

@@ -0,0 +1,437 @@
+---
+description: Add a knowledge base connector for syncing documents from an external source
+argument-hint: <service-name> [api-docs-url]
+---
+
+# Add Connector Skill
+
+You are an expert at adding knowledge base connectors to Sim. A connector syncs documents from an external source (Confluence, Google Drive, Notion, etc.) into a knowledge base.
+
+## Your Task
+
+When the user asks you to create a connector:
+1. Use Context7 or WebFetch to read the service's API documentation
+2. Determine the auth mode: **OAuth** (if Sim already has an OAuth provider for the service) or **API key** (if the service uses API key / Bearer token auth)
+3. Create the connector directory and config
+4. Register it in the connector registry
+
+## Directory Structure
+
+Create files in `apps/sim/connectors/{service}/`:
+```
+connectors/{service}/
+├── index.ts          # Barrel export
+└── {service}.ts      # ConnectorConfig definition
+```
+
+## Authentication
+
+Connectors use a discriminated union for auth config (`ConnectorAuthConfig` in `connectors/types.ts`):
+
+```typescript
+type ConnectorAuthConfig =
+  | { mode: 'oauth'; provider: OAuthService; requiredScopes?: string[] }
+  | { mode: 'apiKey'; label?: string; placeholder?: string }
+```
+
+### OAuth mode
+For services with existing OAuth providers in `apps/sim/lib/oauth/types.ts`. The `provider` must match an `OAuthService`. The modal shows a credential picker and handles token refresh automatically.
+
+### API key mode
+For services that use API key / Bearer token auth. The modal shows a password input with the configured `label` and `placeholder`. The API key is encrypted at rest using AES-256-GCM and stored in a dedicated `encryptedApiKey` column on the connector record. The sync engine decrypts it automatically — connectors receive the raw access token in `listDocuments`, `getDocument`, and `validateConfig`.
+
+## ConnectorConfig Structure
+
+### OAuth connector example
+
+```typescript
+import { createLogger } from '@sim/logger'
+import { {Service}Icon } from '@/components/icons'
+import { fetchWithRetry } from '@/lib/knowledge/documents/utils'
+import type { ConnectorConfig, ExternalDocument, ExternalDocumentList } from '@/connectors/types'
+
+const logger = createLogger('{Service}Connector')
+
+export const {service}Connector: ConnectorConfig = {
+  id: '{service}',
+  name: '{Service}',
+  description: 'Sync documents from {Service} into your knowledge base',
+  version: '1.0.0',
+  icon: {Service}Icon,
+
+  auth: {
+    mode: 'oauth',
+    provider: '{service}',          // Must match OAuthService in lib/oauth/types.ts
+    requiredScopes: ['read:...'],
+  },
+
+  configFields: [
+    // Rendered dynamically by the add-connector modal UI
+    // Supports 'short-input' and 'dropdown' types
+  ],
+
+  listDocuments: async (accessToken, sourceConfig, cursor) => {
+    // Paginate via cursor, extract text, compute SHA-256 hash
+    // Return { documents: ExternalDocument[], nextCursor?, hasMore }
+  },
+
+  getDocument: async (accessToken, sourceConfig, externalId) => {
+    // Return ExternalDocument or null
+  },
+
+  validateConfig: async (accessToken, sourceConfig) => {
+    // Return { valid: true } or { valid: false, error: 'message' }
+  },
+
+  // Optional: map source metadata to semantic tag keys (translated to slots by sync engine)
+  mapTags: (metadata) => {
+    // Return Record<string, unknown> with keys matching tagDefinitions[].id
+  },
+}
+```
+
+### API key connector example
+
+```typescript
+export const {service}Connector: ConnectorConfig = {
+  id: '{service}',
+  name: '{Service}',
+  description: 'Sync documents from {Service} into your knowledge base',
+  version: '1.0.0',
+  icon: {Service}Icon,
+
+  auth: {
+    mode: 'apiKey',
+    label: 'API Key',                       // Shown above the input field
+    placeholder: 'Enter your {Service} API key',  // Input placeholder
+  },
+
+  configFields: [ /* ... */ ],
+  listDocuments: async (accessToken, sourceConfig, cursor) => { /* ... */ },
+  getDocument: async (accessToken, sourceConfig, externalId) => { /* ... */ },
+  validateConfig: async (accessToken, sourceConfig) => { /* ... */ },
+}
+```
+
+## ConfigField Types
+
+The add-connector modal renders these automatically — no custom UI needed.
+
+Three field types are supported: `short-input`, `dropdown`, and `selector`.
+
+```typescript
+// Text input
+{
+  id: 'domain',
+  title: 'Domain',
+  type: 'short-input',
+  placeholder: 'yoursite.example.com',
+  required: true,
+}
+
+// Dropdown (static options)
+{
+  id: 'contentType',
+  title: 'Content Type',
+  type: 'dropdown',
+  required: false,
+  options: [
+    { label: 'Pages only', id: 'page' },
+    { label: 'Blog posts only', id: 'blogpost' },
+    { label: 'All content', id: 'all' },
+  ],
+}
+```
+
+## Dynamic Selectors (Canonical Pairs)
+
+Use `type: 'selector'` to fetch options dynamically from the existing selector registry (`hooks/selectors/registry.ts`). Selectors are always paired with a manual fallback input using the **canonical pair** pattern — a `selector` field (basic mode) and a `short-input` field (advanced mode) linked by `canonicalParamId`.
+
+The user sees a toggle button (ArrowLeftRight) to switch between the selector dropdown and manual text input. On submit, the modal resolves each canonical pair to the active mode's value, keyed by `canonicalParamId`.
+
+### Rules
+
+1. **Every selector field MUST have a canonical pair** — a corresponding `short-input` (or `dropdown`) field with the same `canonicalParamId` and `mode: 'advanced'`.
+2. **`required` must be set identically on both fields** in a pair. If the selector is required, the manual input must also be required.
+3. **`canonicalParamId` must match the key the connector expects in `sourceConfig`** (e.g. `baseId`, `channel`, `teamId`). The advanced field's `id` should typically match `canonicalParamId`.
+4. **`dependsOn` references the selector field's `id`**, not the `canonicalParamId`. The modal propagates dependency clearing across canonical siblings automatically — changing either field in a parent pair clears dependent children.
+
+### Selector canonical pair example (Airtable base → table cascade)
+
+```typescript
+configFields: [
+  // Base: selector (basic) + manual (advanced)
+  {
+    id: 'baseSelector',
+    title: 'Base',
+    type: 'selector',
+    selectorKey: 'airtable.bases',     // Must exist in hooks/selectors/registry.ts
+    canonicalParamId: 'baseId',
+    mode: 'basic',
+    placeholder: 'Select a base',
+    required: true,
+  },
+  {
+    id: 'baseId',
+    title: 'Base ID',
+    type: 'short-input',
+    canonicalParamId: 'baseId',
+    mode: 'advanced',
+    placeholder: 'e.g. appXXXXXXXXXXXXXX',
+    required: true,
+  },
+  // Table: selector depends on base (basic) + manual (advanced)
+  {
+    id: 'tableSelector',
+    title: 'Table',
+    type: 'selector',
+    selectorKey: 'airtable.tables',
+    canonicalParamId: 'tableIdOrName',
+    mode: 'basic',
+    dependsOn: ['baseSelector'],       // References the selector field ID
+    placeholder: 'Select a table',
+    required: true,
+  },
+  {
+    id: 'tableIdOrName',
+    title: 'Table Name or ID',
+    type: 'short-input',
+    canonicalParamId: 'tableIdOrName',
+    mode: 'advanced',
+    placeholder: 'e.g. Tasks',
+    required: true,
+  },
+  // Non-selector fields stay as-is
+  { id: 'maxRecords', title: 'Max Records', type: 'short-input', ... },
+]
+```
+
+### Selector with domain dependency (Jira/Confluence pattern)
+
+When a selector depends on a plain `short-input` field (no canonical pair), `dependsOn` references that field's `id` directly. The `domain` field's value maps to `SelectorContext.domain` automatically via `SELECTOR_CONTEXT_FIELDS`.
+
+```typescript
+configFields: [
+  {
+    id: 'domain',
+    title: 'Jira Domain',
+    type: 'short-input',
+    placeholder: 'yoursite.atlassian.net',
+    required: true,
+  },
+  {
+    id: 'projectSelector',
+    title: 'Project',
+    type: 'selector',
+    selectorKey: 'jira.projects',
+    canonicalParamId: 'projectKey',
+    mode: 'basic',
+    dependsOn: ['domain'],
+    placeholder: 'Select a project',
+    required: true,
+  },
+  {
+    id: 'projectKey',
+    title: 'Project Key',
+    type: 'short-input',
+    canonicalParamId: 'projectKey',
+    mode: 'advanced',
+    placeholder: 'e.g. ENG, PROJ',
+    required: true,
+  },
+]
+```
+
+### How `dependsOn` maps to `SelectorContext`
+
+The connector selector field builds a `SelectorContext` from dependency values. For the mapping to work, each dependency's `canonicalParamId` (or field `id` for non-canonical fields) must exist in `SELECTOR_CONTEXT_FIELDS` (`lib/workflows/subblocks/context.ts`):
+
+```
+oauthCredential, domain, teamId, projectId, knowledgeBaseId, planId,
+siteId, collectionId, spreadsheetId, fileId, baseId, datasetId, serviceDeskId
+```
+
+### Available selector keys
+
+Check `hooks/selectors/types.ts` for the full `SelectorKey` union. Common ones for connectors:
+
+| SelectorKey | Context Deps | Returns |
+|-------------|-------------|---------|
+| `airtable.bases` | credential | Base ID + name |
+| `airtable.tables` | credential, `baseId` | Table ID + name |
+| `slack.channels` | credential | Channel ID + name |
+| `gmail.labels` | credential | Label ID + name |
+| `google.calendar` | credential | Calendar ID + name |
+| `linear.teams` | credential | Team ID + name |
+| `linear.projects` | credential, `teamId` | Project ID + name |
+| `jira.projects` | credential, `domain` | Project key + name |
+| `confluence.spaces` | credential, `domain` | Space key + name |
+| `notion.databases` | credential | Database ID + name |
+| `asana.workspaces` | credential | Workspace GID + name |
+| `microsoft.teams` | credential | Team ID + name |
+| `microsoft.channels` | credential, `teamId` | Channel ID + name |
+| `webflow.sites` | credential | Site ID + name |
+| `outlook.folders` | credential | Folder ID + name |
+
+## ExternalDocument Shape
+
+Every document returned from `listDocuments`/`getDocument` must include:
+
+```typescript
+{
+  externalId: string          // Source-specific unique ID
+  title: string               // Document title
+  content: string             // Extracted plain text
+  mimeType: 'text/plain'     // Always text/plain (content is extracted)
+  contentHash: string         // SHA-256 of content (change detection)
+  sourceUrl?: string          // Link back to original (stored on document record)
+  metadata?: Record<string, unknown>  // Source-specific data (fed to mapTags)
+}
+```
+
+## Content Hashing (Required)
+
+The sync engine uses content hashes for change detection:
+
+```typescript
+async function computeContentHash(content: string): Promise<string> {
+  const data = new TextEncoder().encode(content)
+  const hashBuffer = await crypto.subtle.digest('SHA-256', data)
+  return Array.from(new Uint8Array(hashBuffer)).map(b => b.toString(16).padStart(2, '0')).join('')
+}
+```
+
+## tagDefinitions — Declared Tag Definitions
+
+Declare which tags the connector populates using semantic IDs. Shown in the add-connector modal as opt-out checkboxes.
+On connector creation, slots are **dynamically assigned** via `getNextAvailableSlot` — connectors never hardcode slot names.
+
+```typescript
+tagDefinitions: [
+  { id: 'labels', displayName: 'Labels', fieldType: 'text' },
+  { id: 'version', displayName: 'Version', fieldType: 'number' },
+  { id: 'lastModified', displayName: 'Last Modified', fieldType: 'date' },
+],
+```
+
+Each entry has:
+- `id`: Semantic key matching a key returned by `mapTags` (e.g. `'labels'`, `'version'`)
+- `displayName`: Human-readable name shown in the UI (e.g. "Labels", "Last Modified")
+- `fieldType`: `'text'` | `'number'` | `'date'` | `'boolean'` — determines which slot pool to draw from
+
+Users can opt out of specific tags in the modal. Disabled IDs are stored in `sourceConfig.disabledTagIds`.
+The assigned mapping (`semantic id → slot`) is stored in `sourceConfig.tagSlotMapping`.
+
+## mapTags — Metadata to Semantic Keys
+
+Maps source metadata to semantic tag keys. Required if `tagDefinitions` is set.
+The sync engine calls this automatically and translates semantic keys to actual DB slots
+using the `tagSlotMapping` stored on the connector.
+
+Return keys must match the `id` values declared in `tagDefinitions`.
+
+```typescript
+mapTags: (metadata: Record<string, unknown>): Record<string, unknown> => {
+  const result: Record<string, unknown> = {}
+
+  // Validate arrays before casting — metadata may be malformed
+  const labels = Array.isArray(metadata.labels) ? (metadata.labels as string[]) : []
+  if (labels.length > 0) result.labels = labels.join(', ')
+
+  // Validate numbers — guard against NaN
+  if (metadata.version != null) {
+    const num = Number(metadata.version)
+    if (!Number.isNaN(num)) result.version = num
+  }
+
+  // Validate dates — guard against Invalid Date
+  if (typeof metadata.lastModified === 'string') {
+    const date = new Date(metadata.lastModified)
+    if (!Number.isNaN(date.getTime())) result.lastModified = date
+  }
+
+  return result
+}
+```
+
+## External API Calls — Use `fetchWithRetry`
+
+All external API calls must use `fetchWithRetry` from `@/lib/knowledge/documents/utils` instead of raw `fetch()`. This provides exponential backoff with retries on 429/502/503/504 errors. It returns a standard `Response` — all `.ok`, `.json()`, `.text()` checks work unchanged.
+
+For `validateConfig` (user-facing, called on save), pass `VALIDATE_RETRY_OPTIONS` to cap wait time at ~7s. Background operations (`listDocuments`, `getDocument`) use the built-in defaults (5 retries, ~31s max).
+
+```typescript
+import { VALIDATE_RETRY_OPTIONS, fetchWithRetry } from '@/lib/knowledge/documents/utils'
+
+// Background sync — use defaults
+const response = await fetchWithRetry(url, {
+  method: 'GET',
+  headers: { Authorization: `Bearer ${accessToken}` },
+})
+
+// validateConfig — tighter retry budget
+const response = await fetchWithRetry(url, { ... }, VALIDATE_RETRY_OPTIONS)
+```
+
+## sourceUrl
+
+If `ExternalDocument.sourceUrl` is set, the sync engine stores it on the document record. Always construct the full URL (not a relative path).
+
+## Sync Engine Behavior (Do Not Modify)
+
+The sync engine (`lib/knowledge/connectors/sync-engine.ts`) is connector-agnostic. It:
+1. Calls `listDocuments` with pagination until `hasMore` is false
+2. Compares `contentHash` to detect new/changed/unchanged documents
+3. Stores `sourceUrl` and calls `mapTags` on insert/update automatically
+4. Handles soft-delete of removed documents
+5. Resolves access tokens automatically — OAuth tokens are refreshed, API keys are decrypted from the `encryptedApiKey` column
+
+You never need to modify the sync engine when adding a connector.
+
+## Icon
+
+The `icon` field on `ConnectorConfig` is used throughout the UI — in the connector list, the add-connector modal, and as the document icon in the knowledge base table (replacing the generic file type icon for connector-sourced documents). The icon is read from `CONNECTOR_REGISTRY[connectorType].icon` at runtime — no separate icon map to maintain.
+
+If the service already has an icon in `apps/sim/components/icons.tsx` (from a tool integration), reuse it. Otherwise, ask the user to provide the SVG.
+
+## Registering
+
+Add one line to `apps/sim/connectors/registry.ts`:
+
+```typescript
+import { {service}Connector } from '@/connectors/{service}'
+
+export const CONNECTOR_REGISTRY: ConnectorRegistry = {
+  // ... existing connectors ...
+  {service}: {service}Connector,
+}
+```
+
+## Reference Implementations
+
+- **OAuth**: `apps/sim/connectors/confluence/confluence.ts` — multiple config field types, `mapTags`, label fetching
+- **API key**: `apps/sim/connectors/fireflies/fireflies.ts` — GraphQL API with Bearer token auth
+
+## Checklist
+
+- [ ] Created `connectors/{service}/{service}.ts` with full ConnectorConfig
+- [ ] Created `connectors/{service}/index.ts` barrel export
+- [ ] **Auth configured correctly:**
+  - OAuth: `auth.provider` matches an existing `OAuthService` in `lib/oauth/types.ts`
+  - API key: `auth.label` and `auth.placeholder` set appropriately
+- [ ] **Selector fields configured correctly (if applicable):**
+  - Every `type: 'selector'` field has a canonical pair (`short-input` or `dropdown` with same `canonicalParamId` and `mode: 'advanced'`)
+  - `required` is identical on both fields in each canonical pair
+  - `selectorKey` exists in `hooks/selectors/registry.ts`
+  - `dependsOn` references selector field IDs (not `canonicalParamId`)
+  - Dependency `canonicalParamId` values exist in `SELECTOR_CONTEXT_FIELDS`
+- [ ] `listDocuments` handles pagination and computes content hashes
+- [ ] `sourceUrl` set on each ExternalDocument (full URL, not relative)
+- [ ] `metadata` includes source-specific data for tag mapping
+- [ ] `tagDefinitions` declared for each semantic key returned by `mapTags`
+- [ ] `mapTags` implemented if source has useful metadata (labels, dates, versions)
+- [ ] `validateConfig` verifies the source is accessible
+- [ ] All external API calls use `fetchWithRetry` (not raw `fetch`)
+- [ ] All optional config fields validated in `validateConfig`
+- [ ] Icon exists in `components/icons.tsx` (or asked user to provide SVG)
+- [ ] Registered in `connectors/registry.ts`

.claude/commands/add-integration.md

@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ export const {service}{Action}Tool: ToolConfig<Params, Response> = {
 ```typescript
 import { {Service}Icon } from '@/components/icons'
 import type { BlockConfig } from '@/blocks/types'
-import { AuthMode } from '@/blocks/types'
+import { AuthMode, IntegrationType } from '@/blocks/types'
 import { getScopesForService } from '@/lib/oauth/utils'
 
 export const {Service}Block: BlockConfig = {
@@ -123,6 +123,8 @@ export const {Service}Block: BlockConfig = {
   longDescription: '...',
   docsLink: 'https://docs.sim.ai/tools/{service}',
   category: 'tools',
+  integrationType: IntegrationType.X,   // Primary category (see IntegrationType enum)
+  tags: ['oauth', 'api'],              // Cross-cutting tags (see IntegrationTag type)
   bgColor: '#HEXCOLOR',
   icon: {Service}Icon,
   authMode: AuthMode.OAuth,  // or AuthMode.ApiKey
@@ -410,6 +412,8 @@ If creating V2 versions (API-aligned outputs):
 
 ### Block
 - [ ] Created `blocks/blocks/{service}.ts`
+- [ ] Set `integrationType` to the correct `IntegrationType` enum value
+- [ ] Set `tags` array with all applicable `IntegrationTag` values
 - [ ] Defined operation dropdown with all operations
 - [ ] Added credential field with `requiredScopes: getScopesForService('{service}')`
 - [ ] Added conditional fields per operation

.claude/commands/validate-connector.md

@@ -0,0 +1,316 @@
+---
+description: Validate an existing knowledge base connector against its service's API docs
+argument-hint: <service-name> [api-docs-url]
+---
+
+# Validate Connector Skill
+
+You are an expert auditor for Sim knowledge base connectors. Your job is to thoroughly validate that an existing connector is correct, complete, and follows all conventions.
+
+## Your Task
+
+When the user asks you to validate a connector:
+1. Read the service's API documentation (via Context7 or WebFetch)
+2. Read the connector implementation, OAuth config, and registry entries
+3. Cross-reference everything against the API docs and Sim conventions
+4. Report all issues found, grouped by severity (critical, warning, suggestion)
+5. Fix all issues after reporting them
+
+## Step 1: Gather All Files
+
+Read **every** file for the connector — do not skip any:
+
+```
+apps/sim/connectors/{service}/{service}.ts   # Connector implementation
+apps/sim/connectors/{service}/index.ts       # Barrel export
+apps/sim/connectors/registry.ts              # Connector registry entry
+apps/sim/connectors/types.ts                 # ConnectorConfig interface, ExternalDocument, etc.
+apps/sim/connectors/utils.ts                 # Shared utilities (computeContentHash, htmlToPlainText, etc.)
+apps/sim/lib/oauth/oauth.ts                  # OAUTH_PROVIDERS — single source of truth for scopes
+apps/sim/lib/oauth/utils.ts                  # getCanonicalScopesForProvider, getScopesForService, SCOPE_DESCRIPTIONS
+apps/sim/lib/oauth/types.ts                  # OAuthService union type
+apps/sim/components/icons.tsx                 # Icon definition for the service
+```
+
+If the connector uses selectors, also read:
+```
+apps/sim/hooks/selectors/registry.ts         # Selector key definitions
+apps/sim/hooks/selectors/types.ts            # SelectorKey union type
+apps/sim/lib/workflows/subblocks/context.ts  # SELECTOR_CONTEXT_FIELDS
+```
+
+## Step 2: Pull API Documentation
+
+Fetch the official API docs for the service. This is the **source of truth** for:
+- Endpoint URLs, HTTP methods, and auth headers
+- Required vs optional parameters
+- Parameter types and allowed values
+- Response shapes and field names
+- Pagination patterns (cursor, offset, next token)
+- Rate limits and error formats
+- OAuth scopes and their meanings
+
+Use Context7 (resolve-library-id → query-docs) or WebFetch to retrieve documentation. If both fail, note which claims are based on training knowledge vs verified docs.
+
+## Step 3: Validate API Endpoints
+
+For **every** API call in the connector (`listDocuments`, `getDocument`, `validateConfig`, and any helper functions), verify against the API docs:
+
+### URLs and Methods
+- [ ] Base URL is correct for the service's API version
+- [ ] Endpoint paths match the API docs exactly
+- [ ] HTTP method is correct (GET, POST, PUT, PATCH, DELETE)
+- [ ] Path parameters are correctly interpolated and URI-encoded where needed
+- [ ] Query parameters use correct names and formats per the API docs
+
+### Headers
+- [ ] Authorization header uses the correct format:
+  - OAuth: `Authorization: Bearer ${accessToken}`
+  - API Key: correct header name per the service's docs
+- [ ] `Content-Type` is set for POST/PUT/PATCH requests
+- [ ] Any service-specific headers are present (e.g., `Notion-Version`, `Dropbox-API-Arg`)
+- [ ] No headers are sent that the API doesn't support or silently ignores
+
+### Request Bodies
+- [ ] POST/PUT body fields match API parameter names exactly
+- [ ] Required fields are always sent
+- [ ] Optional fields are conditionally included (not sent as `null` or empty unless the API expects that)
+- [ ] Field value types match API expectations (string vs number vs boolean)
+
+### Input Sanitization
+- [ ] User-controlled values interpolated into query strings are properly escaped:
+  - OData `$filter`: single quotes escaped with `''` (e.g., `externalId.replace(/'/g, "''")`)
+  - SOQL: single quotes escaped with `\'`
+  - GraphQL variables: passed as variables, not interpolated into query strings
+  - URL path segments: `encodeURIComponent()` applied
+- [ ] URL-type config fields (e.g., `siteUrl`, `instanceUrl`) are normalized:
+  - Strip `https://` / `http://` prefix if the API expects bare domains
+  - Strip trailing `/`
+  - Apply `.trim()` before validation
+
+### Response Parsing
+- [ ] Response structure is correctly traversed (e.g., `data.results` vs `data.items` vs `data`)
+- [ ] Field names extracted match what the API actually returns
+- [ ] Nullable fields are handled with `?? null` or `|| undefined`
+- [ ] Error responses are checked before accessing data fields
+
+## Step 4: Validate OAuth Scopes (if OAuth connector)
+
+Scopes must be correctly declared and sufficient for all API calls the connector makes.
+
+### Connector requiredScopes
+- [ ] `requiredScopes` in the connector's `auth` config lists all scopes needed by the connector
+- [ ] Each scope in `requiredScopes` is a real, valid scope recognized by the service's API
+- [ ] No invalid, deprecated, or made-up scopes are listed
+- [ ] No unnecessary excess scopes beyond what the connector actually needs
+
+### Scope Subset Validation (CRITICAL)
+- [ ] Every scope in `requiredScopes` exists in the OAuth provider's `scopes` array in `lib/oauth/oauth.ts`
+- [ ] Find the provider in `OAUTH_PROVIDERS[providerGroup].services[serviceId].scopes`
+- [ ] Verify: `requiredScopes` ⊆ `OAUTH_PROVIDERS scopes` (every required scope is present in the provider config)
+- [ ] If a required scope is NOT in the provider config, flag as **critical** — the connector will fail at runtime
+
+### Scope Sufficiency
+For each API endpoint the connector calls:
+- [ ] Identify which scopes are required per the API docs
+- [ ] Verify those scopes are included in the connector's `requiredScopes`
+- [ ] If the connector calls endpoints requiring scopes not in `requiredScopes`, flag as **warning**
+
+### Token Refresh Config
+- [ ] Check the `getOAuthTokenRefreshConfig` function in `lib/oauth/oauth.ts` for this provider
+- [ ] `useBasicAuth` matches the service's token exchange requirements
+- [ ] `supportsRefreshTokenRotation` matches whether the service issues rotating refresh tokens
+- [ ] Token endpoint URL is correct
+
+## Step 5: Validate Pagination
+
+### listDocuments Pagination
+- [ ] Cursor/pagination parameter name matches the API docs
+- [ ] Response pagination field is correctly extracted (e.g., `next_cursor`, `nextPageToken`, `@odata.nextLink`, `offset`)
+- [ ] `hasMore` is correctly determined from the response
+- [ ] `nextCursor` is correctly passed back for the next page
+- [ ] `maxItems` / `maxRecords` cap is correctly applied across pages using `syncContext.totalDocsFetched`
+- [ ] Page size is within the API's allowed range (not exceeding max page size)
+- [ ] Last page precision: when a `maxItems` cap exists, the final page request uses `Math.min(PAGE_SIZE, remaining)` to avoid fetching more records than needed
+- [ ] No off-by-one errors in pagination tracking
+- [ ] The connector does NOT hit known API pagination limits silently (e.g., HubSpot search 10k cap)
+
+### Pagination State Across Pages
+- [ ] `syncContext` is used to cache state across pages (user names, field maps, instance URLs, portal IDs, etc.)
+- [ ] Cached state in `syncContext` is correctly initialized on first page and reused on subsequent pages
+
+## Step 6: Validate Data Transformation
+
+### ExternalDocument Construction
+- [ ] `externalId` is a stable, unique identifier from the source API
+- [ ] `title` is extracted from the correct field and has a sensible fallback (e.g., `'Untitled'`)
+- [ ] `content` is plain text — HTML content is stripped using `htmlToPlainText` from `@/connectors/utils`
+- [ ] `mimeType` is `'text/plain'`
+- [ ] `contentHash` is computed using `computeContentHash` from `@/connectors/utils`
+- [ ] `sourceUrl` is a valid, complete URL back to the original resource (not relative)
+- [ ] `metadata` contains all fields referenced by `mapTags` and `tagDefinitions`
+
+### Content Extraction
+- [ ] Rich text / HTML fields are converted to plain text before indexing
+- [ ] Important content is not silently dropped (e.g., nested blocks, table cells, code blocks)
+- [ ] Content is not silently truncated without logging a warning
+- [ ] Empty/blank documents are properly filtered out
+- [ ] Size checks use `Buffer.byteLength(text, 'utf8')` not `text.length` when comparing against byte-based limits (e.g., `MAX_FILE_SIZE` in bytes)
+
+## Step 7: Validate Tag Definitions and mapTags
+
+### tagDefinitions
+- [ ] Each `tagDefinition` has an `id`, `displayName`, and `fieldType`
+- [ ] `fieldType` matches the actual data type: `'text'` for strings, `'number'` for numbers, `'date'` for dates, `'boolean'` for booleans
+- [ ] Every `id` in `tagDefinitions` is returned by `mapTags`
+- [ ] No `tagDefinition` references a field that `mapTags` never produces
+
+### mapTags
+- [ ] Return keys match `tagDefinition` `id` values exactly
+- [ ] Date values are properly parsed using `parseTagDate` from `@/connectors/utils`
+- [ ] Array values are properly joined using `joinTagArray` from `@/connectors/utils`
+- [ ] Number values are validated (not `NaN`)
+- [ ] Metadata field names accessed in `mapTags` match what `listDocuments`/`getDocument` store in `metadata`
+
+## Step 8: Validate Config Fields and Validation
+
+### configFields
+- [ ] Every field has `id`, `title`, `type`
+- [ ] `required` is set explicitly (not omitted)
+- [ ] Dropdown fields have `options` with `label` and `id` for each option
+- [ ] Selector fields follow the canonical pair pattern:
+  - A `type: 'selector'` field with `selectorKey`, `canonicalParamId`, `mode: 'basic'`
+  - A `type: 'short-input'` field with the same `canonicalParamId`, `mode: 'advanced'`
+  - `required` is identical on both fields in the pair
+- [ ] `selectorKey` values exist in the selector registry
+- [ ] `dependsOn` references selector field `id` values, not `canonicalParamId`
+
+### validateConfig
+- [ ] Validates all required fields are present before making API calls
+- [ ] Validates optional numeric fields (checks `Number.isNaN`, positive values)
+- [ ] Makes a lightweight API call to verify access (e.g., fetch 1 record, get profile)
+- [ ] Uses `VALIDATE_RETRY_OPTIONS` for retry budget
+- [ ] Returns `{ valid: true }` on success
+- [ ] Returns `{ valid: false, error: 'descriptive message' }` on failure
+- [ ] Catches exceptions and returns user-friendly error messages
+- [ ] Does NOT make expensive calls (full data listing, large queries)
+
+## Step 9: Validate getDocument
+
+- [ ] Fetches a single document by `externalId`
+- [ ] Returns `null` for 404 / not found (does not throw)
+- [ ] Returns the same `ExternalDocument` shape as `listDocuments`
+- [ ] Handles all content types that `listDocuments` can produce (e.g., if `listDocuments` returns both pages and blogposts, `getDocument` must handle both — not hardcode one endpoint)
+- [ ] Forwards `syncContext` if it needs cached state (user names, field maps, etc.)
+- [ ] Error handling is graceful (catches, logs, returns null or throws with context)
+- [ ] Does not redundantly re-fetch data already included in the initial API response (e.g., if comments come back with the post, don't fetch them again separately)
+
+## Step 10: Validate General Quality
+
+### fetchWithRetry Usage
+- [ ] All external API calls use `fetchWithRetry` from `@/lib/knowledge/documents/utils`
+- [ ] No raw `fetch()` calls to external APIs
+- [ ] `VALIDATE_RETRY_OPTIONS` used in `validateConfig`
+- [ ] If `validateConfig` calls a shared helper (e.g., `linearGraphQL`, `resolveId`), that helper must accept and forward `retryOptions` to `fetchWithRetry`
+- [ ] Default retry options used in `listDocuments`/`getDocument`
+
+### API Efficiency
+- [ ] APIs that support field selection (e.g., `$select`, `sysparm_fields`, `fields`) should request only the fields the connector needs — in both `listDocuments` AND `getDocument`
+- [ ] No redundant API calls: if a helper already fetches data (e.g., site metadata), callers should reuse the result instead of making a second call for the same information
+- [ ] Sequential per-item API calls (fetching details for each document in a loop) should be batched with `Promise.all` and a concurrency limit of 3-5
+
+### Error Handling
+- [ ] Individual document failures are caught and logged without aborting the sync
+- [ ] API error responses include status codes in error messages
+- [ ] No unhandled promise rejections in concurrent operations
+
+### Concurrency
+- [ ] Concurrent API calls use reasonable batch sizes (3-5 is typical)
+- [ ] No unbounded `Promise.all` over large arrays
+
+### Logging
+- [ ] Uses `createLogger` from `@sim/logger` (not `console.log`)
+- [ ] Logs sync progress at `info` level
+- [ ] Logs errors at `warn` or `error` level with context
+
+### Registry
+- [ ] Connector is exported from `connectors/{service}/index.ts`
+- [ ] Connector is registered in `connectors/registry.ts`
+- [ ] Registry key matches the connector's `id` field
+
+## Step 11: Report and Fix
+
+### Report Format
+
+Group findings by severity:
+
+**Critical** (will cause runtime errors, data loss, or auth failures):
+- Wrong API endpoint URL or HTTP method
+- Invalid or missing OAuth scopes (not in provider config)
+- Incorrect response field mapping (accessing wrong path)
+- SOQL/query fields that don't exist on the target object
+- Pagination that silently hits undocumented API limits
+- Missing error handling that would crash the sync
+- `requiredScopes` not a subset of OAuth provider scopes
+- Query/filter injection: user-controlled values interpolated into OData `$filter`, SOQL, or query strings without escaping
+
+**Warning** (incorrect behavior, data quality issues, or convention violations):
+- HTML content not stripped via `htmlToPlainText`
+- `getDocument` not forwarding `syncContext`
+- `getDocument` hardcoded to one content type when `listDocuments` returns multiple (e.g., only pages but not blogposts)
+- Missing `tagDefinition` for metadata fields returned by `mapTags`
+- Incorrect `useBasicAuth` or `supportsRefreshTokenRotation` in token refresh config
+- Invalid scope names that the API doesn't recognize (even if silently ignored)
+- Private resources excluded from name-based lookup despite scopes being available
+- Silent data truncation without logging
+- Size checks using `text.length` (character count) instead of `Buffer.byteLength` (byte count) for byte-based limits
+- URL-type config fields not normalized (protocol prefix, trailing slashes cause API failures)
+- `VALIDATE_RETRY_OPTIONS` not threaded through helper functions called by `validateConfig`
+
+**Suggestion** (minor improvements):
+- Missing incremental sync support despite API supporting it
+- Overly broad scopes that could be narrowed (not wrong, but could be tighter)
+- Source URL format could be more specific
+- Missing `orderBy` for deterministic pagination
+- Redundant API calls that could be cached in `syncContext`
+- Sequential per-item API calls that could be batched with `Promise.all` (concurrency 3-5)
+- API supports field selection but connector fetches all fields (e.g., missing `$select`, `sysparm_fields`, `fields`)
+- `getDocument` re-fetches data already included in the initial API response (e.g., comments returned with post)
+- Last page of pagination requests full `PAGE_SIZE` when fewer records remain (`Math.min(PAGE_SIZE, remaining)`)
+
+### Fix All Issues
+
+After reporting, fix every **critical** and **warning** issue. Apply **suggestions** where they don't add unnecessary complexity.
+
+### Validation Output
+
+After fixing, confirm:
+1. `bun run lint` passes
+2. TypeScript compiles clean
+3. Re-read all modified files to verify fixes are correct
+
+## Checklist Summary
+
+- [ ] Read connector implementation, types, utils, registry, and OAuth config
+- [ ] Pulled and read official API documentation for the service
+- [ ] Validated every API endpoint URL, method, headers, and body against API docs
+- [ ] Validated input sanitization: no query/filter injection, URL fields normalized
+- [ ] Validated OAuth scopes: `requiredScopes` ⊆ OAuth provider `scopes` in `oauth.ts`
+- [ ] Validated each scope is real and recognized by the service's API
+- [ ] Validated scopes are sufficient for all API endpoints the connector calls
+- [ ] Validated token refresh config (`useBasicAuth`, `supportsRefreshTokenRotation`)
+- [ ] Validated pagination: cursor names, page sizes, hasMore logic, no silent caps
+- [ ] Validated data transformation: plain text extraction, HTML stripping, content hashing
+- [ ] Validated tag definitions match mapTags output, correct fieldTypes
+- [ ] Validated config fields: canonical pairs, selector keys, required flags
+- [ ] Validated validateConfig: lightweight check, error messages, retry options
+- [ ] Validated getDocument: null on 404, all content types handled, no redundant re-fetches, syncContext forwarding
+- [ ] Validated fetchWithRetry used for all external calls (no raw fetch), VALIDATE_RETRY_OPTIONS threaded through helpers
+- [ ] Validated API efficiency: field selection used, no redundant calls, sequential fetches batched
+- [ ] Validated error handling: graceful failures, no unhandled rejections
+- [ ] Validated logging: createLogger, no console.log
+- [ ] Validated registry: correct export, correct key
+- [ ] Reported all issues grouped by severity
+- [ ] Fixed all critical and warning issues
+- [ ] Ran `bun run lint` after fixes
+- [ ] Verified TypeScript compiles clean

.cursor/rules/landing-seo-geo.mdc

@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+---
+description: SEO and GEO guidelines for the landing page
+globs: ["apps/sim/app/(home)/**/*.tsx"]
+---
+
+# Landing Page — SEO / GEO
+
+## SEO
+
+- One `<h1>` per page, in Hero only — never add another.
+- Strict heading hierarchy: H1 (Hero) → H2 (section titles) → H3 (feature names).
+- Every section: `<section id="…" aria-labelledby="…-heading">`.
+- Decorative/animated elements: `aria-hidden="true"`.
+- All internal routes use Next.js `<Link>` (crawlable). External links get `rel="noopener noreferrer"`.
+- Navbar is a Server Component (no `'use client'`) for immediate crawlability. Logo `<Image>` has `priority` (LCP element).
+- Navbar `<nav>` carries `SiteNavigationElement` schema.org markup.
+- Feature lists must stay in sync with `WebApplication.featureList` in `structured-data.tsx`.
+
+## GEO (Generative Engine Optimisation)
+
+- **Answer-first pattern**: each section's H2 + subtitle should directly answer a user question (e.g. "What is Sim?", "How fast can I deploy?").
+- **Atomic answer blocks**: each feature / template card should be independently extractable by an AI summariser.
+- **Entity consistency**: always write "Sim" by name — never "the platform" or "our tool".
+- **Keyword density**: first 150 visible chars of Hero must name "Sim", "AI agents", "agentic workflows".
+- **sr-only summaries**: Hero and Templates each have a `<p className="sr-only">` (~50 words) as an atomic product/catalog summary for AI citation.
+- **Specific numbers**: prefer concrete figures ("1,000+ integrations", "15+ AI providers") over vague claims.

.cursor/rules/sim-queries.mdc

@@ -5,62 +5,122 @@ globs: ["apps/sim/hooks/queries/**/*.ts"]
 
 # React Query Patterns
 
-All React Query hooks live in `hooks/queries/`.
+All React Query hooks live in `hooks/queries/`. All server state must go through React Query — never use `useState` + `fetch` in components for data fetching or mutations.
 
 ## Query Key Factory
 
-Every query file defines a keys factory:
+Every query file defines a hierarchical keys factory with an `all` root key and intermediate plural keys for prefix-level invalidation:
 
 ```typescript
 export const entityKeys = {
   all: ['entity'] as const,
-  list: (workspaceId?: string) => [...entityKeys.all, 'list', workspaceId ?? ''] as const,
-  detail: (id?: string) => [...entityKeys.all, 'detail', id ?? ''] as const,
+  lists: () => [...entityKeys.all, 'list'] as const,
+  list: (workspaceId?: string) => [...entityKeys.lists(), workspaceId ?? ''] as const,
+  details: () => [...entityKeys.all, 'detail'] as const,
+  detail: (id?: string) => [...entityKeys.details(), id ?? ''] as const,
 }
 ```
 
+Never use inline query keys — always use the factory.
+
 ## File Structure
 
 ```typescript
 // 1. Query keys factory
 // 2. Types (if needed)
-// 3. Private fetch functions
+// 3. Private fetch functions (accept signal parameter)
 // 4. Exported hooks
 ```
 
 ## Query Hook
 
+- Every `queryFn` must destructure and forward `signal` for request cancellation
+- Every query must have an explicit `staleTime`
+- Use `keepPreviousData` only on variable-key queries (where params change), never on static keys
+
 ```typescript
+async function fetchEntities(workspaceId: string, signal?: AbortSignal) {
+  const response = await fetch(`/api/entities?workspaceId=${workspaceId}`, { signal })
+  if (!response.ok) throw new Error('Failed to fetch entities')
+  return response.json()
+}
+
 export function useEntityList(workspaceId?: string, options?: { enabled?: boolean }) {
   return useQuery({
     queryKey: entityKeys.list(workspaceId),
-    queryFn: () => fetchEntities(workspaceId as string),
+    queryFn: ({ signal }) => fetchEntities(workspaceId as string, signal),
     enabled: Boolean(workspaceId) && (options?.enabled ?? true),
     staleTime: 60 * 1000,
-    placeholderData: keepPreviousData,
+    placeholderData: keepPreviousData, // OK: workspaceId varies
   })
 }
 ```
 
 ## Mutation Hook
 
+- Use targeted invalidation (`entityKeys.lists()`) not broad (`entityKeys.all`) when possible
+- Invalidation must cover all affected query key prefixes (lists, details, related views)
+
 ```typescript
 export function useCreateEntity() {
   const queryClient = useQueryClient()
   return useMutation({
     mutationFn: async (variables) => { /* fetch POST */ },
-    onSuccess: () => queryClient.invalidateQueries({ queryKey: entityKeys.all }),
+    onSuccess: () => {
+      queryClient.invalidateQueries({ queryKey: entityKeys.lists() })
+    },
   })
 }
 ```
 
 ## Optimistic Updates
 
+For optimistic mutations, use `onSettled` (not `onSuccess`) for cache reconciliation — `onSettled` fires on both success and error, ensuring the cache is always reconciled with the server.
+
+```typescript
+export function useUpdateEntity() {
+  const queryClient = useQueryClient()
+  return useMutation({
+    mutationFn: async (variables) => { /* ... */ },
+    onMutate: async (variables) => {
+      await queryClient.cancelQueries({ queryKey: entityKeys.detail(variables.id) })
+      const previous = queryClient.getQueryData(entityKeys.detail(variables.id))
+      queryClient.setQueryData(entityKeys.detail(variables.id), /* optimistic value */)
+      return { previous }
+    },
+    onError: (_err, variables, context) => {
+      queryClient.setQueryData(entityKeys.detail(variables.id), context?.previous)
+    },
+    onSettled: (_data, _error, variables) => {
+      queryClient.invalidateQueries({ queryKey: entityKeys.lists() })
+      queryClient.invalidateQueries({ queryKey: entityKeys.detail(variables.id) })
+    },
+  })
+}
+```
+
 For optimistic mutations syncing with Zustand, use `createOptimisticMutationHandlers` from `@/hooks/queries/utils/optimistic-mutation`.
 
+## useCallback Dependencies
+
+Never include mutation objects (e.g., `createEntity`) in `useCallback` dependency arrays — the mutation object is not referentially stable and changes on every state update. The `.mutate()` and `.mutateAsync()` functions are stable in TanStack Query v5.
+
+```typescript
+// ✗ Bad — causes unnecessary recreations
+const handler = useCallback(() => {
+  createEntity.mutate(data)
+}, [createEntity]) // unstable reference
+
+// ✓ Good — omit from deps, mutate is stable
+const handler = useCallback(() => {
+  createEntity.mutate(data)
+  // eslint-disable-next-line react-hooks/exhaustive-deps
+}, [data])
+```
+
 ## Naming
 
 - **Keys**: `entityKeys`
 - **Query hooks**: `useEntity`, `useEntityList`
-- **Mutation hooks**: `useCreateEntity`, `useUpdateEntity`
-- **Fetch functions**: `fetchEntity` (private)
+- **Mutation hooks**: `useCreateEntity`, `useUpdateEntity`, `useDeleteEntity`
+- **Fetch functions**: `fetchEntity`, `fetchEntities` (private)

.cursor/skills/add-hosted-key/SKILL.md

@@ -0,0 +1,296 @@
+---
+name: add-hosted-key
+description: Add hosted API key support to a tool so Sim provides the key when users don't bring their own. Use when adding hosted keys, BYOK support, hideWhenHosted, or hosted key pricing to a tool or block.
+---
+
+# Adding Hosted Key Support to a Tool
+
+When a tool has hosted key support, Sim provides its own API key if the user hasn't configured one (via BYOK or env var). Usage is metered and billed to the workspace.
+
+## Overview
+
+| Step | What | Where |
+|------|------|-------|
+| 1 | Register BYOK provider ID | `tools/types.ts`, `app/api/workspaces/[id]/byok-keys/route.ts` |
+| 2 | Research the API's pricing and rate limits | API docs / pricing page (before writing any code) |
+| 3 | Add `hosting` config to the tool | `tools/{service}/{action}.ts` |
+| 4 | Hide API key field when hosted | `blocks/blocks/{service}.ts` |
+| 5 | Add to BYOK settings UI | BYOK settings component (`byok.tsx`) |
+| 6 | Summarize pricing and throttling comparison | Output to user (after all code changes) |
+
+## Step 1: Register the BYOK Provider ID
+
+Add the new provider to the `BYOKProviderId` union in `tools/types.ts`:
+
+```typescript
+export type BYOKProviderId =
+  | 'openai'
+  | 'anthropic'
+  // ...existing providers
+  | 'your_service'
+```
+
+Then add it to `VALID_PROVIDERS` in `app/api/workspaces/[id]/byok-keys/route.ts`:
+
+```typescript
+const VALID_PROVIDERS = ['openai', 'anthropic', 'google', 'mistral', 'your_service'] as const
+```
+
+## Step 2: Research the API's Pricing Model and Rate Limits
+
+**Before writing any `getCost` or `rateLimit` code**, look up the service's official documentation for both pricing and rate limits. You need to understand:
+
+### Pricing
+
+1. **How the API charges** — per request, per credit, per token, per step, per minute, etc.
+2. **Whether the API reports cost in its response** — look for fields like `creditsUsed`, `costDollars`, `tokensUsed`, or similar in the response body or headers
+3. **Whether cost varies by endpoint/options** — some APIs charge more for certain features (e.g., Firecrawl charges 1 credit/page base but +4 for JSON format, +4 for enhanced mode)
+4. **The dollar-per-unit rate** — what each credit/token/unit costs in dollars on our plan
+
+### Rate Limits
+
+1. **What rate limits the API enforces** — requests per minute/second, tokens per minute, concurrent requests, etc.
+2. **Whether limits vary by plan tier** — free vs paid vs enterprise often have different ceilings
+3. **Whether limits are per-key or per-account** — determines whether adding more hosted keys actually increases total throughput
+4. **What the API returns when rate limited** — HTTP 429, `Retry-After` header, error body format, etc.
+5. **Whether there are multiple dimensions** — some APIs limit both requests/min AND tokens/min independently
+
+Search the API's docs/pricing page (use WebSearch/WebFetch). Capture the pricing model as a comment in `getCost` so future maintainers know the source of truth.
+
+### Setting Our Rate Limits
+
+Our rate limiter (`lib/core/rate-limiter/hosted-key/`) uses a token-bucket algorithm applied **per billing actor** (workspace). It supports two modes:
+
+- **`per_request`** — simple; just `requestsPerMinute`. Good when the API charges flat per-request or cost doesn't vary much.
+- **`custom`** — `requestsPerMinute` plus additional `dimensions` (e.g., `tokens`, `search_units`). Each dimension has its own `limitPerMinute` and an `extractUsage` function that reads actual usage from the response. Use when the API charges on a variable metric (tokens, credits) and you want to cap that metric too.
+
+When choosing values for `requestsPerMinute` and any dimension limits:
+
+- **Stay well below the API's per-key limit** — our keys are shared across all workspaces. If the API allows 60 RPM per key and we have 3 keys, the global ceiling is ~180 RPM. Set the per-workspace limit low enough (e.g., 20-60 RPM) that many workspaces can coexist without collectively hitting the API's ceiling.
+- **Account for key pooling** — our round-robin distributes requests across `N` hosted keys, so the effective API-side rate per key is `(total requests) / N`. But per-workspace limits are enforced *before* key selection, so they apply regardless of key count.
+- **Prefer conservative defaults** — it's easy to raise limits later but hard to claw back after users depend on high throughput.
+
+## Step 3: Add `hosting` Config to the Tool
+
+Add a `hosting` object to the tool's `ToolConfig`. This tells the execution layer how to acquire hosted keys, calculate cost, and rate-limit.
+
+```typescript
+hosting: {
+  envKeyPrefix: 'YOUR_SERVICE_API_KEY',
+  apiKeyParam: 'apiKey',
+  byokProviderId: 'your_service',
+  pricing: {
+    type: 'custom',
+    getCost: (_params, output) => {
+      if (output.creditsUsed == null) {
+        throw new Error('Response missing creditsUsed field')
+      }
+      const creditsUsed = output.creditsUsed as number
+      const cost = creditsUsed * 0.001 // dollars per credit
+      return { cost, metadata: { creditsUsed } }
+    },
+  },
+  rateLimit: {
+    mode: 'per_request',
+    requestsPerMinute: 100,
+  },
+},
+```
+
+### Hosted Key Env Var Convention
+
+Keys use a numbered naming pattern driven by a count env var:
+
+```
+YOUR_SERVICE_API_KEY_COUNT=3
+YOUR_SERVICE_API_KEY_1=sk-...
+YOUR_SERVICE_API_KEY_2=sk-...
+YOUR_SERVICE_API_KEY_3=sk-...
+```
+
+The `envKeyPrefix` value (`YOUR_SERVICE_API_KEY`) determines which env vars are read at runtime. Adding more keys only requires bumping the count and adding the new env var.
+
+### Pricing: Prefer API-Reported Cost
+
+Always prefer using cost data returned by the API (e.g., `creditsUsed`, `costDollars`). This is the most accurate because it accounts for variable pricing tiers, feature modifiers, and plan-level discounts.
+
+**When the API reports cost** — use it directly and throw if missing:
+
+```typescript
+pricing: {
+  type: 'custom',
+  getCost: (params, output) => {
+    if (output.creditsUsed == null) {
+      throw new Error('Response missing creditsUsed field')
+    }
+    // $0.001 per credit — from https://example.com/pricing
+    const cost = (output.creditsUsed as number) * 0.001
+    return { cost, metadata: { creditsUsed: output.creditsUsed } }
+  },
+},
+```
+
+**When the API does NOT report cost** — compute it from params/output based on the pricing docs, but still validate the data you depend on:
+
+```typescript
+pricing: {
+  type: 'custom',
+  getCost: (params, output) => {
+    if (!Array.isArray(output.searchResults)) {
+      throw new Error('Response missing searchResults, cannot determine cost')
+    }
+    // Serper: 1 credit for <=10 results, 2 credits for >10 — from https://serper.dev/pricing
+    const credits = Number(params.num) > 10 ? 2 : 1
+    return { cost: credits * 0.001, metadata: { credits } }
+  },
+},
+```
+
+**`getCost` must always throw** if it cannot determine cost. Never silently fall back to a default — this would hide billing inaccuracies.
+
+### Capturing Cost Data from the API
+
+If the API returns cost info, capture it in `transformResponse` so `getCost` can read it from the output:
+
+```typescript
+transformResponse: async (response: Response) => {
+  const data = await response.json()
+  return {
+    success: true,
+    output: {
+      results: data.results,
+      creditsUsed: data.creditsUsed,  // pass through for getCost
+    },
+  }
+},
+```
+
+For async/polling tools, capture it in `postProcess` when the job completes:
+
+```typescript
+if (jobData.status === 'completed') {
+  result.output = {
+    data: jobData.data,
+    creditsUsed: jobData.creditsUsed,
+  }
+}
+```
+
+## Step 4: Hide the API Key Field When Hosted
+
+In the block config (`blocks/blocks/{service}.ts`), add `hideWhenHosted: true` to the API key subblock. This hides the field on hosted Sim since the platform provides the key:
+
+```typescript
+{
+  id: 'apiKey',
+  title: 'API Key',
+  type: 'short-input',
+  placeholder: 'Enter your API key',
+  password: true,
+  required: true,
+  hideWhenHosted: true,
+},
+```
+
+The visibility is controlled by `isSubBlockHiddenByHostedKey()` in `lib/workflows/subblocks/visibility.ts`, which checks the `isHosted` feature flag.
+
+### Excluding Specific Operations from Hosted Key Support
+
+When a block has multiple operations but some operations should **not** use a hosted key (e.g., the underlying API is deprecated, unsupported, or too expensive), use the **duplicate apiKey subblock** pattern. This is the same pattern Exa uses for its `research` operation:
+
+1. **Remove the `hosting` config** from the tool definition for that operation — it must not have a `hosting` object at all.
+2. **Duplicate the `apiKey` subblock** in the block config with opposing conditions:
+
+```typescript
+// API Key — hidden when hosted for operations with hosted key support
+{
+  id: 'apiKey',
+  title: 'API Key',
+  type: 'short-input',
+  placeholder: 'Enter your API key',
+  password: true,
+  required: true,
+  hideWhenHosted: true,
+  condition: { field: 'operation', value: 'unsupported_op', not: true },
+},
+// API Key — always visible for unsupported_op (no hosted key support)
+{
+  id: 'apiKey',
+  title: 'API Key',
+  type: 'short-input',
+  placeholder: 'Enter your API key',
+  password: true,
+  required: true,
+  condition: { field: 'operation', value: 'unsupported_op' },
+},
+```
+
+Both subblocks share the same `id: 'apiKey'`, so the same value flows to the tool. The conditions ensure only one is visible at a time. The first has `hideWhenHosted: true` and shows for all hosted operations; the second has no `hideWhenHosted` and shows only for the excluded operation — meaning users must always provide their own key for that operation.
+
+To exclude multiple operations, use an array: `{ field: 'operation', value: ['op_a', 'op_b'] }`.
+
+**Reference implementations:**
+- **Exa** (`blocks/blocks/exa.ts`): `research` operation excluded from hosting — lines 309-329
+- **Google Maps** (`blocks/blocks/google_maps.ts`): `speed_limits` operation excluded from hosting (deprecated Roads API)
+
+## Step 5: Add to the BYOK Settings UI
+
+Add an entry to the `PROVIDERS` array in the BYOK settings component so users can bring their own key. You need the service icon from `components/icons.tsx`:
+
+```typescript
+{
+  id: 'your_service',
+  name: 'Your Service',
+  icon: YourServiceIcon,
+  description: 'What this service does',
+  placeholder: 'Enter your API key',
+},
+```
+
+## Step 6: Summarize Pricing and Throttling Comparison
+
+After all code changes are complete, output a detailed summary to the user covering:
+
+### What to include
+
+1. **API's pricing model** — how the service charges (per token, per credit, per request, etc.), the specific rates found in docs, and whether the API reports cost in responses.
+2. **Our `getCost` approach** — how we calculate cost, what fields we depend on, and any assumptions or estimates (especially when the API doesn't report exact dollar cost).
+3. **API's rate limits** — the documented limits (RPM, TPM, concurrent, etc.), which plan tier they apply to, and whether they're per-key or per-account.
+4. **Our `rateLimit` config** — what we set for `requestsPerMinute` (and dimensions if custom mode), why we chose those values, and how they compare to the API's limits.
+5. **Key pooling impact** — how many hosted keys we expect, and how round-robin distribution affects the effective per-key rate at the API.
+6. **Gaps or risks** — anything the API charges for that we don't meter, rate limit dimensions we chose not to enforce, or pricing that may be inaccurate due to variable model/tier costs.
+
+### Format
+
+Present this as a structured summary with clear headings. Example:
+
+```
+### Pricing
+- **API charges**: $X per 1M tokens (input), $Y per 1M tokens (output) — varies by model
+- **Response reports cost?**: No — only token counts in `usage` field
+- **Our getCost**: Estimates cost at $Z per 1M total tokens based on median model pricing
+- **Risk**: Actual cost varies by model; our estimate may over/undercharge for cheap/expensive models
+
+### Throttling
+- **API limits**: 300 RPM per key (paid tier), 60 RPM (free tier)
+- **Per-key or per-account**: Per key — more keys = more throughput
+- **Our config**: 60 RPM per workspace (per_request mode)
+- **With N keys**: Effective per-key rate is (total RPM across workspaces) / N
+- **Headroom**: Comfortable — even 10 active workspaces at full rate = 600 RPM / 3 keys = 200 RPM per key, under the 300 RPM API limit
+```
+
+This summary helps reviewers verify that the pricing and rate limiting are well-calibrated and surfaces any risks that need monitoring.
+
+## Checklist
+
+- [ ] Provider added to `BYOKProviderId` in `tools/types.ts`
+- [ ] Provider added to `VALID_PROVIDERS` in the BYOK keys API route
+- [ ] API pricing docs researched — understand per-unit cost and whether the API reports cost in responses
+- [ ] API rate limits researched — understand RPM/TPM limits, per-key vs per-account, and plan tiers
+- [ ] `hosting` config added to the tool with `envKeyPrefix`, `apiKeyParam`, `byokProviderId`, `pricing`, and `rateLimit`
+- [ ] `getCost` throws if required cost data is missing from the response
+- [ ] Cost data captured in `transformResponse` or `postProcess` if API provides it
+- [ ] `hideWhenHosted: true` added to the API key subblock in the block config
+- [ ] Provider entry added to the BYOK settings UI with icon and description
+- [ ] Env vars documented: `{PREFIX}_COUNT` and `{PREFIX}_1..N`
+- [ ] Pricing and throttling summary provided to reviewer

.gitignore

@@ -26,6 +26,9 @@ bun-debug.log*
 **/standalone/
 sim-standalone.tar.gz
 
+# redis
+dump.rdb
+
 # misc
 .DS_Store
 *.pem

CLAUDE.md

@@ -134,21 +134,64 @@ Use `devtools` middleware. Use `persist` only when data should survive reload wi
 
 ## React Query
 
-All React Query hooks live in `hooks/queries/`.
+All React Query hooks live in `hooks/queries/`. All server state must go through React Query — never use `useState` + `fetch` in components for data fetching or mutations.
+
+### Query Key Factory
+
+Every file must have a hierarchical key factory with an `all` root key and intermediate plural keys for prefix invalidation:
 
 ```typescript
 export const entityKeys = {
   all: ['entity'] as const,
-  list: (workspaceId?: string) => [...entityKeys.all, 'list', workspaceId ?? ''] as const,
+  lists: () => [...entityKeys.all, 'list'] as const,
+  list: (workspaceId?: string) => [...entityKeys.lists(), workspaceId ?? ''] as const,
+  details: () => [...entityKeys.all, 'detail'] as const,
+  detail: (id?: string) => [...entityKeys.details(), id ?? ''] as const,
 }
+```
 
+### Query Hooks
+
+- Every `queryFn` must forward `signal` for request cancellation
+- Every query must have an explicit `staleTime`
+- Use `keepPreviousData` only on variable-key queries (where params change), never on static keys
+
+```typescript
 export function useEntityList(workspaceId?: string) {
   return useQuery({
     queryKey: entityKeys.list(workspaceId),
-    queryFn: () => fetchEntities(workspaceId as string),
+    queryFn: ({ signal }) => fetchEntities(workspaceId as string, signal),
     enabled: Boolean(workspaceId),
     staleTime: 60 * 1000,
-    placeholderData: keepPreviousData,
+    placeholderData: keepPreviousData, // OK: workspaceId varies
+  })
+}
+```
+
+### Mutation Hooks
+
+- Use targeted invalidation (`entityKeys.lists()`) not broad (`entityKeys.all`) when possible
+- For optimistic updates: use `onSettled` (not `onSuccess`) for cache reconciliation — `onSettled` fires on both success and error
+- Don't include mutation objects in `useCallback` deps — `.mutate()` is stable in TanStack Query v5
+
+```typescript
+export function useUpdateEntity() {
+  const queryClient = useQueryClient()
+  return useMutation({
+    mutationFn: async (variables) => { /* ... */ },
+    onMutate: async (variables) => {
+      await queryClient.cancelQueries({ queryKey: entityKeys.detail(variables.id) })
+      const previous = queryClient.getQueryData(entityKeys.detail(variables.id))
+      queryClient.setQueryData(entityKeys.detail(variables.id), /* optimistic */)
+      return { previous }
+    },
+    onError: (_err, variables, context) => {
+      queryClient.setQueryData(entityKeys.detail(variables.id), context?.previous)
+    },
+    onSettled: (_data, _error, variables) => {
+      queryClient.invalidateQueries({ queryKey: entityKeys.lists() })
+      queryClient.invalidateQueries({ queryKey: entityKeys.detail(variables.id) })
+    },
   })
 }
 ```

README.md

@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@
   </a>
 </p>
 
-<p align="center">Build and deploy AI agent workflows in minutes.</p>
+<p align="center">The open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce. Connect 1,000+ integrations and LLMs to orchestrate agentic workflows.</p>
 
 <p align="center">
   <a href="https://sim.ai" target="_blank" rel="noopener noreferrer"><img src="https://img.shields.io/badge/sim.ai-6F3DFA" alt="Sim.ai"></a>

apps/docs/app/[lang]/[[...slug]]/page.tsx

@@ -233,6 +233,7 @@ export default async function Page(props: { params: Promise<{ slug?: string[]; l
           lang={lang}
           breadcrumb={breadcrumbs}
         />
+        <style>{`#nd-page { grid-column: main-start / toc-end !important; max-width: 1400px !important; }`}</style>
         <DocsPage
           toc={data.toc}
           breadcrumb={{
@@ -367,15 +368,17 @@ export async function generateMetadata(props: {
   return {
     title: data.title,
     description:
-      data.description || 'Sim visual workflow builder for AI applications documentation',
+      data.description ||
+      'Documentation for Sim — the open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce.',
     keywords: [
-      'AI workflow builder',
-      'visual workflow editor',
-      'AI automation',
-      'workflow automation',
       'AI agents',
-      'no-code AI',
-      'drag and drop workflows',
+      'agentic workforce',
+      'AI agent platform',
+      'agentic workflows',
+      'LLM orchestration',
+      'AI automation',
+      'knowledge base',
+      'AI integrations',
       data.title?.toLowerCase().split(' '),
     ]
       .flat()
@@ -385,7 +388,8 @@ export async function generateMetadata(props: {
     openGraph: {
       title: data.title,
       description:
-        data.description || 'Sim visual workflow builder for AI applications documentation',
+        data.description ||
+        'Documentation for Sim — the open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce.',
       url: fullUrl,
       siteName: 'Sim Documentation',
       type: 'article',
@@ -406,7 +410,8 @@ export async function generateMetadata(props: {
       card: 'summary_large_image',
       title: data.title,
       description:
-        data.description || 'Sim visual workflow builder for AI applications documentation',
+        data.description ||
+        'Documentation for Sim — the open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce.',
       images: [ogImageUrl],
       creator: '@simdotai',
       site: '@simdotai',

apps/docs/app/[lang]/layout.tsx

@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ import {
   SidebarSeparator,
 } from '@/components/docs-layout/sidebar-components'
 import { Navbar } from '@/components/navbar/navbar'
+import { AnimatedBlocks } from '@/components/ui/animated-blocks'
 import { SimLogoFull } from '@/components/ui/sim-logo'
 import { i18n } from '@/lib/i18n'
 import { source } from '@/lib/source'
@@ -66,7 +67,7 @@ export default async function Layout({ children, params }: LayoutProps) {
     '@type': 'WebSite',
     name: 'Sim Documentation',
     description:
-      'Comprehensive documentation for Sim - the visual workflow builder for AI Agent Workflows.',
+      'Documentation for Sim — the open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce. Connect 1,000+ integrations and LLMs to deploy and orchestrate agentic workflows.',
     url: 'https://docs.sim.ai',
     publisher: {
       '@type': 'Organization',
@@ -102,6 +103,7 @@ export default async function Layout({ children, params }: LayoutProps) {
       </head>
       <body className='flex min-h-screen flex-col font-sans'>
         <Script src='https://assets.onedollarstats.com/stonks.js' strategy='lazyOnload' />
+        <AnimatedBlocks />
         <RootProvider i18n={provider(lang)}>
           <Navbar />
           <DocsLayout

apps/docs/app/global.css

@@ -9,13 +9,24 @@ body {
   overscroll-behavior: none;
 }
 
-/* Reserve scrollbar space to prevent layout jitter between pages */
-html {
-  scrollbar-gutter: stable;
+/* Prevent modals/dialogs from shifting layout via scroll-lock compensation */
+html,
+body {
+  padding-right: 0 !important;
+  margin-right: 0 !important;
 }
 
 @theme {
-  --color-fd-primary: #33c482;
+  --color-fd-primary: var(--color-fd-foreground);
+}
+
+/* Match landing page dark background (#1b1b1b) */
+.dark {
+  --color-fd-background: hsl(0, 0%, 10.6%) !important;
+  --color-fd-card: hsl(0, 0%, 13%) !important;
+  --color-fd-popover: hsl(0, 0%, 14%) !important;
+  --color-fd-secondary: hsl(0, 0%, 15.5%) !important;
+  --color-fd-muted: hsl(0, 0%, 18%) !important;
 }
 
 /* Font family utilities */
@@ -32,7 +43,7 @@ html {
 :root {
   --fd-border: transparent !important;
   --fd-border-sidebar: transparent !important;
-  --fd-nav-height: 65px; /* Custom navbar height (h-16 = 64px + 1px border) */
+  --fd-nav-height: 93px; /* Custom navbar height (52px top + 1px divider + 40px tabs) */
   /* Content container width used to center main content */
   --spacing-fd-container: 1400px;
   /* Edge gutter = leftover space on each side of centered container */
@@ -48,27 +59,25 @@ html {
   --content-gap: 1.75rem;
 }
 
-/* Light mode navbar and search styling */
+/* Light mode navbar background */
 :root:not(.dark) nav {
   background-color: hsla(0, 0%, 96%, 0.85) !important;
 }
 
-:root:not(.dark) nav button[type="button"] {
-  background-color: hsla(0, 0%, 93%, 0.85) !important;
+/* Dark mode navbar background */
+:root.dark nav {
+  background-color: hsla(0, 0%, 10.6%, 0.92) !important;
+}
+
+:root.dark nav button[type="button"] {
+  background-color: hsla(0, 0%, 15%, 0.85) !important;
   backdrop-filter: blur(33px) saturate(180%) !important;
   -webkit-backdrop-filter: blur(33px) saturate(180%) !important;
-  color: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.6) !important;
+  color: rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.5) !important;
 }
 
-:root:not(.dark) nav button[type="button"] kbd {
-  color: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.6) !important;
-}
-
-/* Dark mode navbar and search styling */
-:root.dark nav {
-  background-color: hsla(0, 0%, 7.04%, 0.92) !important;
-  backdrop-filter: blur(25px) saturate(180%) brightness(0.6) !important;
-  -webkit-backdrop-filter: blur(25px) saturate(180%) brightness(0.6) !important;
+:root.dark nav button[type="button"] kbd {
+  color: rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.4) !important;
 }
 
 /* Floating sidebar appearance - remove background */
@@ -97,7 +106,7 @@ aside#nd-sidebar {
   display: none !important;
 }
 
-/* Mobile only: Reduce gap between navbar and content */
+/* Mobile only: Reduce gap between navbar and content (custom navbar hidden on mobile) */
 @media (max-width: 1023px) {
   #nd-docs-layout {
     margin-top: -25px;
@@ -121,11 +130,11 @@ aside#nd-sidebar {
 /* On mobile, let fumadocs handle the layout natively */
 @media (min-width: 1024px) {
   :root {
-    --fd-banner-height: 65px !important; /* 64px navbar + 1px border */
+    --fd-banner-height: 93px !important; /* 52px top + 1px divider + 40px tabs */
   }
 
   #nd-docs-layout {
-    --fd-docs-height: calc(100dvh - 65px) !important; /* 64px navbar + 1px border */
+    --fd-docs-height: calc(100dvh - 93px) !important; /* 52px top + 1px divider + 40px tabs */
     --fd-sidebar-width: 300px !important;
     margin-left: var(--sidebar-offset) !important;
     margin-right: var(--toc-offset) !important;
@@ -552,16 +561,15 @@ video {
 /* API Reference Pages — Mintlify-style overrides */
 
 /* OpenAPI pages: span main + TOC grid columns for wide two-column layout.
-   The grid has columns: spacer | sidebar | main | toc | spacer.
-   By spanning columns 3-4, the article fills both main and toc areas,
-   while the grid structure stays identical to non-OpenAPI pages (no jitter). */
+   Use named grid lines from grid-template-areas so this works regardless
+   of whether the grid has 3 columns (production) or 5 columns (local dev). */
 #nd-page:has(.api-page-header) {
-  grid-column: 3 / span 2 !important;
+  grid-column: main-start / toc-end !important;
   max-width: 1400px !important;
 }
 
 /* Hide the empty TOC aside on OpenAPI pages so it doesn't overlay content */
-#nd-docs-layout:has(#nd-page .api-page-header) #nd-toc {
+#nd-docs-layout:has(#nd-page:has(.api-page-header)) #nd-toc {
   display: none;
 }
 
@@ -590,44 +598,39 @@ video {
     "Segoe UI", Roboto, "Helvetica Neue", Arial, sans-serif;
 }
 
-/* Method badge pills in page content — colored background pills */
-#nd-page span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-green"] {
-  background-color: rgb(220 252 231 / 0.6);
-  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem;
-  border-radius: 0.375rem;
-  font-size: 0.75rem;
+/* Method badge pills — shared background colors (page + sidebar) */
+span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="get"],
+span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="head"],
+span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="options"] {
+  background-color: rgb(220 252 231 / 0.85);
 }
-html.dark #nd-page span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-green"] {
+html.dark span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="get"],
+html.dark span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="head"],
+html.dark span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="options"] {
   background-color: rgb(34 197 94 / 0.15);
 }
-
-#nd-page span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-blue"] {
-  background-color: rgb(219 234 254 / 0.6);
-  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem;
-  border-radius: 0.375rem;
-  font-size: 0.75rem;
+span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="post"] {
+  background-color: rgb(219 234 254 / 0.85);
 }
-html.dark #nd-page span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-blue"] {
+html.dark span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="post"] {
   background-color: rgb(59 130 246 / 0.15);
 }
-
-#nd-page span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-orange"] {
-  background-color: rgb(255 237 213 / 0.6);
-  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem;
-  border-radius: 0.375rem;
-  font-size: 0.75rem;
+span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="put"] {
+  background-color: rgb(254 249 195 / 0.85);
 }
-html.dark #nd-page span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-orange"] {
+html.dark span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="put"] {
+  background-color: rgb(234 179 8 / 0.15);
+}
+span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="patch"] {
+  background-color: rgb(255 237 213 / 0.85);
+}
+html.dark span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="patch"] {
   background-color: rgb(249 115 22 / 0.15);
 }
-
-#nd-page span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-red"] {
-  background-color: rgb(254 226 226 / 0.6);
-  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem;
-  border-radius: 0.375rem;
-  font-size: 0.75rem;
+span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="delete"] {
+  background-color: rgb(254 226 226 / 0.85);
 }
-html.dark #nd-page span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-red"] {
+html.dark span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method="delete"] {
   background-color: rgb(239 68 68 / 0.15);
 }
 
@@ -635,52 +638,31 @@ html.dark #nd-page span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-red"] {
 #nd-sidebar a:has(span.font-mono.font-medium) {
   display: flex !important;
   align-items: center !important;
-  gap: 6px;
+  gap: 0.375rem;
 }
 
-/* Sidebar method badges — ensure proper inline flex display */
+/* Sidebar method badges — fixed-width for right-aligned labels */
 #nd-sidebar a span.font-mono.font-medium {
   display: inline-flex;
   align-items: center;
   justify-content: center;
-  min-width: 2.25rem;
-  font-size: 10px !important;
+  width: 2.625rem;
+  font-size: 0.625rem !important;
   line-height: 1 !important;
-  padding: 2.5px 4px;
-  border-radius: 3px;
+  padding: 0.15625rem 0.25rem;
+  border-radius: 0.1875rem;
   flex-shrink: 0;
 }
 
-/* Sidebar GET badges */
-#nd-sidebar a span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-green"] {
-  background-color: rgb(220 252 231 / 0.6);
-}
-html.dark #nd-sidebar a span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-green"] {
-  background-color: rgb(34 197 94 / 0.15);
-}
-
-/* Sidebar POST badges */
-#nd-sidebar a span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-blue"] {
-  background-color: rgb(219 234 254 / 0.6);
-}
-html.dark #nd-sidebar a span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-blue"] {
-  background-color: rgb(59 130 246 / 0.15);
-}
-
-/* Sidebar PUT badges */
-#nd-sidebar a span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-orange"] {
-  background-color: rgb(255 237 213 / 0.6);
-}
-html.dark #nd-sidebar a span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-orange"] {
-  background-color: rgb(249 115 22 / 0.15);
-}
-
-/* Sidebar DELETE badges */
-#nd-sidebar a span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-red"] {
-  background-color: rgb(254 226 226 / 0.6);
-}
-html.dark #nd-sidebar a span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-red"] {
-  background-color: rgb(239 68 68 / 0.15);
+/* Footer navigation method badges — pill styling to match sidebar */
+#nd-page span.font-mono.font-medium[data-method] {
+  display: inline-flex;
+  align-items: center;
+  justify-content: center;
+  font-size: 0.625rem !important;
+  line-height: 1 !important;
+  padding: 0.15625rem 0.375rem;
+  border-radius: 0.1875rem;
 }
 
 /* Code block containers — match regular docs styling */
@@ -740,8 +722,25 @@ html.dark
   font-size: 0.6875rem !important;
   letter-spacing: 0.025em;
   text-transform: uppercase;
+  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem !important;
+  border-radius: 0.375rem !important;
 }
-/* POST — softer blue */
+/* Path bar per-method colors (fumadocs renders these, so we match by class) */
+/* GET */
+#nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
+  div.flex.flex-row.items-center.rounded-xl.border.not-prose
+  span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-green"] {
+  color: rgb(22 163 74) !important;
+  background-color: rgb(220 252 231 / 0.7) !important;
+}
+html.dark
+  #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
+  div.flex.flex-row.items-center.rounded-xl.border.not-prose
+  span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-green"] {
+  color: rgb(74 222 128) !important;
+  background-color: rgb(34 197 94 / 0.15) !important;
+}
+/* POST */
 #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
   div.flex.flex-row.items-center.rounded-xl.border.not-prose
   span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-blue"] {
@@ -755,19 +754,47 @@ html.dark
   color: rgb(96 165 250) !important;
   background-color: rgb(59 130 246 / 0.15) !important;
 }
-/* GET — softer green */
+/* PUT */
 #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
   div.flex.flex-row.items-center.rounded-xl.border.not-prose
-  span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-green"] {
-  color: rgb(22 163 74) !important;
-  background-color: rgb(220 252 231 / 0.7) !important;
+  span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-yellow"] {
+  color: rgb(161 98 7) !important;
+  background-color: rgb(254 249 195 / 0.7) !important;
 }
 html.dark
   #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
   div.flex.flex-row.items-center.rounded-xl.border.not-prose
-  span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-green"] {
-  color: rgb(74 222 128) !important;
-  background-color: rgb(34 197 94 / 0.15) !important;
+  span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-yellow"] {
+  color: rgb(250 204 21) !important;
+  background-color: rgb(234 179 8 / 0.15) !important;
+}
+/* PATCH */
+#nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
+  div.flex.flex-row.items-center.rounded-xl.border.not-prose
+  span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-orange"] {
+  color: rgb(194 65 12) !important;
+  background-color: rgb(255 237 213 / 0.7) !important;
+}
+html.dark
+  #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
+  div.flex.flex-row.items-center.rounded-xl.border.not-prose
+  span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-orange"] {
+  color: rgb(251 146 60) !important;
+  background-color: rgb(249 115 22 / 0.15) !important;
+}
+/* DELETE */
+#nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
+  div.flex.flex-row.items-center.rounded-xl.border.not-prose
+  span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-red"] {
+  color: rgb(185 28 28) !important;
+  background-color: rgb(254 226 226 / 0.7) !important;
+}
+html.dark
+  #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
+  div.flex.flex-row.items-center.rounded-xl.border.not-prose
+  span.font-mono.font-medium[class*="text-red"] {
+  color: rgb(248 113 113) !important;
+  background-color: rgb(239 68 68 / 0.15) !important;
 }
 
 /* Path text inside method+path bar — monospace, bright like Gumloop */
@@ -966,17 +993,17 @@ html.dark .response-section-dropdown-item:hover {
   order: 1;
 }
 
-/* Type badge — order 2, grey pill like Mintlify */
+/* Type badge — order 2, grey pill */
 #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
   .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose
   > span.text-sm.font-mono.text-fd-muted-foreground {
   order: 2;
-  background-color: rgb(240 240 243);
-  color: rgb(100 100 110);
-  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem;
+  background-color: rgb(241 245 249);
+  color: rgb(71 85 105);
+  padding: 0.1875rem 0.5rem;
   border-radius: 0.375rem;
   font-size: 0.6875rem;
-  line-height: 1.25rem;
+  line-height: 1.125rem;
   font-weight: 500;
   font-family: var(--font-geist-sans), ui-sans-serif, system-ui, sans-serif;
 }
@@ -984,8 +1011,8 @@ html.dark
   #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
   .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose
   > span.text-sm.font-mono.text-fd-muted-foreground {
-  background-color: rgb(39 39 42);
-  color: rgb(212 212 216);
+  background-color: rgb(51 51 56);
+  color: rgb(212 212 220);
 }
 
 /* Hide the "*" inside the name span — we'll add "required" as a ::after on the flex row */
@@ -993,26 +1020,26 @@ html.dark
   display: none;
 }
 
-/* Required badge — order 3, light red pill */
+/* Required badge — order 3, red pill */
 #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
   .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose:has(span.text-red-400)::after {
   content: "required";
   order: 3;
   display: inline-flex;
   align-items: center;
-  background-color: rgb(254 235 235);
-  color: rgb(220 38 38);
-  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem;
+  background-color: rgb(254 226 226);
+  color: rgb(185 28 28);
+  padding: 0.1875rem 0.5rem;
   border-radius: 0.375rem;
   font-size: 0.6875rem;
-  line-height: 1.25rem;
+  line-height: 1.125rem;
   font-weight: 500;
   font-family: var(--font-geist-sans), ui-sans-serif, system-ui, sans-serif;
 }
 html.dark
   #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
   .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose:has(span.text-red-400)::after {
-  background-color: rgb(127 29 29 / 0.2);
+  background-color: rgb(153 27 27 / 0.3);
   color: rgb(252 165 165);
 }
 
@@ -1054,12 +1081,12 @@ html.dark
   > span.text-sm.font-mono.text-fd-muted-foreground::after {
   content: "string";
   font-size: 0.6875rem;
-  line-height: 1.25rem;
+  line-height: 1.125rem;
   font-weight: 500;
   font-family: var(--font-geist-sans), ui-sans-serif, system-ui, sans-serif;
-  background-color: rgb(240 240 243);
-  color: rgb(100 100 110);
-  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem;
+  background-color: rgb(241 245 249);
+  color: rgb(71 85 105);
+  padding: 0.1875rem 0.5rem;
   border-radius: 0.375rem;
   display: inline-flex;
   align-items: center;
@@ -1069,8 +1096,8 @@ html.dark
   div.my-4
   > .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose
   > span.text-sm.font-mono.text-fd-muted-foreground::after {
-  background-color: rgb(39 39 42);
-  color: rgb(212 212 216);
+  background-color: rgb(51 51 56);
+  color: rgb(212 212 220);
 }
 
 /* "header" badge via ::before on the auth flex row */
@@ -1079,12 +1106,12 @@ html.dark
   order: 3;
   display: inline-flex;
   align-items: center;
-  background-color: rgb(240 240 243);
-  color: rgb(100 100 110);
-  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem;
+  background-color: rgb(241 245 249);
+  color: rgb(71 85 105);
+  padding: 0.1875rem 0.5rem;
   border-radius: 0.375rem;
   font-size: 0.6875rem;
-  line-height: 1.25rem;
+  line-height: 1.125rem;
   font-weight: 500;
   font-family: var(--font-geist-sans), ui-sans-serif, system-ui, sans-serif;
 }
@@ -1092,22 +1119,22 @@ html.dark
   #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
   div.my-4
   > .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose::before {
-  background-color: rgb(39 39 42);
-  color: rgb(212 212 216);
+  background-color: rgb(51 51 56);
+  color: rgb(212 212 220);
 }
 
-/* "required" badge via ::after on the auth flex row — light red pill */
+/* "required" badge via ::after on the auth flex row — red pill */
 #nd-page:has(.api-page-header) div.my-4 > .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose::after {
   content: "required";
   order: 4;
   display: inline-flex;
   align-items: center;
-  background-color: rgb(254 235 235);
-  color: rgb(220 38 38);
-  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem;
+  background-color: rgb(254 226 226);
+  color: rgb(185 28 28);
+  padding: 0.1875rem 0.5rem;
   border-radius: 0.375rem;
   font-size: 0.6875rem;
-  line-height: 1.25rem;
+  line-height: 1.125rem;
   font-weight: 500;
   font-family: var(--font-geist-sans), ui-sans-serif, system-ui, sans-serif;
 }
@@ -1115,7 +1142,7 @@ html.dark
   #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
   div.my-4
   > .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose::after {
-  background-color: rgb(127 29 29 / 0.2);
+  background-color: rgb(153 27 27 / 0.3);
   color: rgb(252 165 165);
 }
 
@@ -1168,12 +1195,12 @@ html.dark #nd-page:has(.api-page-header) .text-sm.border-t {
 #nd-page:has(.api-page-header) .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose > button,
 #nd-page:has(.api-page-header) .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose > span:has(> button) {
   order: 2;
-  background-color: rgb(240 240 243);
-  color: rgb(100 100 110);
-  padding: 0.125rem 0.5rem;
+  background-color: rgb(241 245 249);
+  color: rgb(71 85 105);
+  padding: 0.1875rem 0.5rem;
   border-radius: 0.375rem;
   font-size: 0.6875rem;
-  line-height: 1.25rem;
+  line-height: 1.125rem;
   font-weight: 500;
   font-family: var(--font-geist-sans), ui-sans-serif, system-ui, sans-serif;
 }
@@ -1182,8 +1209,8 @@ html.dark
   #nd-page:has(.api-page-header)
   .flex.flex-wrap.items-center.gap-3.not-prose
   > span:has(> button) {
-  background-color: rgb(39 39 42);
-  color: rgb(212 212 216);
+  background-color: rgb(51 51 56);
+  color: rgb(212 212 220);
 }
 
 /* Section headings (Authorization, Path Parameters, etc.) — consistent top spacing */

apps/docs/app/layout.tsx

@@ -1,32 +1,48 @@
 import type { ReactNode } from 'react'
+import type { Viewport } from 'next'
 
 export default function RootLayout({ children }: { children: ReactNode }) {
   return children
 }
 
+export const viewport: Viewport = {
+  width: 'device-width',
+  initialScale: 1,
+  maximumScale: 1,
+  userScalable: false,
+  themeColor: [
+    { media: '(prefers-color-scheme: light)', color: '#ffffff' },
+    { media: '(prefers-color-scheme: dark)', color: '#0c0c0c' },
+  ],
+}
+
 export const metadata = {
   metadataBase: new URL('https://docs.sim.ai'),
   title: {
-    default: 'Sim Documentation - Visual Workflow Builder for AI Applications',
+    default: 'Sim Documentation — Build AI Agents & Run Your Agentic Workforce',
     template: '%s',
   },
   description:
-    'Comprehensive documentation for Sim - the visual workflow builder for AI applications. Create powerful AI agents, automation workflows, and data processing pipelines by connecting blocks on a canvas—no coding required.',
+    'Documentation for Sim — the open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce. Connect 1,000+ integrations and LLMs to deploy and orchestrate agentic workflows.',
+  applicationName: 'Sim Docs',
+  generator: 'Next.js',
+  referrer: 'origin-when-cross-origin' as const,
   keywords: [
-    'AI workflow builder',
-    'visual workflow editor',
-    'AI automation',
-    'workflow automation',
     'AI agents',
-    'no-code AI',
-    'drag and drop workflows',
+    'agentic workforce',
+    'AI agent platform',
+    'open-source AI agents',
+    'agentic workflows',
+    'LLM orchestration',
     'AI integrations',
-    'workflow canvas',
-    'AI Agent Workflow Builder',
-    'workflow orchestration',
-    'agent builder',
-    'AI workflow automation',
-    'visual programming',
+    'knowledge base',
+    'AI automation',
+    'workflow builder',
+    'AI workflow orchestration',
+    'enterprise AI',
+    'AI agent deployment',
+    'intelligent automation',
+    'AI tools',
   ],
   authors: [{ name: 'Sim Team', url: 'https://sim.ai' }],
   creator: 'Sim',
@@ -36,26 +52,37 @@ export const metadata = {
   manifest: '/favicon/site.webmanifest',
   icons: {
     icon: [
+      { url: '/icon.svg', type: 'image/svg+xml', sizes: 'any' },
       { url: '/favicon/favicon-16x16.png', sizes: '16x16', type: 'image/png' },
       { url: '/favicon/favicon-32x32.png', sizes: '32x32', type: 'image/png' },
+      { url: '/favicon/android-chrome-192x192.png', sizes: '192x192', type: 'image/png' },
+      { url: '/favicon/android-chrome-512x512.png', sizes: '512x512', type: 'image/png' },
     ],
     apple: '/favicon/apple-touch-icon.png',
-    shortcut: '/favicon/favicon.ico',
+    shortcut: '/icon.svg',
   },
   appleWebApp: {
     capable: true,
     statusBarStyle: 'default',
     title: 'Sim Docs',
   },
+  formatDetection: {
+    telephone: false,
+  },
+  other: {
+    'apple-mobile-web-app-capable': 'yes',
+    'mobile-web-app-capable': 'yes',
+    'msapplication-TileColor': '#33C482',
+  },
   openGraph: {
     type: 'website',
     locale: 'en_US',
     alternateLocale: ['es_ES', 'fr_FR', 'de_DE', 'ja_JP', 'zh_CN'],
     url: 'https://docs.sim.ai',
     siteName: 'Sim Documentation',
-    title: 'Sim Documentation - Visual Workflow Builder for AI Applications',
+    title: 'Sim Documentation — Build AI Agents & Run Your Agentic Workforce',
     description:
-      'Comprehensive documentation for Sim - the visual workflow builder for AI applications. Create powerful AI agents, automation workflows, and data processing pipelines.',
+      'Documentation for Sim — the open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce. Connect 1,000+ integrations and LLMs to deploy and orchestrate agentic workflows.',
     images: [
       {
         url: 'https://docs.sim.ai/api/og?title=Sim%20Documentation',
@@ -67,9 +94,9 @@ export const metadata = {
   },
   twitter: {
     card: 'summary_large_image',
-    title: 'Sim Documentation - Visual Workflow Builder for AI Applications',
+    title: 'Sim Documentation — Build AI Agents & Run Your Agentic Workforce',
     description:
-      'Comprehensive documentation for Sim - the visual workflow builder for AI applications.',
+      'Documentation for Sim — the open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce. Connect 1,000+ integrations and LLMs to deploy and orchestrate agentic workflows.',
     creator: '@simdotai',
     site: '@simdotai',
     images: ['https://docs.sim.ai/api/og?title=Sim%20Documentation'],

apps/docs/app/llms.txt/route.ts

@@ -37,9 +37,9 @@ export async function GET() {
 
     const manifest = `# Sim Documentation
 
-> Visual Workflow Builder for AI Applications
+> The open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce.
 
-Sim is a visual workflow builder for AI applications that lets you build AI agent workflows visually. Create powerful AI agents, automation workflows, and data processing pipelines by connecting blocks on a canvas—no coding required.
+Sim is the open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce. Connect 1,000+ integrations and LLMs to deploy and orchestrate agentic workflows. Create agents, workflows, knowledge bases, tables, and docs. Trusted by over 100,000 builders.
 
 ## Documentation Overview
 

apps/docs/components/docs-layout/toc-footer.tsx

@@ -10,15 +10,15 @@ export function TOCFooter() {
         <div className='text-balance font-semibold text-base leading-tight'>
           Start building today
         </div>
-        <div className='text-muted-foreground'>Trusted by over 70,000 builders.</div>
+        <div className='text-muted-foreground'>Trusted by over 100,000 builders.</div>
         <div className='text-muted-foreground'>
-          Build Agentic workflows visually on a drag-and-drop canvas or with natural language.
+          The open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce.
         </div>
         <Link
           href='https://sim.ai/signup'
           target='_blank'
           rel='noopener noreferrer'
-          className='group mt-2 inline-flex h-8 w-fit items-center justify-center gap-1 whitespace-nowrap rounded-[10px] border border-[#2AAD6C] bg-gradient-to-b from-[#3ED990] to-[#2AAD6C] px-3 pr-[10px] pl-[12px] font-medium text-sm text-white shadow-[inset_0_2px_4px_0_#5EE8A8] outline-none transition-all hover:shadow-lg focus-visible:border-ring focus-visible:ring-[3px] focus-visible:ring-ring/50'
+          className='group mt-2 inline-flex h-8 w-fit items-center justify-center gap-2 whitespace-nowrap rounded-[5px] border border-[#33C482] bg-[#33C482] px-[10px] font-medium text-black text-sm outline-none transition-[filter] hover:brightness-110 focus-visible:border-ring focus-visible:ring-[3px] focus-visible:ring-ring/50'
           aria-label='Get started with Sim - Sign up for free'
         >
           <span>Get started</span>

apps/docs/components/icons.tsx

@@ -124,6 +124,34 @@ export function NoteIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   )
 }
 
+export function WorkdayIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
+  const id = useId()
+  const clipId = `workday_clip_${id}`
+  return (
+    <svg {...props} viewBox='0 0 64 64' fill='none' xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'>
+      <g clipPath={`url(#${clipId})`} transform='matrix(0.53333333,0,0,0.53333333,-124.63685,-16)'>
+        <path
+          fillRule='evenodd'
+          clipRule='evenodd'
+          d='m 251.21,88.7755 h 8.224 c 1.166,0 2.178,0.7836 2.444,1.8924 l 11.057,44.6751 c 0.152,0.002 12.182,-44.6393 12.182,-44.6393 0.306,-1.1361 1.36,-1.9282 2.566,-1.9282 h 12.74 c 1.144,0 2.144,0.7515 2.435,1.8296 l 12.118,44.9289 c 0.448,-0.282 11.147,-44.8661 11.147,-44.8661 0.267,-1.1088 1.279,-1.8924 2.444,-1.8924 h 8.219 c 1.649,0 2.854,1.5192 2.437,3.0742 l -15.08,56.3173 c -0.286,1.072 -1.272,1.823 -2.406,1.833 l -12.438,-0.019 c -1.142,-0.002 -2.137,-0.744 -2.429,-1.819 -2.126,-7.805 -12.605,-47.277 -12.605,-47.277 0,0 -11.008,39.471 -13.133,47.277 -0.293,1.075 -1.288,1.817 -2.429,1.819 L 266.264,150 c -1.133,-0.01 -2.119,-0.761 -2.406,-1.833 L 248.777,91.8438 c -0.416,-1.5524 0.786,-3.0683 2.433,-3.0683 z'
+          fill='#005cb9'
+        />
+        <path
+          fillRule='evenodd'
+          clipRule='evenodd'
+          d='m 333.324,72.2449 c 0.531,0 1.071,-0.0723 1.608,-0.2234 3.18,-0.8968 5.039,-4.2303 4.153,-7.446 -0.129,-0.4673 -0.265,-0.9327 -0.408,-1.3936 C 332.529,43.3349 314.569,30 293.987,30 c -20.557,0 -38.51,13.3133 -44.673,33.1281 -0.136,0.4355 -0.267,0.8782 -0.391,1.3232 -0.902,3.2119 0.943,6.5541 4.12,7.4645 3.173,0.9112 6.48,-0.9547 7.381,-4.1666 0.094,-0.3322 0.19,-0.6616 0.292,-0.9892 4.591,-14.7582 17.961,-24.6707 33.271,-24.6707 15.329,0 28.704,9.9284 33.281,24.7063 0.105,0.3397 0.206,0.682 0.301,1.0263 0.737,2.6726 3.139,4.423 5.755,4.423 z'
+          fill='#f38b00'
+        />
+      </g>
+      <defs>
+        <clipPath id={clipId}>
+          <path d='M 354,30 H 234 v 120 h 120 z' fill='#ffffff' />
+        </clipPath>
+      </defs>
+    </svg>
+  )
+}
+
 export function WorkflowIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   return (
     <svg
@@ -548,6 +576,34 @@ export function GithubIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   )
 }
 
+export function GithubOutlineIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
+  return (
+    <svg
+      {...props}
+      width='24'
+      height='24'
+      viewBox='0 0 24 24'
+      fill='none'
+      xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'
+    >
+      <path
+        d='M15 21C15 21 15 18.73 15 18C15 17.37 15.15 16.04 14.5 15.5C15.89 15.37 16.98 14.92 18 14C19.02 13.08 19.5 11.69 19.5 9.5C19.5 8 19.25 7 18.5 6C18.79 5.22 18.84 4 18.5 3C16.94 3 15.53 4.07 15 4.5C14.61 4.4 13.67 4 12 4C10.33 4 9.39 4.4 9 4.5C8.47 4.07 7.06 3 5.5 3C5.16 4 5.21 5.22 5.5 6C4.75 7 4.5 8 4.5 9.5C4.5 11.69 4.98 13.08 6 14C7.02 14.92 8.11 15.37 9.5 15.5C8.85 16.04 9 17.37 9 18C9 18.73 9 21 9 21'
+        stroke='currentColor'
+        strokeWidth='2'
+        strokeLinecap='round'
+        strokeLinejoin='round'
+      />
+      <path
+        d='M9 19C7.59 19 6.16 18.44 5.31 17.81C4.47 17.18 4.22 16.15 3 15.5'
+        stroke='currentColor'
+        strokeWidth='2'
+        strokeLinecap='round'
+        strokeLinejoin='round'
+      />
+    </svg>
+  )
+}
+
 export function GitLabIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   return (
     <svg {...props} width='24' height='24' viewBox='0 0 24 24' xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'>
@@ -1118,6 +1174,25 @@ export function DevinIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   )
 }
 
+export function DocuSignIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
+  return (
+    <svg {...props} viewBox='0 0 1547 1549' xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'>
+      <path
+        d='m1113.4 1114.9v395.6c0 20.8-16.7 37.6-37.5 37.6h-1038.4c-20.7 0-37.5-16.8-37.5-37.6v-1039c0-20.7 16.8-37.5 37.5-37.5h394.3v643.4c0 20.7 16.8 37.5 37.5 37.5z'
+        fill='#4c00ff'
+      />
+      <path
+        d='m1546 557.1c0 332.4-193.9 557-432.6 557.8v-418.8c0-12-4.8-24-13.5-31.9l-217.1-217.4c-8.8-8.8-20-13.6-32-13.6h-418.2v-394.8c0-20.8 16.8-37.6 37.5-37.6h585.1c277.7-0.8 490.8 223 490.8 556.3z'
+        fill='#ff5252'
+      />
+      <path
+        d='m1099.9 663.4c8.7 8.7 13.5 19.9 13.5 31.9v418.8h-643.3c-20.7 0-37.5-16.8-37.5-37.5v-643.4h418.2c12 0 24 4.8 32 13.6z'
+        fill='#000000'
+      />
+    </svg>
+  )
+}
+
 export function DiscordIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   return (
     <svg
@@ -1362,7 +1437,7 @@ export function AmplitudeIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   return (
     <svg {...props} xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg' viewBox='0 0 49 49'>
       <path
-        fill='#FFFFFF'
+        fill='currentColor'
         d='M23.4,15.3c0.6,1.8,1.2,4.1,1.9,6.7c-2.6,0-5.3-0.1-7.8-0.1h-1.3c1.5-5.7,3.2-10.1,4.6-11.1 c0.1-0.1,0.2-0.1,0.4-0.1c0.2,0,0.3,0.1,0.5,0.3C21.9,11.5,22.5,12.7,23.4,15.3z M49,24.5C49,38,38,49,24.5,49S0,38,0,24.5 S11,0,24.5,0S49,11,49,24.5z M42.7,23.9c0-0.6-0.4-1.2-1-1.3l0,0l0,0l0,0c-0.1,0-0.1,0-0.2,0h-0.2c-4.1-0.3-8.4-0.4-12.4-0.5l0,0 C27,14.8,24.5,7.4,21.3,7.4c-3,0-5.8,4.9-8.2,14.5c-1.7,0-3.2,0-4.6-0.1c-0.1,0-0.2,0-0.2,0c-0.3,0-0.5,0-0.5,0 c-0.8,0.1-1.4,0.9-1.4,1.7c0,0.8,0.6,1.6,1.5,1.7l0,0h4.6c-0.4,1.9-0.8,3.8-1.1,5.6l-0.1,0.8l0,0c0,0.6,0.5,1.1,1.1,1.1 c0.4,0,0.8-0.2,1-0.5l0,0l2.2-7.1h10.7c0.8,3.1,1.7,6.3,2.8,9.3c0.6,1.6,2,5.4,4.4,5.4l0,0c3.6,0,5-5.8,5.9-9.6 c0.2-0.8,0.4-1.5,0.5-2.1l0.1-0.2l0,0c0-0.1,0-0.2,0-0.3c-0.1-0.2-0.2-0.3-0.4-0.4c-0.3-0.1-0.5,0.1-0.6,0.4l0,0l-0.1,0.2 c-0.3,0.8-0.6,1.6-0.8,2.3v0.1c-1.6,4.4-2.3,6.4-3.7,6.4l0,0l0,0l0,0c-1.8,0-3.5-7.3-4.1-10.1c-0.1-0.5-0.2-0.9-0.3-1.3h11.7 c0.2,0,0.4-0.1,0.6-0.1l0,0c0,0,0,0,0.1,0c0,0,0,0,0.1,0l0,0c0,0,0.1,0,0.1-0.1l0,0C42.5,24.6,42.7,24.3,42.7,23.9z'
       />
     </svg>
@@ -2068,7 +2143,7 @@ export function LangsmithIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
 
 export function LemlistIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   return (
-    <svg {...props} xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg' viewBox='0 0 180 181' fill='none'>
+    <svg {...props} xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg' viewBox='24 24.92 132 132' fill='none'>
       <path
         fillRule='evenodd'
         clipRule='evenodd'
@@ -3057,6 +3132,22 @@ export function QdrantIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   )
 }
 
+export function QuiverIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
+  return (
+    <svg {...props} viewBox='0 0 250 250' fill='none' xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'>
+      <path d='m249.3 0.88h-248.5v248.2h248.5v-248.2z' fill='#F6F6F7' />
+      <path
+        d='m124.3 25h-5.93l-1.95 0.59-7.9 0.29-1.47 0.88-7.9 1.18-1.18 0.88-9.09 2.85-0.88 0.88-11.86 5.93-0.88 1.18-6.23 2.55-8.29 8.3-7.61 4.75-5.34 8.6-5.04 4.75-4.46 8.6-2.05 1.18-3.26 8.6-0.88 0.59-3.85 12.16-0.59 0.59-2.35 13.04v1.47l-0.59 7.12 0.3 1.18-0.3 3.15 1.18 13.04 0.59 0.88 0.88 7.51 0.88 1.18 3.85 12.16 0.88 0.6 4.44 9.97 1.18 0.88 4.15 8 12.73 16.17 4.45 2.06 8.8 8.3 0.88 0.29 4.16 3.15h1.18l8.2 4.75h0.88l7.9 3.44h0.88l9.38 2.85 0.88 0.3 13.33 1.46h107.9v-101.3l-0.88-2.06v-8.3l-0.59-0.88v-4.16l-4.75-14.23v-4.16l-11.26-19.46-1.48-1.48-10.37-13.05-5.63-3.15-7.61-7.31-3.15-1.18-5.93-4.75-1.48-0.29-7.01-4.15h-1.18l-8.2-3.15h-0.88l-10.37-3.14h-1.18l-8.49-1.18-2.06-0.88h-7.5z'
+        fill='#333'
+      />
+      <path
+        d='m78.38 72.26 118.6 41.21c4.65 1.69 3.47 8.5-1.47 8.5h-74v74.32c0 5.04-7.11 5.92-8.78 1.17l-40.58-118.5c-1.28-3.95 2.27-8.11 6.19-6.72z'
+        fill='#F9F9F9'
+      />
+    </svg>
+  )
+}
+
 export function AshbyIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   return (
     <svg {...props} viewBox='0 0 254 260' fill='none' xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'>
@@ -4063,6 +4154,16 @@ export function IncidentioIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   )
 }
 
+export function InfisicalIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
+  return (
+    <svg {...props} viewBox='20 25 233 132' xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'>
+      <path
+        d='m191.6 39.4c-20.3 0-37.15 13.21-52.9 30.61-12.99-16.4-29.8-30.61-51.06-30.61-27.74 0-50.44 23.86-50.44 51.33 0 26.68 21.43 51.8 48.98 51.8 20.55 0 37.07-13.86 51.32-31.81 12.69 16.97 29.1 31.41 53.2 31.41 27.13 0 49.85-22.96 49.85-51.4 0-27.12-20.44-51.33-48.95-51.33zm-104.3 77.94c-14.56 0-25.51-12.84-25.51-26.07 0-13.7 10.95-28.29 25.51-28.29 14.93 0 25.71 11.6 37.6 27.34-11.31 15.21-22.23 27.02-37.6 27.02zm104.4 0.25c-15 0-25.28-11.13-37.97-27.37 12.69-16.4 22.01-27.24 37.59-27.24 14.97 0 24.79 13.25 24.79 27.26 0 13-10.17 27.35-24.41 27.35z'
+        fill='#000000'
+      />
+    </svg>
+  )
+}
 export function IntercomIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   return (
     <svg
@@ -4168,7 +4269,7 @@ export function ZoomIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
       fill='currentColor'
       width='800px'
       height='800px'
-      viewBox='0 0 32 32'
+      viewBox='-1 9.5 34 13'
       version='1.1'
       xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'
     >
@@ -4541,11 +4642,17 @@ export function ShopifyIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
 
 export function BoxCompanyIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   return (
-    <svg {...props} xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg' viewBox='0 0 41 22'>
-      <path
-        d='M39.7 19.2c.5.7.4 1.6-.2 2.1-.7.5-1.7.4-2.2-.2l-3.5-4.5-3.4 4.4c-.5.7-1.5.7-2.2.2-.7-.5-.8-1.4-.3-2.1l4-5.2-4-5.2c-.5-.7-.3-1.7.3-2.2.7-.5 1.7-.3 2.2.3l3.4 4.5L37.3 7c.5-.7 1.4-.8 2.2-.3.7.5.7 1.5.2 2.2L35.8 14l3.9 5.2zm-18.2-.6c-2.6 0-4.7-2-4.7-4.6 0-2.5 2.1-4.6 4.7-4.6s4.7 2.1 4.7 4.6c-.1 2.6-2.2 4.6-4.7 4.6zm-13.8 0c-2.6 0-4.7-2-4.7-4.6 0-2.5 2.1-4.6 4.7-4.6s4.7 2.1 4.7 4.6c0 2.6-2.1 4.6-4.7 4.6zM21.5 6.4c-2.9 0-5.5 1.6-6.8 4-1.3-2.4-3.9-4-6.9-4-1.8 0-3.4.6-4.7 1.5V1.5C3.1.7 2.4 0 1.6 0 .7 0 0 .7 0 1.5v12.6c.1 4.2 3.5 7.5 7.7 7.5 3 0 5.6-1.7 6.9-4.1 1.3 2.4 3.9 4.1 6.8 4.1 4.3 0 7.8-3.4 7.8-7.7.1-4.1-3.4-7.5-7.7-7.5z'
-        fill='currentColor'
-      />
+    <svg
+      {...props}
+      xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'
+      width='2500'
+      height='1379'
+      viewBox='0 0 444.893 245.414'
+    >
+      <g fill='#0075C9'>
+        <path d='M239.038 72.43c-33.081 0-61.806 18.6-76.322 45.904-14.516-27.305-43.24-45.902-76.32-45.902-19.443 0-37.385 6.424-51.821 17.266V16.925h-.008C34.365 7.547 26.713 0 17.286 0 7.858 0 .208 7.547.008 16.925H0v143.333h.036c.768 47.051 39.125 84.967 86.359 84.967 33.08 0 61.805-18.603 76.32-45.908 14.517 27.307 43.241 45.906 76.321 45.906 47.715 0 86.396-38.684 86.396-86.396.001-47.718-38.682-86.397-86.394-86.397zM86.395 210.648c-28.621 0-51.821-23.201-51.821-51.82 0-28.623 23.201-51.823 51.821-51.823 28.621 0 51.822 23.2 51.822 51.823 0 28.619-23.201 51.82-51.822 51.82zm152.643 0c-28.622 0-51.821-23.201-51.821-51.822 0-28.623 23.2-51.821 51.821-51.821 28.619 0 51.822 23.198 51.822 51.821-.001 28.621-23.203 51.822-51.822 51.822z' />
+        <path d='M441.651 218.033l-44.246-59.143 44.246-59.144-.008-.007c5.473-7.62 3.887-18.249-3.652-23.913-7.537-5.658-18.187-4.221-23.98 3.157l-.004-.002-38.188 51.047-38.188-51.047-.006.009c-5.793-7.385-16.441-8.822-23.981-3.16-7.539 5.664-9.125 16.293-3.649 23.911l-.008.005 44.245 59.144-44.245 59.143.008.005c-5.477 7.62-3.89 18.247 3.649 23.909 7.54 5.664 18.188 4.225 23.981-3.155l.006.007 38.188-51.049 38.188 51.049.004-.002c5.794 7.377 16.443 8.814 23.98 3.154 7.539-5.662 9.125-16.291 3.652-23.91l.008-.008z' />
+      </g>
     </svg>
   )
 }
@@ -6015,6 +6122,19 @@ export function AgentSkillsIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   )
 }
 
+export function OktaIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
+  return (
+    <svg {...props} viewBox='0 0 63 63' xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'>
+      <path
+        fillRule='evenodd'
+        clipRule='evenodd'
+        d='M34.6.4l-1.3 16c-.6-.1-1.2-.1-1.9-.1-.8 0-1.6.1-2.3.2l-.7-7.7c0-.2.2-.5.4-.5h1.3L29.5.5c0-.2.2-.5.4-.5h4.3c.3 0 .5.2.4.4zm-10.8.8c-.1-.2-.3-.4-.5-.3l-4 1.5c-.3.1-.4.4-.3.6l3.3 7.1-1.2.5c-.2.1-.3.3-.2.6l3.3 7c1.2-.7 2.5-1.2 3.9-1.5L23.8 1.2zM14 5.7l9.3 13.1c-1.2.8-2.2 1.7-3.1 2.7L14.5 16c-.2-.2-.2-.5 0-.6l1-.8L10 9c-.2-.2-.2-.5 0-.6l3.3-2.7c.2-.3.5-.2.7 0zM6.2 13.2c-.2-.1-.5-.1-.6.1l-2.1 3.7c-.1.2 0 .5.2.6l7.1 3.4-.7 1.1c-.1.2 0 .5.2.6l7.1 3.2c.5-1.3 1.2-2.5 2-3.6L6.2 13.2zM.9 23.3c0-.2.3-.4.5-.3l15.5 4c-.4 1.3-.6 2.7-.7 4.1l-7.8-.6c-.2 0-.4-.2-.4-.5l.2-1.3L.6 28c-.2 0-.4-.2-.4-.5l.7-4.2zM.4 33.8c-.3 0-.4.2-.4.5l.8 4.2c0 .2.3.4.5.3l7.6-2 .2 1.3c0 .2.3.4.5.3l7.5-2.1c-.4-1.3-.7-2.7-.8-4.1L.4 33.8zm2.5 11.1c-.1-.2 0-.5.2-.6l14.5-6.9c.5 1.3 1.3 2.5 2.2 3.6l-6.3 4.5c-.2.1-.5.1-.6-.1L12 44.3l-6.5 4.5c-.2.1-.5.1-.6-.1l-2-3.8zm17.5-3L9.1 53.3c-.2.2-.2.5 0 .6l3.3 2.7c.2.2.5.1.6-.1l4.6-6.4 1 .9c.2.2.5.1.6-.1l4.4-6.4c-1.2-.7-2.3-1.6-3.2-2.6zm-2.2 18.2c-.2-.1-.3-.3-.2-.6L24.6 45c1.2.6 2.6 1.1 3.9 1.4l-2 7.5c-.1.2-.3.4-.5.3l-1.2-.5-2.1 7.6c-.1.2-.3.4-.5.3l-4-1.5zm10.9-13.5l-1.3 16c0 .2.2.5.4.5H33c.2 0 .4-.2.4-.5l-.6-7.8h1.3c.2 0 .4-.2.4-.5l-.7-7.7c-.8.1-1.5.2-2.3.2-.6 0-1.3 0-1.9-.1zm16-43.2c.1-.2 0-.5-.2-.6l-4-1.5c-.2-.1-.5.1-.5.3l-2.1 7.6-1.2-.5c-.2-.1-.5.1-.5.3l-2 7.5c1.4.3 2.7.8 3.9 1.4l6.6-14.5zm8.8 6.3L42.6 21.1c-.9-1-2-1.9-3.2-2.6l4.4-6.4c.1-.2.4-.2.6-.1l1 .9 4.6-6.4c.1-.2.4-.2.6-.1l3.3 2.7c.2.2.2.5 0 .6zM59.9 18.7c.2-.1.3-.4.2-.6L58 14.4c-.1-.2-.4-.3-.6-.1l-6.5 4.5-.7-1.1c-.1-.2-.4-.3-.6-.1L43.3 22c.9 1.1 1.6 2.3 2.2 3.6l14.4-6.9zm2.3 5.8l.7 4.2c0 .2-.1.5-.4.5l-15.9 1.5c-.1-1.4-.4-2.8-.8-4.1l7.5-2.1c.2-.1.5.1.5.3l.2 1.3 7.6-2c.3-.1.5.1.6.4zM61.5 40c.2.1.5-.1.5-.3l.7-4.2c0-.2-.1-.5-.4-.5l-7.8-.7.2-1.3c0-.2-.1-.5-.4-.5l-7.8-.6c0 1.4-.3 2.8-.7 4.1L61.5 40zm-4.1 9.6c-.1.2-.4.3-.6.1l-13.2-9.1c.8-1.1 1.5-2.3 2-3.6l7.1 3.2c.2.1.3.4.2.6L52.2 42l7.1 3.4c.2.1.3.4.2.6l-2.1 3.6zm-17.7-5.4L49 57.3c.1.2.4.2.6.1l3.3-2.7c.2-.2.2-.4 0-.6l-5.5-5.6 1-.8c.2-.2.2-.4 0-.6l-5.5-5.5c1.1.8 0 1.7-1.2 2.4zm0 17.8c-.2.1-.5-.1-.5-.3l-4.2-15.4c1.4-.3 2.7-.8 3.9-1.5l3.3 7c.1.2 0 .5-.2.6l-1.2.5 3.3 7.1c.1.2 0 .5-.2.6L39.7 62z'
+        fill='currentColor'
+      />
+    </svg>
+  )
+}
+
 export function OnePasswordIcon(props: SVGProps<SVGSVGElement>) {
   return (
     <svg {...props} viewBox='0 0 48 48' xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg' fill='none'>

apps/docs/components/navbar/navbar.tsx

@@ -8,65 +8,88 @@ import { SimLogoFull } from '@/components/ui/sim-logo'
 import { ThemeToggle } from '@/components/ui/theme-toggle'
 import { cn } from '@/lib/utils'
 
+const NAV_TABS = [
+  {
+    label: 'Documentation',
+    href: '/introduction',
+    match: (p: string) => !p.includes('/api-reference'),
+    external: false,
+  },
+  {
+    label: 'API Reference',
+    href: '/api-reference/getting-started',
+    match: (p: string) => p.includes('/api-reference'),
+    external: false,
+  },
+  { label: 'Mothership', href: 'https://sim.ai', external: true },
+] as const
+
 export function Navbar() {
   const pathname = usePathname()
-  const isApiReference = pathname.includes('/api-reference')
 
   return (
-    <nav className='sticky top-0 z-50 border-border/50 border-b bg-background/80 backdrop-blur-md backdrop-saturate-150'>
-      {/* Desktop: Single row layout */}
-      <div className='hidden h-16 w-full items-center lg:flex'>
+    <nav className='sticky top-0 z-50 bg-background/80 backdrop-blur-md backdrop-saturate-150'>
+      <div className='hidden w-full flex-col lg:flex'>
+        {/* Top row: logo, search, controls */}
         <div
-          className='relative flex w-full items-center justify-between'
+          className='relative flex h-[52px] w-full items-center justify-between'
           style={{
             paddingLeft: 'calc(var(--sidebar-offset) + 32px)',
             paddingRight: 'calc(var(--toc-offset) + 60px)',
           }}
         >
-          {/* Left cluster: logo */}
-          <div className='flex items-center'>
-            <Link href='/' className='flex min-w-[100px] items-center'>
-              <SimLogoFull className='h-7 w-auto' />
-            </Link>
-          </div>
+          <Link href='/' className='flex min-w-[100px] items-center'>
+            <SimLogoFull className='h-7 w-auto' />
+          </Link>
 
-          {/* Center cluster: search - absolutely positioned to center */}
           <div className='-translate-x-1/2 absolute left-1/2 flex items-center justify-center'>
             <SearchTrigger />
           </div>
 
-          {/* Right cluster aligns with TOC edge */}
           <div className='flex items-center gap-1'>
-            <Link
-              href='/introduction'
-              className={cn(
-                'rounded-xl px-3 py-2 font-normal text-[0.9375rem] leading-[1.4] transition-colors hover:bg-foreground/8 hover:text-foreground',
-                !isApiReference ? 'text-foreground' : 'text-foreground/60'
-              )}
-            >
-              Documentation
-            </Link>
-            <Link
-              href='/api-reference/getting-started'
-              className={cn(
-                'rounded-xl px-3 py-2 font-normal text-[0.9375rem] leading-[1.4] transition-colors hover:bg-foreground/8 hover:text-foreground',
-                isApiReference ? 'text-foreground' : 'text-foreground/60'
-              )}
-            >
-              API
-            </Link>
-            <Link
-              href='https://sim.ai'
-              target='_blank'
-              rel='noopener noreferrer'
-              className='rounded-xl px-3 py-2 font-normal text-[0.9375rem] text-foreground/60 leading-[1.4] transition-colors hover:bg-foreground/8 hover:text-foreground'
-            >
-              Platform
-            </Link>
             <LanguageDropdown />
             <ThemeToggle />
           </div>
         </div>
+
+        {/* Divider — only spans content width */}
+        <div
+          className='border-b'
+          style={{
+            marginLeft: 'calc(var(--sidebar-offset) + 32px)',
+            marginRight: 'calc(var(--toc-offset) + 60px)',
+            borderColor: 'rgba(128, 128, 128, 0.1)',
+          }}
+        />
+
+        {/* Bottom row: navigation tabs — border on row, tabs overlap it */}
+        <div
+          className='flex h-[40px] items-stretch gap-6 border-border/20 border-b'
+          style={{
+            paddingLeft: 'calc(var(--sidebar-offset) + 32px)',
+          }}
+        >
+          {NAV_TABS.map((tab) => {
+            const isActive = !tab.external && tab.match(pathname)
+            return (
+              <Link
+                key={tab.label}
+                href={tab.href}
+                {...(tab.external ? { target: '_blank', rel: 'noopener noreferrer' } : {})}
+                className={cn(
+                  '-mb-px relative flex items-center border-b text-[14px] tracking-[-0.01em] transition-colors',
+                  isActive
+                    ? 'border-neutral-400 font-[550] text-neutral-800 dark:border-neutral-500 dark:text-neutral-200'
+                    : 'border-transparent font-medium text-fd-muted-foreground hover:border-neutral-300 hover:text-neutral-600 dark:hover:border-neutral-600 dark:hover:text-neutral-400'
+                )}
+              >
+                {/* Invisible bold text reserves width to prevent layout shift */}
+                <span className='invisible font-[550]'>{tab.label}</span>
+                <span className='absolute'>{tab.label}</span>
+              </Link>
+            )
+          })}
+        </div>
       </div>
     </nav>
   )

apps/docs/components/structured-data.tsx

@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ export function StructuredData({
     name: 'Sim Documentation',
     url: baseUrl,
     description:
-      'Comprehensive documentation for Sim visual workflow builder for AI applications. Create powerful AI agents, automation workflows, and data processing pipelines.',
+      'Documentation for Sim — the open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce. Connect 1,000+ integrations and LLMs to deploy and orchestrate agentic workflows.',
     publisher: {
       '@type': 'Organization',
       name: 'Sim',
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ export function StructuredData({
     applicationCategory: 'DeveloperApplication',
     operatingSystem: 'Any',
     description:
-      'Visual workflow builder for AI applications. Create powerful AI agents, automation workflows, and data processing pipelines by connecting blocks on a canvas—no coding required.',
+      'Sim is the open-source platform to build AI agents and run your agentic workforce. Connect 1,000+ integrations and LLMs to deploy and orchestrate agentic workflows. Create agents, workflows, knowledge bases, tables, and docs.',
     url: baseUrl,
     author: {
       '@type': 'Organization',
@@ -109,12 +109,13 @@ export function StructuredData({
       category: 'Developer Tools',
     },
     featureList: [
-      'Visual workflow builder with drag-and-drop interface',
-      'AI agent creation and automation',
-      '80+ built-in integrations',
-      'Real-time team collaboration',
-      'Multiple deployment options',
-      'Custom integrations via MCP protocol',
+      'AI agent creation',
+      'Agentic workflow orchestration',
+      '1,000+ integrations',
+      'LLM orchestration (OpenAI, Anthropic, Google, xAI, Mistral, Perplexity)',
+      'Knowledge base creation',
+      'Table creation',
+      'Document creation',
     ],
   }
 

apps/docs/components/ui/animated-blocks.tsx

@@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
+import { memo } from 'react'
+
+const RX = '2.59574'
+
+interface BlockRect {
+  opacity: number
+  width: string
+  height: string
+  fill: string
+  x?: string
+  y?: string
+  transform?: string
+}
+
+const RECTS = {
+  topRight: [
+    { opacity: 1, x: '0', y: '0', width: '16.8626', height: '33.7252', fill: '#2ABBF8' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '0', y: '0', width: '85.3433', height: '16.8626', fill: '#2ABBF8' },
+    { opacity: 1, x: '0', y: '0', width: '16.8626', height: '16.8626', fill: '#2ABBF8' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '34.2403', y: '0', width: '34.2403', height: '33.7252', fill: '#2ABBF8' },
+    { opacity: 1, x: '34.2403', y: '0', width: '16.8626', height: '16.8626', fill: '#2ABBF8' },
+    {
+      opacity: 1,
+      x: '51.6188',
+      y: '16.8626',
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '16.8626',
+      fill: '#2ABBF8',
+    },
+    { opacity: 1, x: '68.4812', y: '0', width: '54.6502', height: '16.8626', fill: '#00F701' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '106.268', y: '0', width: '34.2403', height: '33.7252', fill: '#00F701' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '106.268', y: '0', width: '51.103', height: '16.8626', fill: '#00F701' },
+    {
+      opacity: 1,
+      x: '123.6484',
+      y: '16.8626',
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '16.8626',
+      fill: '#00F701',
+    },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '157.371', y: '0', width: '34.2403', height: '16.8626', fill: '#FFCC02' },
+    { opacity: 1, x: '157.371', y: '0', width: '16.8626', height: '16.8626', fill: '#FFCC02' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '208.993', y: '0', width: '68.4805', height: '16.8626', fill: '#FA4EDF' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '209.137', y: '0', width: '16.8626', height: '33.7252', fill: '#FA4EDF' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '243.233', y: '0', width: '34.2403', height: '33.7252', fill: '#FA4EDF' },
+    { opacity: 1, x: '243.233', y: '0', width: '16.8626', height: '16.8626', fill: '#FA4EDF' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '260.096', y: '0', width: '34.04', height: '16.8626', fill: '#FA4EDF' },
+    {
+      opacity: 1,
+      x: '260.611',
+      y: '16.8626',
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '16.8626',
+      fill: '#FA4EDF',
+    },
+  ],
+  bottomLeft: [
+    { opacity: 1, x: '0', y: '0', width: '16.8626', height: '33.7252', fill: '#2ABBF8' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '0', y: '0', width: '85.3433', height: '16.8626', fill: '#2ABBF8' },
+    { opacity: 1, x: '0', y: '0', width: '16.8626', height: '16.8626', fill: '#2ABBF8' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '34.2403', y: '0', width: '34.2403', height: '33.7252', fill: '#2ABBF8' },
+    { opacity: 1, x: '34.2403', y: '0', width: '16.8626', height: '16.8626', fill: '#2ABBF8' },
+    {
+      opacity: 1,
+      x: '51.6188',
+      y: '16.8626',
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '16.8626',
+      fill: '#2ABBF8',
+    },
+    { opacity: 1, x: '68.4812', y: '0', width: '54.6502', height: '16.8626', fill: '#00F701' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '106.268', y: '0', width: '34.2403', height: '33.7252', fill: '#00F701' },
+    { opacity: 0.6, x: '106.268', y: '0', width: '51.103', height: '16.8626', fill: '#00F701' },
+    {
+      opacity: 1,
+      x: '123.6484',
+      y: '16.8626',
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '16.8626',
+      fill: '#00F701',
+    },
+  ],
+  bottomRight: [
+    {
+      opacity: 0.6,
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '33.726',
+      fill: '#FA4EDF',
+      transform: 'matrix(0 1 1 0 0 0)',
+    },
+    {
+      opacity: 0.6,
+      width: '34.241',
+      height: '16.8626',
+      fill: '#FA4EDF',
+      transform: 'matrix(0 1 1 0 16.891 0)',
+    },
+    {
+      opacity: 0.6,
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '68.482',
+      fill: '#FA4EDF',
+      transform: 'matrix(-1 0 0 1 33.739 16.888)',
+    },
+    {
+      opacity: 0.6,
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '33.726',
+      fill: '#FA4EDF',
+      transform: 'matrix(0 1 1 0 0 33.776)',
+    },
+    {
+      opacity: 1,
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '16.8626',
+      fill: '#FA4EDF',
+      transform: 'matrix(-1 0 0 1 33.739 34.272)',
+    },
+    {
+      opacity: 0.6,
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '34.24',
+      fill: '#2ABBF8',
+      transform: 'matrix(-1 0 0 1 33.787 68)',
+    },
+    {
+      opacity: 0.4,
+      width: '16.8626',
+      height: '16.8626',
+      fill: '#1A8FCC',
+      transform: 'matrix(-1 0 0 1 33.787 85)',
+    },
+  ],
+} as const satisfies Record<string, readonly BlockRect[]>
+
+const GLOBAL_OPACITY = 0.55
+
+const BlockGroup = memo(function BlockGroup({
+  width,
+  height,
+  viewBox,
+  rects,
+}: {
+  width: number
+  height: number
+  viewBox: string
+  rects: readonly BlockRect[]
+}) {
+  return (
+    <svg
+      width={width}
+      height={height}
+      viewBox={viewBox}
+      fill='none'
+      xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2000/svg'
+      className='h-auto w-full'
+      style={{ opacity: GLOBAL_OPACITY }}
+    >
+      {rects.map((r, i) => (
+        <rect
+          key={i}
+          x={r.x}
+          y={r.y}
+          width={r.width}
+          height={r.height}
+          rx={RX}
+          fill={r.fill}
+          transform={r.transform}
+          opacity={r.opacity}
+        />
+      ))}
+    </svg>
+  )
+})
+
+export function AnimatedBlocks() {
+  return (
+    <div
+      className='pointer-events-none fixed inset-0 z-0 hidden overflow-hidden lg:block'
+      aria-hidden='true'
+    >
+      <div className='absolute top-[93px] right-0 w-[calc(140px+10.76vw)] max-w-[295px]'>
+        <BlockGroup width={295} height={34} viewBox='0 0 295 34' rects={RECTS.topRight} />
+      </div>
+
+      <div className='-left-24 absolute bottom-0 w-[calc(140px+10.76vw)] max-w-[295px] rotate-180'>
+        <BlockGroup width={295} height={34} viewBox='0 0 295 34' rects={RECTS.bottomLeft} />
+      </div>
+
+      <div className='-bottom-2 absolute right-0 w-[calc(16px+1.25vw)] max-w-[34px]'>
+        <BlockGroup width={34} height={102} viewBox='0 0 34 102' rects={RECTS.bottomRight} />
+      </div>
+    </div>
+  )
+}

apps/docs/components/ui/dropdown-menu.tsx

@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+'use client'
+
+import * as React from 'react'
+import * as DropdownMenuPrimitive from '@radix-ui/react-dropdown-menu'
+import { Check } from 'lucide-react'
+import { cn } from '@/lib/utils'
+
+const DropdownMenu = DropdownMenuPrimitive.Root
+const DropdownMenuTrigger = DropdownMenuPrimitive.Trigger
+
+const DropdownMenuContent = React.forwardRef<
+  React.ElementRef<typeof DropdownMenuPrimitive.Content>,
+  React.ComponentPropsWithoutRef<typeof DropdownMenuPrimitive.Content>
+>(({ className, sideOffset = 4, ...props }, ref) => (
+  <DropdownMenuPrimitive.Portal>
+    <DropdownMenuPrimitive.Content
+      ref={ref}
+      sideOffset={sideOffset}
+      className={cn(
+        'data-[state=closed]:fade-out-0 data-[state=open]:fade-in-0 data-[state=closed]:zoom-out-95 data-[state=open]:zoom-in-95 data-[side=bottom]:slide-in-from-top-2 data-[side=left]:slide-in-from-right-2 data-[side=right]:slide-in-from-left-2 data-[side=top]:slide-in-from-bottom-2 z-50 max-h-[var(--radix-dropdown-menu-content-available-height)] min-w-[8rem] origin-[--radix-dropdown-menu-content-transform-origin] overflow-y-auto overflow-x-hidden rounded-md border bg-popover p-1 text-popover-foreground shadow-md data-[state=closed]:animate-out data-[state=open]:animate-in',
+        className
+      )}
+      {...props}
+    />
+  </DropdownMenuPrimitive.Portal>
+))
+DropdownMenuContent.displayName = DropdownMenuPrimitive.Content.displayName
+
+const DropdownMenuItem = React.forwardRef<
+  React.ElementRef<typeof DropdownMenuPrimitive.Item>,
+  React.ComponentPropsWithoutRef<typeof DropdownMenuPrimitive.Item>
+>(({ className, ...props }, ref) => (
+  <DropdownMenuPrimitive.Item
+    ref={ref}
+    className={cn(
+      'relative flex cursor-default select-none items-center gap-2 rounded-sm px-2 py-1.5 text-sm outline-none transition-colors focus:bg-accent focus:text-accent-foreground data-[disabled]:pointer-events-none data-[disabled]:opacity-50',
+      className
+    )}
+    {...props}
+  />
+))
+DropdownMenuItem.displayName = DropdownMenuPrimitive.Item.displayName
+
+const DropdownMenuCheckboxItem = React.forwardRef<
+  React.ElementRef<typeof DropdownMenuPrimitive.CheckboxItem>,
+  React.ComponentPropsWithoutRef<typeof DropdownMenuPrimitive.CheckboxItem>
+>(({ className, children, checked, ...props }, ref) => (
+  <DropdownMenuPrimitive.CheckboxItem
+    ref={ref}
+    className={cn(
+      'relative flex cursor-default select-none items-center rounded-sm py-1.5 pr-2 pl-8 text-sm outline-none transition-colors focus:bg-accent focus:text-accent-foreground data-[disabled]:pointer-events-none data-[disabled]:opacity-50',
+      className
+    )}
+    checked={checked}
+    {...props}
+  >
+    <span className='absolute left-2 flex h-3.5 w-3.5 items-center justify-center'>
+      <DropdownMenuPrimitive.ItemIndicator>
+        <Check className='h-4 w-4' />
+      </DropdownMenuPrimitive.ItemIndicator>
+    </span>
+    {children}
+  </DropdownMenuPrimitive.CheckboxItem>
+))
+DropdownMenuCheckboxItem.displayName = DropdownMenuPrimitive.CheckboxItem.displayName
+
+export {
+  DropdownMenu,
+  DropdownMenuTrigger,
+  DropdownMenuContent,
+  DropdownMenuItem,
+  DropdownMenuCheckboxItem,
+}

apps/docs/components/ui/faq.tsx

@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+'use client'
+
+import { useState } from 'react'
+import { ChevronRight } from 'lucide-react'
+
+interface FAQItem {
+  question: string
+  answer: string
+}
+
+interface FAQProps {
+  items: FAQItem[]
+  title?: string
+}
+
+export function FAQ({ items, title = 'Common Questions' }: FAQProps) {
+  const [openIndex, setOpenIndex] = useState<number | null>(null)
+
+  return (
+    <div className='mt-12'>
+      <h2 className='mb-4 font-bold text-xl'>{title}</h2>
+      <div className='rounded-xl border border-border'>
+        {items.map((item, index) => (
+          <div key={index} className={index !== items.length - 1 ? 'border-border border-b' : ''}>
+            <button
+              type='button'
+              onClick={() => setOpenIndex(openIndex === index ? null : index)}
+              className='flex w-full cursor-pointer items-center gap-3 px-5 py-4 text-left font-medium text-[0.9375rem]'
+            >
+              <ChevronRight
+                className={`h-4 w-4 shrink-0 text-fd-muted-foreground transition-transform duration-200 ${
+                  openIndex === index ? 'rotate-90' : ''
+                }`}
+              />
+              {item.question}
+            </button>
+            {openIndex === index && (
+              <div className='px-5 pb-4 pl-12 text-[0.9375rem] text-fd-muted-foreground leading-relaxed'>
+                {item.answer}
+              </div>
+            )}
+          </div>
+        ))}
+      </div>
+    </div>
+  )
+}

apps/docs/components/ui/icon-mapping.ts

@@ -16,6 +16,8 @@ import {
   AsanaIcon,
   AshbyIcon,
   AttioIcon,
+  AzureIcon,
+  BoxCompanyIcon,
   BrainIcon,
   BrandfetchIcon,
   BrowserUseIcon,
@@ -32,6 +34,7 @@ import {
   DevinIcon,
   DiscordIcon,
   DocumentIcon,
+  DocuSignIcon,
   DropboxIcon,
   DsPyIcon,
   DubIcon,
@@ -79,6 +82,7 @@ import {
   HunterIOIcon,
   ImageIcon,
   IncidentioIcon,
+  InfisicalIcon,
   IntercomIcon,
   JinaAIIcon,
   JiraIcon,
@@ -107,6 +111,7 @@ import {
   Neo4jIcon,
   NotionIcon,
   ObsidianIcon,
+  OktaIcon,
   OnePasswordIcon,
   OpenAIIcon,
   OutlookIcon,
@@ -121,6 +126,7 @@ import {
   PosthogIcon,
   PulseIcon,
   QdrantIcon,
+  QuiverIcon,
   RDSIcon,
   RedditIcon,
   RedisIcon,
@@ -162,6 +168,7 @@ import {
   WhatsAppIcon,
   WikipediaIcon,
   WordpressIcon,
+  WorkdayIcon,
   xIcon,
   YouTubeIcon,
   ZendeskIcon,
@@ -184,6 +191,7 @@ export const blockTypeToIconMap: Record<string, IconComponent> = {
   asana: AsanaIcon,
   ashby: AshbyIcon,
   attio: AttioIcon,
+  box: BoxCompanyIcon,
   brandfetch: BrandfetchIcon,
   browser_use: BrowserUseIcon,
   calcom: CalComIcon,
@@ -198,6 +206,7 @@ export const blockTypeToIconMap: Record<string, IconComponent> = {
   datadog: DatadogIcon,
   devin: DevinIcon,
   discord: DiscordIcon,
+  docusign: DocuSignIcon,
   dropbox: DropboxIcon,
   dspy: DsPyIcon,
   dub: DubIcon,
@@ -246,6 +255,7 @@ export const blockTypeToIconMap: Record<string, IconComponent> = {
   image_generator: ImageIcon,
   imap: MailServerIcon,
   incidentio: IncidentioIcon,
+  infisical: InfisicalIcon,
   intercom_v2: IntercomIcon,
   jina: JinaAIIcon,
   jira: JiraIcon,
@@ -263,6 +273,7 @@ export const blockTypeToIconMap: Record<string, IconComponent> = {
   mailgun: MailgunIcon,
   mem0: Mem0Icon,
   memory: BrainIcon,
+  microsoft_ad: AzureIcon,
   microsoft_dataverse: MicrosoftDataverseIcon,
   microsoft_excel_v2: MicrosoftExcelIcon,
   microsoft_planner: MicrosoftPlannerIcon,
@@ -273,6 +284,7 @@ export const blockTypeToIconMap: Record<string, IconComponent> = {
   neo4j: Neo4jIcon,
   notion_v2: NotionIcon,
   obsidian: ObsidianIcon,
+  okta: OktaIcon,
   onedrive: MicrosoftOneDriveIcon,
   onepassword: OnePasswordIcon,
   openai: OpenAIIcon,
@@ -287,6 +299,7 @@ export const blockTypeToIconMap: Record<string, IconComponent> = {
   posthog: PosthogIcon,
   pulse_v2: PulseIcon,
   qdrant: QdrantIcon,
+  quiver: QuiverIcon,
   rds: RDSIcon,
   reddit: RedditIcon,
   redis: RedisIcon,
@@ -331,6 +344,7 @@ export const blockTypeToIconMap: Record<string, IconComponent> = {
   whatsapp: WhatsAppIcon,
   wikipedia: WikipediaIcon,
   wordpress: WordpressIcon,
+  workday: WorkdayIcon,
   x: xIcon,
   youtube: YouTubeIcon,
   zendesk: ZendeskIcon,

apps/docs/components/ui/image.tsx

@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ export function Image({
       <NextImage
         className={cn(
           'overflow-hidden rounded-xl border border-border object-cover shadow-sm',
-          enableLightbox && 'cursor-pointer transition-opacity hover:opacity-90',
+          enableLightbox && 'cursor-pointer transition-opacity hover:opacity-95',
           className
         )}
         alt={alt}

apps/docs/components/ui/lightbox.tsx

@@ -55,8 +55,9 @@ export function Lightbox({ isOpen, onClose, src, alt, type }: LightboxProps) {
           <img
             src={src}
             alt={alt}
-            className='max-h-[calc(100vh-6rem)] max-w-[calc(100vw-6rem)] rounded-xl object-contain'
+            className='max-h-[75vh] max-w-[75vw] cursor-pointer rounded-xl object-contain'
             loading='lazy'
+            onClick={onClose}
           />
         ) : (
           <video
@@ -65,7 +66,8 @@ export function Lightbox({ isOpen, onClose, src, alt, type }: LightboxProps) {
             loop
             muted
             playsInline
-            className='max-h-[calc(100vh-6rem)] max-w-[calc(100vw-6rem)] rounded-xl outline-none focus:outline-none'
+            className='max-h-[75vh] max-w-[75vw] cursor-pointer rounded-xl outline-none focus:outline-none'
+            onClick={onClose}
           />
         )}
       </div>

apps/docs/components/ui/search-trigger.tsx

@@ -15,23 +15,14 @@ export function SearchTrigger() {
   return (
     <button
       type='button'
-      className='flex h-10 w-[460px] cursor-pointer items-center gap-2 rounded-xl border border-border/50 px-3 py-2 text-sm backdrop-blur-xl transition-colors hover:border-border'
-      style={{
-        backgroundColor: 'hsla(0, 0%, 5%, 0.85)',
-        backdropFilter: 'blur(33px) saturate(180%)',
-        WebkitBackdropFilter: 'blur(33px) saturate(180%)',
-        color: 'rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.6)',
-      }}
+      className='flex h-9 w-[360px] cursor-pointer items-center gap-2 rounded-lg border border-border/50 bg-fd-muted/50 px-3 text-[13px] text-fd-muted-foreground transition-colors hover:border-border hover:text-fd-foreground'
       onClick={handleClick}
     >
-      <Search className='h-4 w-4' />
+      <Search className='h-3.5 w-3.5' />
       <span>Search...</span>
-      <kbd
-        className='ml-auto flex items-center gap-0.5 font-medium'
-        style={{ color: 'rgba(255, 255, 255, 0.6)' }}
-      >
-        <span style={{ fontSize: '15px', lineHeight: '1' }}>⌘</span>
-        <span style={{ fontSize: '13px', lineHeight: '1' }}>K</span>
+      <kbd className='ml-auto flex items-center font-medium'>
+        <span className='text-[15px]'>⌘</span>
+        <span className='text-[12px]'>K</span>
       </kbd>
     </button>
   )

apps/docs/components/ui/video.tsx

@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ export function Video({
         loop={loop}
         muted={muted}
         playsInline={playsInline}
-        className={`${className} ${enableLightbox ? 'cursor-pointer transition-opacity hover:opacity-90' : ''}`}
+        className={`${className} ${enableLightbox ? 'cursor-pointer transition-opacity hover:opacity-95' : ''}`}
         src={getAssetUrl(src)}
         onClick={handleVideoClick}
       />

apps/docs/content/docs/de/api-reference/meta.json

@@ -11,6 +11,8 @@
     "(generated)/workflows",
     "(generated)/logs",
     "(generated)/usage",
-    "(generated)/audit-logs"
+    "(generated)/audit-logs",
+    "(generated)/tables",
+    "(generated)/files"
   ]
 }

apps/docs/content/docs/de/blocks/loop.mdx

@@ -190,13 +190,8 @@ console.log(`${processedItems} gültige Elemente verarbeitet`);
 
 ### Einschränkungen
 
-<Callout type="warning">
-  Container-Blöcke (Schleifen und Parallele) können nicht ineinander verschachtelt werden. Das bedeutet:
-  - Du kannst keinen Schleifenblock in einen anderen Schleifenblock platzieren
-  - Du kannst keinen Parallel-Block in einen Schleifenblock platzieren
-  - Du kannst keinen Container-Block in einen anderen Container-Block platzieren
-  
-  Wenn du mehrdimensionale Iterationen benötigst, erwäge eine Umstrukturierung deines Workflows, um sequentielle Schleifen zu verwenden oder Daten in Stufen zu verarbeiten.
+<Callout type="info">
+  Container-Blöcke (Schleifen und Parallele) unterstützen Verschachtelung. Du kannst Schleifen in Schleifen, Parallele in Schleifen und jede Kombination von Container-Blöcken platzieren, um komplexe mehrdimensionale Workflows zu erstellen.
 </Callout>
 
 <Callout type="info">

apps/docs/content/docs/de/blocks/parallel.mdx

@@ -142,11 +142,8 @@ Jede parallele Instanz läuft unabhängig:
 
 ### Einschränkungen
 
-<Callout type="warning">
-  Container-Blöcke (Schleifen und Parallele) können nicht ineinander verschachtelt werden. Das bedeutet:
-  - Sie können keinen Schleifenblock in einen Parallelblock platzieren
-  - Sie können keinen weiteren Parallelblock in einen Parallelblock platzieren
-  - Sie können keinen Container-Block in einen anderen Container-Block platzieren
+<Callout type="info">
+  Container-Blöcke (Schleifen und Parallele) unterstützen Verschachtelung. Sie können Parallele in Parallele, Schleifen in Parallele und jede Kombination von Container-Blöcken platzieren, um komplexe mehrdimensionale Workflows zu erstellen.
 </Callout>
 
 <Callout type="info">

apps/docs/content/docs/en/api-reference/meta.json

@@ -11,6 +11,9 @@
     "(generated)/workflows",
     "(generated)/logs",
     "(generated)/usage",
-    "(generated)/audit-logs"
+    "(generated)/audit-logs",
+    "(generated)/tables",
+    "(generated)/files",
+    "(generated)/knowledge-bases"
   ]
 }

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/agent.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Agent
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Agent block connects your workflow to Large Language Models (LLMs). It processes natural language inputs, calls external tools, and generates structured or unstructured outputs.
 
@@ -58,7 +59,7 @@ Controls response randomness and creativity:
 
 ### Max Output Tokens
 
-Controls the maximum length of the model's response. For Anthropic models, Sim uses reliable defaults: streaming executions use the model's full capacity (e.g. 64,000 tokens for Claude 4.5), while non-streaming executions default to 8,192 to avoid timeout issues. When using tools with Anthropic models, intermediate tool-calling requests use a capped limit of 8,192 tokens to avoid SDK timeout errors, regardless of your configured max tokens—the final streaming response uses your full configured limit. This only affects Anthropic's direct API; AWS Bedrock handles this automatically. For long-form content generation via API, explicitly set a higher value.
+Controls the maximum length of the model's response. Each model defaults to its full max output token limit (e.g., 64,000 tokens for Claude Sonnet 4.5). You can override this with a custom value using the Max Tokens setting. For Anthropic models, when non-streaming requests exceed the SDK's internal threshold, the provider automatically uses internal streaming to avoid timeouts.
 
 ### API Key
 
@@ -78,7 +79,7 @@ Extend agent capabilities with external integrations. Select from 60+ pre-built
 **Execution Modes:**
 - **Auto**: Model decides when to use tools based on context
 - **Required**: Tool must be called in every request
-- **None**: Tool available but not suggested to model
+- **None**: Tool is completely filtered out and not sent to the model — effectively disables the tool
 
 ### Response Format
 
@@ -113,7 +114,7 @@ After an agent completes, you can access its outputs:
 
 - **`<agent.content>`**: The agent's response text or structured data
 - **`<agent.tokens>`**: Token usage statistics (prompt, completion, total)
-- **`<agent.tool_calls>`**: Details of any tools the agent used during execution
+- **`<agent.toolCalls>`**: Details of any tools the agent used during execution
 - **`<agent.cost>`**: Estimated cost of the API call (if available)
 
 ## Advanced Features
@@ -131,8 +132,9 @@ See the [`Memory`](/tools/memory) block reference for details.
 ## Outputs
 
 - **`<agent.content>`**: Agent's response text
+- **`<agent.model>`**: Model identifier used for the request
 - **`<agent.tokens>`**: Token usage statistics
-- **`<agent.tool_calls>`**: Tool execution details
+- **`<agent.toolCalls>`**: Tool execution details
 - **`<agent.cost>`**: Estimated API call cost
 
 ## Example Use Cases
@@ -157,3 +159,13 @@ Input → Agent (Google Search, Notion) → Function (Compile Report)
 - **Be specific in system prompts**: Clearly define the agent's role, tone, and limitations. The more specific your instructions are, the better the agent will be able to fulfill its intended purpose.
 - **Choose the right temperature setting**: Use lower temperature settings (0-0.3) when accuracy is important, or increase temperature (0.7-2.0) for more creative or varied responses
 - **Leverage tools effectively**: Integrate tools that complement the agent's purpose and enhance its capabilities. Be selective about which tools you provide to avoid overwhelming the agent. For tasks with little overlap, use another Agent block for the best results.
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What LLM providers does the Agent block support?", answer: "The Agent block supports OpenAI, Anthropic, Google (Gemini), xAI (Grok), DeepSeek, Groq, Cerebras, Azure OpenAI, Azure Anthropic, Google Vertex AI, AWS Bedrock, OpenRouter, and local models via Ollama or VLLM. You can type or select any supported model from the model combobox." },
+  { question: "What are the memory options for the Agent block?", answer: "The Agent block has four memory modes: None (no memory, each request is independent), Conversation (full conversation history keyed by a conversation ID), Sliding Window by messages (keeps the N most recent messages), and Sliding Window by tokens (keeps messages up to a token limit). Memory requires a conversation ID to persist across runs." },
+  { question: "What is the difference between the tool execution modes (Auto, Required, None)?", answer: "In Auto mode, the model decides when to call a tool based on context. In Required mode, the model must call the tool on every request. In None mode, the tool is completely filtered out and never sent to the model — it effectively disables that tool without removing it from the configuration." },
+  { question: "How does the Response Format work?", answer: "Response Format enforces structured output by providing a JSON Schema. When set, the model's response is constrained to match the schema exactly. Fields from the structured response can be accessed directly by downstream blocks using <agent.fieldName> syntax. If no response format is set, the agent returns its standard outputs: content, model, tokens, and toolCalls." },
+  { question: "What does the Reasoning Effort / Thinking Level setting do?", answer: "These are advanced settings that appear only for models that support extended reasoning. Reasoning Effort (for OpenAI o-series and GPT-5 models) and Thinking Level (for Anthropic Claude and Gemini models with thinking) control how much compute the model spends reasoning before responding. Higher levels produce more thorough answers but cost more tokens and take longer." },
+  { question: "How does max output tokens work with Anthropic models specifically?", answer: "The Agent block uses each Anthropic model's full max output token limit by default (e.g., 64,000 for Claude Sonnet 4.5). You can override this with the Max Tokens setting. For non-streaming requests that exceed the SDK's internal threshold, the provider automatically uses internal streaming to avoid timeouts." },
+  { question: "Can I use the Agent block with a custom or self-hosted model?", answer: "Yes. You can use any Ollama or VLLM-compatible model by typing the model name directly into the model combobox. This lets you connect to locally hosted or custom-deployed models as long as they expose a compatible API endpoint." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/api.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: API
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The API block connects your workflow to external services through HTTP requests. Supports GET, POST, PUT, DELETE, and PATCH methods for interacting with REST APIs.
 
@@ -79,7 +80,6 @@ After an API request completes, you can access its outputs:
 - **`<api.data>`**: The response body data from the API
 - **`<api.status>`**: HTTP status code (200, 404, 500, etc.)
 - **`<api.headers>`**: Response headers from the server
-- **`<api.error>`**: Error details if the request failed
 
 ## Advanced Features
 
@@ -127,7 +127,6 @@ if (<api.status> === 200) {
 - **`<api.data>`**: Response body data from the API
 - **`<api.status>`**: HTTP status code
 - **`<api.headers>`**: Response headers
-- **`<api.error>`**: Error details if request failed
 
 ## Example Use Cases
 
@@ -147,3 +146,12 @@ Function (Validate) → API (Stripe) → Condition (Success) → Supabase (Updat
 - **Handle errors gracefully**: Connect error handling logic for failed requests
 - **Validate responses**: Check status codes and response formats before processing data
 - **Respect rate limits**: Be mindful of API rate limits and implement appropriate throttling
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What is the default request timeout?", answer: "The default timeout is 300,000 milliseconds (5 minutes). You can configure it up to a maximum of 600,000 milliseconds (10 minutes) in the block's Advanced settings." },
+  { question: "Which HTTP errors trigger automatic retries?", answer: "Retries are attempted for network/connection failures, timeouts, rate limit responses (HTTP 429), and server errors (5xx). Client errors like 400 or 404 are not retried." },
+  { question: "How does retry backoff work?", answer: "Retries use exponential backoff starting from the configured retry delay (default 500ms). Each subsequent retry doubles the delay, up to the maximum retry delay (default 30,000ms)." },
+  { question: "Are POST and PATCH requests retried by default?", answer: "No. POST and PATCH are non-idempotent methods, so retries are disabled for them by default to avoid creating duplicate resources. You can enable retries for these methods with the 'Retry non-idempotent methods' toggle in Advanced settings, but be aware this may cause duplicate requests." },
+  { question: "What headers are included automatically?", answer: "Standard headers such as User-Agent, Accept, and Cache-Control are added automatically. Any custom headers you configure will be merged with these defaults, and your custom values will override automatic headers with the same name." },
+  { question: "Can I send form data or file uploads?", answer: "The API block primarily sends JSON request bodies through the UI. The underlying HTTP tool also supports form data natively — if you pass form data parameters, it will construct a proper multipart/form-data request automatically. For most use cases, the JSON body field in the block UI is sufficient." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/condition.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Condition
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Condition block branches workflow execution based on boolean expressions. Evaluate conditions using previous block outputs and route to different paths without requiring an LLM.
 
@@ -60,10 +61,9 @@ Conditions use JavaScript syntax and can reference input values from previous bl
 
 After a condition evaluates, you can access its outputs:
 
-- **`<condition.result>`**: Boolean result of the condition evaluation
-- **`<condition.matched_condition>`**: ID of the condition that was matched
-- **`<condition.content>`**: Description of the evaluation result
-- **`<condition.path>`**: Details of the chosen routing destination
+- **`<condition.conditionResult>`**: Boolean result of the condition evaluation
+- **`<condition.selectedOption>`**: ID of the condition that was matched
+- **`<condition.selectedPath>`**: Details of the chosen routing destination
 
 ## Advanced Features
 
@@ -102,18 +102,13 @@ true
 
 ### Error Handling
 
-Conditions automatically handle:
-- Undefined or null values with safe evaluation
-- Type mismatches with appropriate fallbacks
-- Invalid expressions with error logging
-- Missing variables with default values
+If a condition expression references an undefined variable or throws a runtime error, the block will throw an error and the execution will fail (or follow the error path if one is connected). Use optional chaining (`?.`) or explicit null checks in your expressions to handle missing values safely.
 
 ## Outputs
 
-- **`<condition.result>`**: Boolean result of the evaluation
-- **`<condition.matched_condition>`**: ID of the matched condition
-- **`<condition.content>`**: Description of the evaluation result
-- **`<condition.path>`**: Details of the chosen routing destination
+- **`<condition.conditionResult>`**: Boolean result of the evaluation
+- **`<condition.selectedOption>`**: ID of the matched condition
+- **`<condition.selectedPath>`**: Details of the chosen routing destination
 
 ## Example Use Cases
 
@@ -139,3 +134,11 @@ Function (Process) → Condition (account_type === 'enterprise') → Advanced or
 - **Keep expressions simple**: Use clear, straightforward boolean expressions for better readability and easier debugging
 - **Document your conditions**: Add descriptions to explain the purpose of each condition for better team collaboration and maintenance
 - **Test edge cases**: Verify conditions handle boundary values correctly by testing with values at the edges of your condition ranges
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Does the Condition block use an LLM?", answer: "No. The Condition block evaluates boolean expressions using JavaScript syntax directly — it does not call any AI model. This makes it fast, deterministic, and free of API costs. If you need AI-powered routing decisions, use the Router block instead." },
+  { question: "What happens if no condition matches?", answer: "If none of your defined conditions evaluate to true, the workflow follows the else branch. If the else branch is not connected to any downstream block, that workflow path ends gracefully without an error. Add a fallback condition of simply true as the last condition to guarantee a match." },
+  { question: "In what order are conditions evaluated?", answer: "Conditions are evaluated from top to bottom in the order they are defined. The first condition that evaluates to true determines the execution path. Subsequent conditions are not evaluated after a match is found, so place more specific conditions before general ones." },
+  { question: "What JavaScript features can I use in condition expressions?", answer: "You can use standard JavaScript operators and methods including comparison operators (===, !==, >, <), logical operators (&&, ||, !), string methods (.includes(), .endsWith(), .toLowerCase()), array methods (.includes(), .length), mathematical operations, and Date comparisons. Reference block outputs using <blockName.output> syntax." },
+  { question: "How does the Condition block handle null or undefined values?", answer: "If a condition expression references an undefined variable or throws a runtime error, the Condition block will throw an error and the execution will fail (or follow the error path if one is connected). Use optional chaining (?.) or explicit null checks in your expressions to handle missing values safely." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/evaluator.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Evaluator
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Evaluator block uses AI to score and assess content quality against custom metrics. Perfect for quality control, A/B testing, and ensuring AI outputs meet specific standards.
 
@@ -49,12 +50,12 @@ The content to be evaluated. This can be:
 Choose an AI model to perform the evaluation:
 
 - **OpenAI**: GPT-4o, o1, o3, o4-mini, gpt-4.1
-- **Anthropic**: Claude 3.7 Sonnet
+- **Anthropic**: Claude Sonnet 4.5
 - **Google**: Gemini 2.5 Pro, Gemini 2.0 Flash
 - **Other Providers**: Groq, Cerebras, xAI, DeepSeek
 - **Local Models**: Ollama or VLLM compatible models
 
-Use models with strong reasoning capabilities like GPT-4o or Claude 3.7 Sonnet for best results.
+Use models with strong reasoning capabilities like GPT-4o or Claude Sonnet 4.5 for best results.
 
 ### API Key
 
@@ -91,3 +92,12 @@ Agent (Support Response) → Evaluator (Score) → Function (Log) → Condition
 - **Connect with Agent blocks**: Use Evaluator blocks to assess Agent block outputs and create feedback loops
 - **Use consistent metrics**: For comparative analysis, maintain consistent metrics across similar evaluations
 - **Combine multiple metrics**: Use several metrics to get a comprehensive evaluation
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What format does the Evaluator return scores in?", answer: "The Evaluator returns a JSON object where each key is the lowercase version of your metric name and the value is a numeric score within the range you defined. For example, a metric named 'Accuracy' with range 1-5 would appear as { \"accuracy\": 4 } in the output." },
+  { question: "Which models work best for evaluation?", answer: "Models with strong reasoning capabilities produce the most consistent evaluations. GPT-4o and Claude Sonnet are recommended. The default model is Claude Sonnet 4.5." },
+  { question: "Can I evaluate non-text content?", answer: "The content field accepts any string input. If you pass JSON or structured data, the Evaluator will automatically detect and format it before evaluation. However, the evaluation is text-based — it cannot directly evaluate images or audio." },
+  { question: "What happens if a metric name is invalid or incomplete?", answer: "Metrics missing a name or range are automatically filtered out. The Evaluator only scores metrics that have both a valid name and a defined min/max range." },
+  { question: "Does the Evaluator use structured output?", answer: "Yes. The Evaluator generates a JSON Schema response format based on your metrics and enforces strict mode, so the LLM is constrained to return only the expected metric scores as numbers — no extra text or explanations." },
+  { question: "How are evaluation costs calculated?", answer: "Costs are based on the token usage of the underlying LLM call. The Evaluator outputs include token counts (prompt, completion, total) and cost breakdown (input, output, total) so you can track spending per evaluation." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/function.mdx

@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ title: Function
 ---
 
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Function block executes custom JavaScript or TypeScript code in your workflows. Transform data, perform calculations, or implement custom logic.
 
@@ -71,3 +72,12 @@ return {
 - **Test edge cases**: Ensure your code handles unusual inputs, null values, and boundary conditions correctly
 - **Optimize for performance**: Be mindful of computational complexity and memory usage for large datasets
 - **Use console.log() for debugging**: Leverage stdout output to debug and monitor function execution
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What languages does the Function block support?", answer: "The Function block supports JavaScript and Python. JavaScript is the default. Python support requires the E2B feature to be enabled, as Python code always runs in a secure E2B sandbox environment." },
+  { question: "When does code run locally vs. in a sandbox?", answer: "JavaScript code without external imports runs in a local isolated VM for fast execution. JavaScript code that uses import or require statements requires E2B and runs in a secure sandbox. Python code always runs in the E2B sandbox regardless of whether it has imports." },
+  { question: "How do I reference outputs from other blocks inside my code?", answer: "Use the angle bracket syntax directly in your code, like <agent.content> or <api.data>. Do not wrap these references in quotes — the system replaces them with actual values before execution. For environment variables, use double curly braces: {{API_KEY}}." },
+  { question: "What does the Function block return?", answer: "The Function block has two outputs: result (the return value of your code, accessed via <function.result>) and stdout (anything logged with console.log(), accessed via <function.stdout>). Make sure your code includes a return statement if you need to pass data to downstream blocks." },
+  { question: "Can I make HTTP requests from a Function block?", answer: "Yes. The fetch() API is available in the JavaScript execution environment. You can use async/await with fetch to call external APIs. However, you cannot use libraries like axios or request — only the built-in fetch is supported. Your code runs inside an async context automatically, so you can use await directly." },
+  { question: "Is there a timeout for Function block execution?", answer: "Yes. Function blocks have a configurable execution timeout. If your code exceeds the timeout, the execution is terminated and the block reports an error. Keep this in mind when making external API calls or processing large datasets." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/guardrails.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Guardrails
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Guardrails block validates and protects your AI workflows by checking content against multiple validation types. Ensure data quality, prevent hallucinations, detect PII, and enforce format requirements before content moves through your workflow.
 
@@ -66,8 +67,8 @@ Uses Retrieval-Augmented Generation (RAG) with LLM scoring to detect when AI-gen
 - **Knowledge Base**: Select from your existing knowledge bases
 - **Model**: Choose LLM for scoring (requires strong reasoning - GPT-4o, Claude 3.7 Sonnet recommended)
 - **API Key**: Authentication for selected LLM provider (auto-hidden for hosted/Ollama or VLLM compatible models)
-- **Confidence Threshold**: Minimum score to pass (0-10, default: 3)
-- **Top K** (Advanced): Number of knowledge base chunks to retrieve (default: 10)
+- **Confidence**: Minimum score to pass (0-10, default: 3)
+- **Top K** (Advanced): Number of knowledge base chunks to retrieve (default: 5)
 
 **Output:**
 - `passed`: `true` if confidence score ≥ threshold
@@ -83,7 +84,7 @@ Uses Retrieval-Augmented Generation (RAG) with LLM scoring to detect when AI-gen
 
 ### PII Detection
 
-Detects personally identifiable information using Microsoft Presidio. Supports 40+ entity types across multiple countries and languages.
+Detects personally identifiable information using Microsoft Presidio. Supports over 30 entity types across multiple countries and languages.
 
 <div className="flex justify-center">
   <Image
@@ -98,7 +99,7 @@ Detects personally identifiable information using Microsoft Presidio. Supports 4
 **How It Works:**
 1. Pass content to validate (e.g., `<agent1.content>`)
 2. Select PII types to detect using the modal selector
-3. Choose detection mode (Detect or Mask)
+3. Choose the action (Block Request or Mask PII)
 4. Content is scanned for matching PII entities
 5. Returns detection results and optionally masked text
 
@@ -109,17 +110,17 @@ Detects personally identifiable information using Microsoft Presidio. Supports 4
 **Configuration:**
 - **PII Types to Detect**: Select from grouped categories via modal selector
   - **Common**: Person name, Email, Phone, Credit card, IP address, etc.
-  - **USA**: SSN, Driver's license, Passport, etc.
+  - **USA**: SSN, Driver's license, Passport, Bank account number, ITIN
   - **UK**: NHS number, National insurance number
-  - **Spain**: NIF, NIE, CIF
-  - **Italy**: Fiscal code, Driver's license, VAT code
-  - **Poland**: PESEL, NIP, REGON
-  - **Singapore**: NRIC/FIN, UEN
+  - **Spain**: NIF, NIE
+  - **Italy**: Fiscal code, Driver's license, Identity card, Passport
+  - **Poland**: PESEL
+  - **Singapore**: NRIC/FIN
   - **Australia**: ABN, ACN, TFN, Medicare
-  - **India**: Aadhaar, PAN, Passport, Voter number
-- **Mode**: 
-  - **Detect**: Only identify PII (default)
-  - **Mask**: Replace detected PII with masked values
+  - **India**: Aadhaar, PAN, Vehicle registration, Voter number, Passport
+- **Action**:
+  - **Block Request**: Only identify PII (default)
+  - **Mask PII**: Replace detected PII with masked values
 - **Language**: Detection language (default: English)
 
 **Output:**
@@ -140,7 +141,7 @@ Detects personally identifiable information using Microsoft Presidio. Supports 4
 
 The input content to validate. This typically comes from:
 - Agent block outputs: `<agent.content>`
-- Function block results: `<function.output>`
+- Function block results: `<function.result>`
 - API responses: `<api.output>`
 - Any other block output
 
@@ -203,3 +204,13 @@ Input → Guardrails (Detect PII) → Condition (No PII) → Process or Reject
   Guardrails validation happens synchronously in your workflow. For hallucination detection, choose faster models (like GPT-4o-mini) if latency is critical.
 </Callout>
 
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Can I run multiple validation types on the same content?", answer: "Each Guardrails block performs one validation type at a time. To apply multiple validations, chain several Guardrails blocks in sequence — for example, first validate JSON format, then check for PII." },
+  { question: "What does the hallucination confidence score mean?", answer: "The score ranges from 0 to 10. A score of 0 means the content is completely ungrounded (full hallucination), and 10 means it is fully supported by the knowledge base. Validation passes when the score meets or exceeds your configured threshold (default: 3)." },
+  { question: "How many knowledge base chunks are retrieved for hallucination detection?", answer: "By default, 5 chunks are retrieved. You can adjust this up to 20 in the Advanced settings using the 'Number of Chunks to Retrieve' slider. More chunks provide broader context but increase latency and token usage." },
+  { question: "What PII detection engine is used?", answer: "PII detection is powered by Microsoft Presidio. It supports over 30 entity types across multiple countries including the US, UK, Spain, Italy, Poland, Singapore, Australia, and India." },
+  { question: "What is the difference between Block and Mask modes for PII?", answer: "Block mode fails the validation (passed = false) if any selected PII types are detected. Mask mode also detects PII but replaces it with masked values in the output, making the content safe to use downstream. Both modes return the list of detected entities." },
+  { question: "Which languages does PII detection support?", answer: "PII detection supports English, Spanish, Italian, Polish, and Finnish. The language setting affects the NLP models used for entity recognition, so selecting the correct language improves detection accuracy." },
+  { question: "Does JSON validation check schema structure or just syntax?", answer: "JSON validation only checks that the content is syntactically valid JSON (i.e., it can be parsed without errors). It does not validate against a specific schema. For schema validation, use a Function block after the Guardrails check." },
+]} />
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/human-in-the-loop.mdx

@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Human in the Loop block pauses workflow execution and waits for human intervention before continuing. Use it to add approval gates, collect feedback, or gather additional input at critical decision points.
 
@@ -33,7 +34,7 @@ When execution reaches this block, the workflow pauses indefinitely until a huma
 
 ## Configuration Options
 
-### Paused Output
+### Display Data
 
 Defines what data is displayed to the approver. This is the context shown in the approval portal to help them make an informed decision.
 
@@ -60,7 +61,7 @@ Configures how approvers are alerted when approval is needed. Supported channels
 
 Include the approval URL (`<blockId.url>`) in your notification messages so approvers can access the portal.
 
-### Resume Input
+### Resume Form
 
 Defines the fields approvers fill in when responding. This data becomes available to downstream blocks after the workflow resumes.
 
@@ -136,8 +137,12 @@ Agent (Generate) → Human in the Loop (QA) → Gmail (Send)
 
 ## Block Outputs
 
-**`url`** - Unique URL for the approval portal  
-**`resumeInput.*`** - All fields defined in Resume Input become available after the workflow resumes
+**`url`** - Unique URL for the approval portal
+**`resumeEndpoint`** - Resume API endpoint URL
+**`response`** - Display data shown to the approver (json)
+**`submission`** - Form submission data from the approver (json)
+**`submittedAt`** - ISO timestamp when the workflow was resumed
+**`resumeInput.*`** - All fields defined in Resume Form become available after the workflow resumes
 
 Access using `<blockId.resumeInput.fieldName>`.
 
@@ -176,3 +181,12 @@ The example below shows an approval portal as seen by an approver after the work
 - **[Condition](/blocks/condition)** - Branch based on approval decisions
 - **[Variables](/blocks/variables)** - Store approval history and metadata
 - **[Response](/blocks/response)** - Return workflow results to API callers
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How long does the workflow stay paused?", answer: "The workflow pauses indefinitely until a human provides input through the approval portal, the REST API, or a webhook. There is no automatic timeout — it will wait until someone responds." },
+  { question: "What notification channels can I use to alert approvers?", answer: "You can configure notifications through Slack, Gmail, Microsoft Teams, SMS (via Twilio), or custom webhooks. Include the approval URL in your notification message so approvers can access the portal directly." },
+  { question: "How do I access the approver's input in downstream blocks?", answer: "Use the syntax <blockId.resumeInput.fieldName> to reference specific fields from the resume form. For example, if your block ID is 'approval1' and the form has an 'approved' field, use <approval1.resumeInput.approved>." },
+  { question: "Can I chain multiple Human in the Loop blocks for multi-stage approvals?", answer: "Yes. You can place multiple Human in the Loop blocks in sequence to create multi-stage approval workflows. Each block pauses independently and can have its own notification configuration and resume form fields." },
+  { question: "Can I resume the workflow programmatically without the portal?", answer: "Yes. Each block exposes a resume API endpoint that you can call with a POST request containing the form data as JSON. This lets you build custom approval UIs or integrate with existing systems like Jira or ServiceNow." },
+  { question: "What outputs are available after the workflow resumes?", answer: "The block outputs include the approval portal URL, the resume API endpoint URL, the display data shown to the approver, the form submission data, the raw resume input, and an ISO timestamp of when the workflow was resumed." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/index.mdx

@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ import { Card, Cards } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/card'
 import { Step, Steps } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/steps'
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Blocks are the building components you connect together to create AI workflows. Think of them as specialized modules that each handle a specific task—from chatting with AI models to making API calls or processing data.
 
@@ -138,3 +139,12 @@ Each block type has specific configuration options:
     Pause workflow execution for specified time delays
   </Card>
 </Cards>
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How many block types are available in Sim?", answer: "Sim has over 200 blocks in its registry, spanning core workflow blocks (Agent, Function, Condition, Router, etc.), integration blocks for third-party services (Gmail, Slack, GitHub, Notion, and many more), and trigger blocks that start workflows from external events like webhooks or schedules. Loop and parallel execution are built into the execution engine as container constructs on the canvas, rather than being standalone registry blocks." },
+  { question: "Can one block's output connect to multiple downstream blocks?", answer: "Yes. A single output port can connect to multiple input ports on different blocks. This lets you fan out data from one processing step to several parallel paths without needing to duplicate the block." },
+  { question: "What happens if a block in the middle of a workflow fails?", answer: "When a block encounters an error, the workflow stops executing along that path. Blocks that support error handling (like the Router) can route to an error path so you can handle failures gracefully instead of halting the entire workflow." },
+  { question: "What is the difference between Processing blocks and Logic blocks?", answer: "Processing blocks (Agent, Function, API) transform or generate data — they do the actual work. Logic blocks (Condition, Router, Evaluator) make decisions about which path the workflow should take based on the data, without modifying it themselves." },
+  { question: "Can I use blocks from different categories together in one workflow?", answer: "Absolutely. A typical workflow combines blocks from multiple categories. For example, you might use a trigger block to start the workflow, an Agent block to process input, a Condition block to branch logic, and an integration block like Gmail to send results." },
+  { question: "Are there container blocks that can hold other blocks inside them?", answer: "Yes. Loop and Parallel are execution engine constructs that appear as container regions on the canvas. You drag other blocks inside them. Loop containers execute their contained blocks repeatedly, while Parallel containers execute their contained blocks concurrently across multiple branches. Unlike registry blocks, these are handled directly by the execution engine." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/loop.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Loop
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Loop block is a container that executes blocks repeatedly. Iterate over collections, repeat operations a fixed number of times, or continue while a condition is met.
 
@@ -184,13 +185,8 @@ Variables (i=0) → Loop (While i<10) → Agent (Process) → Variables (i++)
 
 ### Limitations
 
-<Callout type="warning">
-  Container blocks (Loops and Parallels) cannot be nested inside each other. This means:
-  - You cannot place a Loop block inside another Loop block
-  - You cannot place a Parallel block inside a Loop block
-  - You cannot place any container block inside another container block
-  
-  If you need multi-dimensional iteration, consider restructuring your workflow to use sequential loops or process data in stages.
+<Callout type="info">
+  Container blocks (Loops and Parallels) support nesting. You can place loops inside loops, parallels inside loops, and any combination of container blocks to build complex multi-dimensional workflows.
 </Callout>
 
 <Callout type="info">
@@ -250,3 +246,13 @@ Variables (i=0) → Loop (While i<10) → Agent (Process) → Variables (i++)
 - **Set reasonable limits**: Keep iteration counts reasonable to avoid long execution times
 - **Use ForEach for collections**: When processing arrays or objects, use ForEach instead of For loops
 - **Handle errors gracefully**: Consider adding error handling inside loops for robust workflows
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What is the maximum number of iterations a loop can run?", answer: "For loops (fixed count) and ForEach loops are capped at 1,000 iterations/items (from executor constants). While loops and Do-While loops with a condition have no hard iteration cap — they run until the condition evaluates to false. Do-While loops without a condition fall back to a fixed iteration count, which is capped at 1,000. Always ensure your While/Do-While conditions will eventually become false to avoid infinite loops." },
+  { question: "Do loops execute iterations in parallel or sequentially?", answer: "Loops execute all iterations sequentially, one after another. If you need concurrent execution across items, use the Parallel block instead. You can also nest a Parallel block inside a Loop if you need both iteration patterns." },
+  { question: "How do I access the current item inside a ForEach loop?", answer: "Inside the loop, use <loop.currentItem> to get the current item being processed and <loop.index> for the zero-based iteration number. These references are only available to blocks placed inside the loop container — blocks outside the loop cannot access them." },
+  { question: "How do I access loop results after it finishes?", answer: "After the loop completes, reference the loop block by its normalized name (lowercase, no spaces) using <blockname.results>. This returns an array of all iteration results in order. For example, if your loop block is named 'Process Items', use <processitems.results>. Do not use <loop.> syntax outside the loop — that only works inside." },
+  { question: "Can I nest loops inside each other?", answer: "Yes. Container blocks (Loops and Parallels) fully support nesting. You can place loops inside loops, parallels inside loops, loops inside parallels, and any combination. Each nested container maintains its own scope and iteration context independently." },
+  { question: "What is the difference between a While loop and a Do-While loop?", answer: "A While loop checks its condition before each iteration, so it may execute zero times if the condition is false initially. A Do-While loop executes its body at least once, then checks the condition after each iteration to decide whether to continue. Use Do-While when you need guaranteed first execution." },
+  { question: "What happens if a ForEach loop receives an empty collection?", answer: "If the ForEach loop's collection is empty, the loop body is skipped entirely and the loop outputs an empty results array. The workflow continues normally to any blocks connected after the loop." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/parallel.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Parallel
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Parallel block is a container that executes multiple instances concurrently for faster workflow processing. Process items simultaneously instead of sequentially.
 
@@ -148,11 +149,8 @@ Each parallel instance runs independently:
 
 ### Limitations
 
-<Callout type="warning">
-  Container blocks (Loops and Parallels) cannot be nested inside each other. This means:
-  - You cannot place a Loop block inside a Parallel block
-  - You cannot place another Parallel block inside a Parallel block
-  - You cannot place any container block inside another container block
+<Callout type="info">
+  Container blocks (Loops and Parallels) support nesting. You can place parallels inside parallels, loops inside parallels, and any combination of container blocks to build complex multi-dimensional workflows.
 </Callout>
 
 <Callout type="info">
@@ -221,3 +219,13 @@ Understanding when to use each:
 - **Independent operations only**: Ensure operations don't depend on each other
 - **Handle rate limits**: Add delays or throttling for API-heavy workflows
 - **Error handling**: Each instance should handle its own errors gracefully
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What is the maximum number of concurrent instances?", answer: "The maximum is 20 concurrent instances. This limit exists to prevent resource exhaustion and ensure stable execution." },
+  { question: "Can parallel instances share state with each other?", answer: "No. Each parallel instance runs in complete isolation with its own variable scope. There is no shared state between instances, and one instance cannot read or write data from another during execution." },
+  { question: "What happens if one parallel instance fails?", answer: "Failures in one instance do not affect other instances. Each instance runs independently, so the remaining instances will continue to execute normally." },
+  { question: "Can I nest Parallel blocks inside other Parallel or Loop blocks?", answer: "Yes. Container blocks (Parallels and Loops) support nesting. You can place parallels inside parallels, loops inside parallels, and any combination to build multi-dimensional workflows." },
+  { question: "How do I access results after the Parallel block completes?", answer: "Use <blockname.results> where blockname is the normalized name of your Parallel block (lowercase, no spaces). This returns an array containing the results from all instances." },
+  { question: "Is the order of results guaranteed?", answer: "No. Because instances execute concurrently, the order of results in the output array is not guaranteed to match the input order. If ordering matters, include an index or identifier in each instance's output." },
+  { question: "What is the difference between count-based and collection-based parallel?", answer: "Count-based runs a fixed number of identical instances (e.g., run 5 times). Collection-based distributes items from an array or object across instances, with each instance processing one item. Use count-based for repeated operations and collection-based for batch processing." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/response.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Response
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Response block formats and sends structured HTTP responses back to API callers. Use it to return workflow results with proper status codes and headers.
 
@@ -35,23 +36,15 @@ The response data is the main content that will be sent back to the API caller.
 
 ### Status Code
 
-Set the HTTP status code for the response (defaults to 200):
+A free-text input field where you can enter any valid HTTP status code (the default placeholder is 200). Common examples include:
 
-**Success (2xx):**
 - **200**: OK - Standard success response
 - **201**: Created - Resource successfully created
-- **204**: No Content - Success with no response body
-
-**Client Error (4xx):**
 - **400**: Bad Request - Invalid request parameters
-- **401**: Unauthorized - Authentication required
 - **404**: Not Found - Resource doesn't exist
-- **422**: Unprocessable Entity - Validation errors
-
-**Server Error (5xx):**
 - **500**: Internal Server Error - Server-side error
-- **502**: Bad Gateway - External service error
-- **503**: Service Unavailable - Service temporarily down
+
+Any valid HTTP status code can be entered directly into the field.
 
 ### Response Headers
 
@@ -84,7 +77,7 @@ Condition (Error Detected) → Router → Response (400/500, Error Details)
 
 ## Outputs
 
-Response blocks are terminal - they end workflow execution and send the HTTP response to the API caller. No outputs are available to downstream blocks.
+Response blocks are terminal — no downstream blocks execute after them. However, the block does define outputs (`data`, `status`, `headers`) which are used to construct the HTTP response sent back to the API caller.
 
 ## Variable References
 
@@ -116,3 +109,11 @@ Use the `<variable.name>` syntax to dynamically insert workflow variables into y
 - **Handle errors gracefully**: Use conditional logic in your workflow to set appropriate error responses with descriptive messages
 - **Validate variable references**: Ensure all referenced variables exist and contain the expected data types before the Response block executes
 
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Can I have multiple Response blocks in a workflow?", answer: "No. The Response block is a single-instance block — only one is allowed per workflow. If you need different responses for different conditions, use a Condition or Router block upstream to determine what data reaches the single Response block." },
+  { question: "What triggers require a Response block?", answer: "The Response block is designed for use with the API Trigger. When your workflow is invoked via the API, the Response block sends the structured HTTP response back to the caller. Other trigger types (like webhooks or schedules) do not require a Response block." },
+  { question: "What is the difference between Builder and Editor mode?", answer: "Builder mode provides a visual interface for constructing your response structure with fields and types. Editor mode gives you a raw JSON code editor where you can write the response body directly. Builder mode is recommended for most use cases." },
+  { question: "What is the default status code?", answer: "If you do not specify a status code, the Response block defaults to 200 (OK). You can set any valid HTTP status code including error codes like 400, 404, or 500." },
+  { question: "Can the Response block connect to downstream blocks?", answer: "No. Response blocks are terminal — they end workflow execution and send the HTTP response. No further blocks can be connected after a Response block." },
+]} />
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/router.mdx

@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ title: Router
 
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Router block uses AI to intelligently route workflows based on content analysis. Unlike Condition blocks that use simple rules, Routers understand context and intent. Each route you define creates a separate output port, allowing you to connect different paths to different downstream blocks.
 
@@ -54,12 +55,12 @@ Each route you add creates a **separate output port** on the Router block. Conne
 Choose an AI model to power the routing decision:
 
 - **OpenAI**: GPT-4o, o1, o3, o4-mini, gpt-4.1
-- **Anthropic**: Claude 3.7 Sonnet
+- **Anthropic**: Claude Sonnet 4.5
 - **Google**: Gemini 2.5 Pro, Gemini 2.0 Flash
 - **Other Providers**: Groq, Cerebras, xAI, DeepSeek
 - **Local Models**: Ollama or VLLM compatible models
 
-Use models with strong reasoning capabilities like GPT-4o or Claude 3.7 Sonnet for best results.
+Use models with strong reasoning capabilities like GPT-4o or Claude Sonnet 4.5 for best results.
 
 ### API Key
 
@@ -68,11 +69,12 @@ Your API key for the selected LLM provider. This is securely stored and used for
 ## Outputs
 
 - **`<router.context>`**: The context that was analyzed
-- **`<router.selectedRoute>`**: The ID of the selected route
-- **`<router.selected_path>`**: Details of the chosen destination block
+- **`<router.model>`**: Model used for decision-making
 - **`<router.tokens>`**: Token usage statistics
 - **`<router.cost>`**: Estimated routing cost
-- **`<router.model>`**: Model used for decision-making
+- **`<router.selectedRoute>`**: The ID of the selected route
+- **`<router.reasoning>`**: Explanation of why this route was chosen
+- **`<router.selectedPath>`**: Details of the chosen destination block
 
 ## Example Use Cases
 
@@ -117,3 +119,12 @@ When the Router cannot determine an appropriate route for the given context, it
 - **Test with diverse inputs**: Ensure the Router handles various input types, edge cases, and unexpected content.
 - **Monitor routing performance**: Review routing decisions regularly and refine route descriptions based on actual usage patterns.
 - **Choose appropriate models**: Use models with strong reasoning capabilities for complex routing decisions.
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How does the Router decide which route to take?", answer: "The Router sends your context and all route descriptions to an LLM, which analyzes the input and selects the route whose description best matches. The LLM is prompted to be deterministic: it always prefers selecting a route over returning no match, and only reports NO_MATCH if the context is completely unrelated to every route description." },
+  { question: "What happens when the Router cannot match any route?", answer: "When the LLM determines that the context does not match any defined route, it returns NO_MATCH and the Router directs execution to the error path. Connect an error handler to this path for graceful fallback behavior rather than letting the workflow fail silently." },
+  { question: "Does the Router cost money to run?", answer: "Yes. The Router uses an LLM API call for every routing decision, which consumes tokens and incurs costs. You can monitor this via the <router.tokens> and <router.cost> outputs. If your routing logic can be expressed as simple boolean conditions, use the Condition block instead — it is free and faster." },
+  { question: "Can I see why the Router chose a particular route?", answer: "Yes. The Router V2 block outputs a reasoning field (<router.reasoning>) that contains a brief 1-2 sentence explanation of why the selected route was chosen. This is useful for debugging and understanding routing decisions." },
+  { question: "What models work best for routing?", answer: "Models with strong reasoning capabilities like GPT-4o or Claude Sonnet 4.5 tend to produce the most accurate routing decisions. For simpler routing scenarios with clearly distinct routes, a faster and cheaper model like GPT-4o-mini or Gemini Flash may be sufficient." },
+  { question: "How many routes can I define?", answer: "There is no hard limit on the number of routes. Each route you define creates a separate output port on the block. However, keep in mind that more routes with overlapping descriptions make it harder for the LLM to distinguish between them, so aim for clear, mutually exclusive route descriptions." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/variables.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Variables
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Step, Steps } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/steps'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Variables block updates workflow variables during execution. Variables must first be initialized in your workflow's Variables section, then you can use this block to update their values as your workflow runs.
 
@@ -73,7 +74,7 @@ API (Fetch Profile) → Variables (userId, userTier) → Agent (Personalize)
 
 ## Outputs
 
-- **`<variables.assignments>`**: JSON object with all variable assignments from this block
+The Variables block does not produce traditional block outputs. Variables are accessed globally via `<variable.variableName>` syntax from any block in the workflow, not through block output connections.
 
 ## Best Practices
 
@@ -81,3 +82,12 @@ API (Fetch Profile) → Variables (userId, userTier) → Agent (Personalize)
 - **Update dynamically**: Use Variables blocks to update values based on block outputs or calculations
 - **Use in loops**: Perfect for tracking state across iterations
 - **Name descriptively**: Use clear names like `currentIndex`, `totalProcessed`, or `lastError`
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Do variables persist between workflow executions?", answer: "No. Variables are workflow-scoped and only persist for the duration of a single execution. Each new execution starts with the initial values defined in your workflow's Variables section." },
+  { question: "Can multiple Variables blocks update the same variable?", answer: "Yes. All Variables blocks share the same namespace. A later Variables block can overwrite a value set by an earlier one by using the same variable name." },
+  { question: "How do I reference a variable in other blocks?", answer: "Use the <variable.variableName> syntax in any block's input field. For example, <variable.retryCount> or <variable.customerEmail>." },
+  { question: "Do Variables blocks produce outputs I can wire to other blocks?", answer: "Variables do not appear as traditional block outputs in the connection UI. Instead, they are accessed globally via the <variable.variableName> prefix from any block in the workflow." },
+  { question: "What naming convention should I use for variables?", answer: "Use descriptive names in camelCase or snake_case. Variable names are case-sensitive, so 'retryCount' and 'RetryCount' are treated as different variables." },
+  { question: "Can I use block outputs to set variable values?", answer: "Yes. You can reference any block output when setting a variable value, such as setting customerEmail to <api.email> or incrementing a counter based on previous values." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/wait.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Wait
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Step, Steps } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/steps'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Wait block pauses your workflow for a specified amount of time before continuing to the next block. Use it to add delays between actions, respect API rate limits, or space out operations.
 
@@ -62,3 +63,11 @@ API (Trigger Job) → Wait (30s) → API (Check Status)
 
 - **Keep waits reasonable**: Use Wait for delays up to 10 minutes. For longer delays, consider scheduled workflows
 - **Monitor execution time**: Remember that waits extend total workflow duration
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What is the maximum wait time?", answer: "The maximum wait time is 600 seconds (10 minutes). You can specify the duration in either seconds or minutes." },
+  { question: "Can a Wait block be cancelled?", answer: "Yes. Wait blocks are interruptible via workflow cancellation. If the workflow is stopped while a Wait block is active, the wait is cancelled and the status output will reflect 'cancelled'." },
+  { question: "What happens if I enter a value exceeding the maximum?", answer: "The wait is capped at 600 seconds. If you enter a value greater than 600 seconds (or greater than 10 minutes), it will be limited to the maximum allowed duration." },
+  { question: "Does the Wait block consume resources while paused?", answer: "The Wait block performs a simple sleep for the configured duration. It does not actively consume compute resources during the wait, but the workflow execution remains open until the wait completes." },
+  { question: "What outputs does the Wait block provide?", answer: "The Wait block outputs the wait duration in milliseconds (waitDuration) and a status string that indicates whether the wait is 'waiting', 'completed', or 'cancelled'." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/webhook.mdx

@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ title: Webhook
 
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The Webhook block sends HTTP POST requests to external webhook endpoints with automatic webhook headers and optional HMAC signing.
 
@@ -85,3 +86,11 @@ Condition (check) → Webhook (trigger) → Response
 <Callout>
 The Webhook block always uses POST. For other HTTP methods or more control, use the [API block](/blocks/api).
 </Callout>
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Can I use HTTP methods other than POST?", answer: "No. The Webhook block always sends POST requests. If you need GET, PUT, DELETE, or PATCH, use the API block instead, which supports all standard HTTP methods." },
+  { question: "How does HMAC payload signing work?", answer: "When you provide a signing secret, the block generates an HMAC-SHA256 signature of the payload and includes it in the X-Webhook-Signature header in the format t=timestamp,v1=signature. The receiver can verify by computing HMAC-SHA256(secret, \"timestamp.body\") and comparing with the v1 value." },
+  { question: "What headers are added automatically?", answer: "Every webhook request automatically includes Content-Type (application/json), X-Webhook-Timestamp (Unix timestamp in milliseconds), X-Delivery-ID (unique UUID), and Idempotency-Key (same as X-Delivery-ID for deduplication)." },
+  { question: "Can custom headers override the automatic ones?", answer: "Yes. Any custom headers you define in the Additional Headers section will override automatic headers that share the same name." },
+  { question: "How is the Webhook block different from the API block?", answer: "The Webhook block is purpose-built for webhook delivery: it is POST-only, automatically adds webhook-specific headers (timestamp, delivery ID, idempotency key), and supports optional HMAC signing. The API block is more general-purpose with support for all HTTP methods, query parameters, and configurable retries." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/blocks/workflow.mdx

@@ -39,6 +39,8 @@ Drop a Workflow block when you want to call a child workflow as part of a larger
    - `result` – the child workflow's final response
    - `success` – whether it ran without errors
    - `error` – message when the run fails
+   - `childWorkflowName` – the name of the child workflow (string)
+   - `childWorkflowId` – the ID of the child workflow (string)
 
 ## Deployment Status Badge
 
@@ -61,3 +63,14 @@ The Workflow block always executes the most recent deployed version of the child
 <Callout>
 Keep child workflows focused. Small, reusable flows make it easier to combine them without creating deep nesting.
 </Callout>
+
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Can a workflow call itself recursively?", answer: "No. The workflow selector blocks self-references to prevent infinite loops. Additionally, Sim tracks the call chain across nested executions using an internal header and enforces a maximum call chain depth of 25 hops. If the limit is exceeded, the execution is rejected with a 409 error." },
+  { question: "What is the maximum nesting depth for sub-workflows?", answer: "The maximum call chain depth is 25. This means workflow A can call B, which calls C, and so on up to 25 levels deep. This limit applies across all chained calls, not just direct parent-child relationships." },
+  { question: "Does the Workflow block use the deployed or draft version of the child workflow?", answer: "The child workflow inherits the execution context of the parent. If the parent is running in a deployed context (API, schedule, webhook), the child also uses its deployed version. If the parent is running in draft mode (manual run from the editor), the child also uses its draft state. This lets you test nested workflows end-to-end before deploying." },
+  { question: "How do I pass data to a child workflow?", answer: "Use the Inputs field on the Workflow block. If the child workflow has an Input Form trigger, each field appears in the block configuration and you can map parent variables to them. The mapped values are available as start.input in the child workflow." },
+  { question: "What outputs does the Workflow block return?", answer: "The block returns a success boolean, the child workflow's result (its final response output), the child workflow's name and ID, and an error message if the run failed. You can reference these outputs from downstream blocks using the tag syntax." },
+  { question: "What happens if the child workflow fails?", answer: "The Workflow block raises an error that propagates to the parent workflow. If you need to handle failures gracefully, connect an error path from the Workflow block to a downstream block that processes the error." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/connections/basics.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Basics
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Step, Steps } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/steps'
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 ## How Connections Work
 
@@ -47,3 +48,13 @@ The flow of data through connections follows these principles:
   Deleting a connection will immediately stop data flow between the blocks. Make sure this is
   intended before removing connections.
 </Callout>
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How does Sim determine the order blocks execute in?", answer: "Sim builds a directed acyclic graph (DAG) from your connections. Blocks with no unresolved incoming edges execute first. Once a block completes, the engine removes its edge from downstream blocks and queues any block whose incoming edges are all satisfied. This means execution order is entirely determined by how you wire your connections." },
+  { question: "Can a block have multiple incoming connections?", answer: "Yes. A block with multiple incoming connections will wait until all source blocks have completed before it executes. The engine tracks incoming edges and only marks a block as ready when every incoming edge has been resolved." },
+  { question: "Can a block send its output to multiple downstream blocks?", answer: "Yes. A single block can have outgoing connections to multiple destination blocks. When the source block completes, all connected downstream blocks that are ready (all their other incoming edges are satisfied) will be queued for execution." },
+  { question: "What happens to downstream blocks when a Condition or Router block picks a specific path?", answer: "The engine activates only the edge matching the selected condition or route. Edges on unselected paths are deactivated, and any blocks reachable only through those deactivated edges are cascadingly skipped for that execution." },
+  { question: "Are connections between blocks inside a Loop or Parallel block handled differently?", answer: "Yes. The engine inserts sentinel nodes (start and end) around Loop and Parallel subflows. Connections that cross a loop boundary are redirected through these sentinels, and Loop back-edges are wired automatically so blocks inside the loop re-execute on each iteration." },
+  { question: "Is there an error-handling path for connections?", answer: "Yes. Connections can use an error source handle. If a block produces an error, only edges marked with the error handle are activated, while the normal source edges are deactivated. This lets you route errors to a dedicated error-handling branch in your workflow." },
+]} />
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/connections/data-structure.mdx

@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ title: Data Structure
 
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 When you connect blocks, understanding the data structure of different block outputs is important because the output data structure from the source block determines what values are available in the destination block. Each block type produces a specific output structure that you can reference in downstream blocks.
 
@@ -185,3 +186,13 @@ For example:
 - `<agent1.tokens.total>` - Access the total tokens from an Agent block
 - `<api1.data.results[0].id>` - Access the ID of the first result from an API response
 - `<function1.result.calculations.total>` - Access a nested field in a Function block's result
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What output fields does an Agent block produce?", answer: "An Agent block outputs content (the text response), model (the model used, e.g. gpt-4o), tokens (an object with prompt, completion, and total counts), and optionally toolCalls, cost, and usage arrays when tools are invoked." },
+  { question: "What does the API block output look like?", answer: "The API block returns data (the response body, which can be any type), status (the HTTP status code as a number), and headers (an object containing the response HTTP headers)." },
+  { question: "What does a Function block return?", answer: "A Function block outputs result (the return value of your function, which can be any type) and stdout (any console output captured during execution)." },
+  { question: "How does the Condition block output differ from the Router block?", answer: "The Condition block outputs conditionResult (a boolean), selectedPath (with blockId, blockType, and blockTitle of the next block), and selectedOption (the ID of the matched condition). The Router block outputs content (the routing decision text), model, tokens, and selectedPath, but does not include conditionResult or selectedOption." },
+  { question: "What happens to the Agent block output when a response format schema is configured?", answer: "When you define a response format on an Agent block, the output structure matches your defined schema instead of the standard content/model/tokens structure. Always verify the actual output shape when using response formats." },
+  { question: "How do I access deeply nested data from an API response?", answer: "Use dot notation with bracket indices in your connection tags. For example, <api1.data.results[0].id> navigates into the data field, then into the results array at index 0, and retrieves the id property." },
+]} />
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/connections/index.mdx

@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Card, Cards } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/card'
 import { ConnectIcon } from '@/components/icons'
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Connections are the pathways that allow data to flow between blocks in your workflow. They define how information is passed from one block to another, enabling you to create sophisticated, multi-step processes.
 
@@ -40,3 +41,12 @@ Sim supports different types of connections that enable various workflow pattern
     Follow recommended patterns for effective connection management
   </Card>
 </Cards>
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How does data actually flow between connected blocks?", answer: "The execution engine builds a directed acyclic graph (DAG) from your connections and processes blocks in dependency order. When a block finishes, its output is stored in the execution context. Downstream blocks reference that output using connection tags like <BlockName.response>, which the variable resolver replaces with the actual data at execution time." },
+  { question: "Can a block receive input from multiple upstream blocks?", answer: "Yes. A block waits until all of its incoming connections have been fulfilled before it executes. The engine tracks incoming edges for each node and only marks a block as ready when every upstream dependency has completed. You can reference outputs from any connected block using their respective connection tags." },
+  { question: "What happens if an upstream block fails?", answer: "If a block errors, the engine activates the error edge (if one exists) and deactivates the normal output edge. Downstream blocks on the success path will not execute. You can connect an error handle to a separate block to build fallback or recovery logic." },
+  { question: "Do connections support conditional branching?", answer: "Yes. Router and Condition blocks produce a selected route or option that determines which outgoing edge is activated. Only the blocks on the chosen path will execute. Edges on unselected paths are deactivated and their entire downstream subgraph is skipped." },
+  { question: "Can blocks in parallel branches share data with each other?", answer: "Blocks within the same parallel branch cannot directly reference blocks in a sibling branch because branches execute independently. However, once all branches complete and the parallel block exits, downstream blocks can access the aggregated results from all branches." },
+  { question: "How are connection tags formatted?", answer: "Connection tags use angle-bracket syntax: <BlockName.property>. For nested data you can chain dot notation, such as <BlockName.response.items[0].name>. The resolver walks the object path at execution time and substitutes the resolved value into your input field." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/connections/tags.mdx

@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ title: Tags
 
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Connection tags are visual representations of the data available from connected blocks, providing an easy way to reference data between blocks and outputs from previous blocks in your workflow.
 
@@ -107,3 +108,14 @@ const total = <apiBlock.data.total> * 1.1; // Add 10% tax
   When using connection tags in numeric contexts, make sure the referenced data is actually a number
   to avoid type conversion issues.
 </Callout>
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How are tag references resolved at runtime?", answer: "The executor uses a chain of resolvers. Each reference like <blockName.path> is matched against resolvers in order: loop references, parallel references, workflow variables, environment variables, and finally block output references. The first resolver that recognizes the reference handles it." },
+  { question: "Does the block name in a tag reference need to match exactly?", answer: "Block names are normalized by converting to lowercase and removing spaces before matching. So <My Agent.content> and <myagent.content> resolve to the same block. However, the field path after the block name (e.g., content, data.users) is case-sensitive." },
+  { question: "Can I reference environment variables in tag syntax?", answer: "Yes, but environment variables use double-brace syntax instead of angle brackets: {{MY_VAR}}. These are resolved by a dedicated environment variable resolver during execution." },
+  { question: "What happens if I reference a block that did not execute on the current path?", answer: "If the referenced block exists in the workflow but did not produce output (for example, it was on an unselected condition branch), the reference resolves to an empty value. In most blocks this becomes an empty string; in Function blocks it becomes null." },
+  { question: "Can I access array elements inside a tag reference?", answer: "Yes. Use bracket notation for array indices within the dot path, for example <api1.data.users[0].name>. The resolver supports multiple levels of array indexing like items[0][1] as well." },
+  { question: "How are tag values formatted inside Function blocks versus other blocks?", answer: "In Function blocks, resolved values are formatted as code literals (strings are quoted, objects are JSON, null stays as null) so they can be used directly in JavaScript or Python code. In other block types, objects are JSON-stringified and primitives are converted to plain strings." },
+  { question: "Can I mix static text with tag references?", answer: "Yes. You can embed tag references anywhere in a text string, such as \"Hello, <agent1.content>! Your order total is <api1.data.total>.\" The resolver replaces each tag in place while leaving the surrounding text intact." },
+]} />
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/copilot/index.mdx

@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ title: Copilot
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Card, Cards } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/card'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
-import { MessageCircle, Hammer, Zap, Globe, Paperclip, History, RotateCcw, Brain } from 'lucide-react'
+import { MessageCircle, Hammer, ListChecks, Zap, Globe, Paperclip, History, RotateCcw, Brain } from 'lucide-react'
 
 Copilot is your in-editor assistant that helps you build and edit workflows. It can:
 
@@ -49,6 +49,18 @@ Switch between modes using the mode selector at the bottom of the input area.
       Workflow building mode. Copilot can add blocks, wire connections, edit configurations, and debug issues.
     </div>
   </Card>
+  <Card
+    title={
+      <span className="inline-flex items-center gap-2">
+        <ListChecks className="h-4 w-4 text-muted-foreground" />
+        Plan
+      </span>
+    }
+  >
+    <div className="m-0 text-sm">
+      Creates a step-by-step implementation plan for your workflow without making any changes. Helps you think through the approach before building.
+    </div>
+  </Card>
 </Cards>
 
 ## Models
@@ -185,10 +197,10 @@ Selected options are highlighted; unselected options appear struck through.
 
 ## Usage Limits
 
-Copilot usage is billed per token from the underlying LLM. If you reach your usage limit, Copilot will prompt you to increase your limit. You can add usage in increments ($50, $100) from your current base.
+Copilot usage is billed per token from the underlying LLM and counts toward your plan's credit usage. If you reach your usage limit, enable on-demand billing from Settings → Subscription to continue using Copilot beyond your plan's included credits.
 
 <Callout type="info">
-  See the [Cost Calculation page](/execution/costs) for billing details.
+  See the [Cost Calculation page](/execution/costs) for billing and plan details.
 </Callout>
 ## Copilot MCP
 
@@ -286,3 +298,15 @@ Replace `YOUR_COPILOT_API_KEY` with your key.
   For self-hosted deployments, replace `https://www.sim.ai` with your self-hosted Sim URL.
 </Callout>
 
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What is the difference between Ask, Build, and Plan mode?", answer: "Copilot has three modes. Ask mode is a read-only Q&A mode for explanations, guidance, and suggestions without making any changes to your workflow. Build mode allows Copilot to actively modify your workflow by adding blocks, wiring connections, editing configurations, and debugging issues. Plan mode creates a step-by-step implementation plan for your request without making any changes, so you can review the approach before committing. Use Ask when you want to learn or explore ideas, Plan when you want to see a proposed approach first, and Build when you want Copilot to make changes directly." },
+  { question: "Does Copilot have access to my full workflow when answering questions?", answer: "Copilot has access to the workflow you are currently editing as context. You can also use the @ context menu to reference other workflows, previous chats, execution logs, knowledge bases, documentation, and templates to give Copilot additional context for your request." },
+  { question: "How do I use Copilot from an external editor like Cursor or VS Code?", answer: "You can use Copilot as an MCP server from external editors. First, generate a Copilot API key from Settings > Copilot on sim.ai. Then add the MCP server configuration to your editor using the endpoint https://www.sim.ai/api/mcp/copilot with your API key in the X-API-Key header. Configuration examples are available for Cursor, Claude Code, Claude Desktop, and VS Code." },
+  { question: "Can I revert changes that Copilot made to my workflow?", answer: "Yes. When Copilot makes changes in Build mode, it saves checkpoints of your workflow state. You can hover over a Copilot message and click the checkpoints icon to see saved states, then click Revert on any checkpoint to restore your workflow. Note that reverting cannot be undone, so review the checkpoint before confirming." },
+  { question: "How does Copilot billing work?", answer: "Copilot usage is billed per token from the underlying LLM and counts toward your plan's credit usage. More capable models like Claude Opus cost more per token than lighter models like Haiku. If you reach your usage limit, you can enable on-demand billing from Settings > Subscription to continue using Copilot." },
+  { question: "What do the slash commands like /research and /search do?", answer: "Slash commands trigger specialized behaviors. /fast enables fast mode execution, /research activates a research and exploration mode, and /actions executes agent actions. Web commands like /search, /read, /scrape, and /crawl let Copilot interact with the web to search for information, read URLs, scrape page content, or crawl multiple pages to gather context for your request." },
+  { question: "How do I set up Copilot for a self-hosted deployment?", answer: "For self-hosted deployments, go to sim.ai > Settings > Copilot and generate a Copilot API key. Then set the COPILOT_API_KEY environment variable in your self-hosted environment. Copilot is a Sim-managed service, so the self-hosted instance communicates with Sim's servers to process requests." },
+]} />
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/credentials/index.mdx

@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ description: Manage secrets, API keys, and OAuth connections for your workflows
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
 import { Step, Steps } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/steps'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Credentials provide a secure way to manage API keys, tokens, and third-party service connections across your workflows. Instead of hardcoding sensitive values into your workflow, you store them as credentials and reference them at runtime.
 
@@ -190,3 +191,13 @@ To share a credential with specific team members:
 - **Name keys descriptively** — `STRIPE_SECRET_KEY` over `KEY1`
 - **Connect multiple OAuth accounts** when you need different permissions or identities per workflow
 - **Never hardcode secrets** in workflow input fields — always use `{{KEY}}` references
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Are my secrets encrypted at rest?", answer: "Yes. Secret values and OAuth tokens are encrypted before being stored in the database. The platform uses server-side encryption so that raw secret values are never persisted in plaintext. Secret values are also never exposed in the workflow editor, logs, or API responses." },
+  { question: "What happens if both a workspace secret and a personal secret have the same key name?", answer: "The workspace secret takes precedence. During execution, the resolver checks workspace secrets first and uses personal secrets only as a fallback. This ensures that production workflows use the shared, team-managed value." },
+  { question: "Who determines which personal secret is used for automated runs?", answer: "For manual runs, the personal secrets of the user who clicked Run are used as fallback. For automated runs triggered by API, webhook, or schedule, the personal secrets of the workflow owner are used instead." },
+  { question: "Does Sim handle OAuth token refresh automatically?", answer: "Yes. When an OAuth token is used during execution, the platform checks whether the access token has expired and automatically refreshes it using the stored refresh token before making the API call. You do not need to handle token refresh manually." },
+  { question: "Can I connect multiple OAuth accounts for the same provider?", answer: "Yes. You can connect multiple accounts per provider (for example, two separate Gmail accounts). Each block that requires OAuth lets you select which specific account to use from the credential dropdown. This is useful when different workflows or blocks need different permissions or identities." },
+  { question: "What happens if I delete a credential that is used in a workflow?", answer: "If a block references a deleted credential, the workflow will fail at that block during execution because the credential cannot be resolved. Make sure to update any blocks that reference a credential before deleting it." },
+  { question: "Can I import secrets from a .env file?", answer: "Yes. The bulk import feature lets you paste .env-style content in KEY=VALUE format. The parser supports quoted values, comments (lines starting with #), and blank lines. All imported secrets are created with the scope you choose (workspace or personal)." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/enterprise/index.mdx

@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ description: Enterprise features for business organizations
 ---
 
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Sim Enterprise provides advanced features for organizations with enhanced security, compliance, and management requirements.
 
@@ -108,3 +109,14 @@ curl -X DELETE "https://your-instance/api/v1/admin/workspaces/{workspaceId}/memb
 
 - Enabling `ACCESS_CONTROL_ENABLED` automatically enables organizations, as access control requires organization membership.
 - When `DISABLE_INVITATIONS` is set, users cannot send invitations. Use the Admin API to manage workspace and organization memberships instead.
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What are the minimum requirements to self-host Sim?", answer: "The Docker Compose production setup includes the Sim application (8 GB memory limit), a realtime collaboration server (1 GB memory limit), and a PostgreSQL database with pgvector. A machine with at least 16 GB of RAM and 4 CPU cores is recommended. You will also need Docker and Docker Compose installed." },
+  { question: "Can I run Sim completely offline with local AI models?", answer: "Yes. Sim supports Ollama and VLLM for running local AI models. A separate Docker Compose configuration (docker-compose.ollama.yml) is available for deploying with Ollama. This lets you run workflows without any external API calls, keeping all data on your infrastructure." },
+  { question: "How does data privacy work with self-hosted deployments?", answer: "When self-hosted, all data stays on your infrastructure. Workflow definitions, execution logs, credentials, and user data are stored in your PostgreSQL database. If you use local AI models through Ollama or VLLM, no data leaves your network. When using external AI providers, only the data sent in prompts goes to those providers." },
+  { question: "Do I need a paid license to self-host Sim?", answer: "The core Sim platform is open source under Apache 2.0 and can be self-hosted for free. Enterprise features like SSO (SAML/OIDC), access control with permission groups, and organization management require an Enterprise subscription for production use. These features can be enabled via environment variables for development and evaluation without a license." },
+  { question: "Which SSO providers are supported?", answer: "Sim supports SAML 2.0 and OIDC protocols, which means it works with virtually any enterprise identity provider including Okta, Azure AD (Entra ID), Google Workspace, and OneLogin. Configuration is done through Settings in the workspace UI." },
+  { question: "How do I manage users when invitations are disabled?", answer: "Use the Admin API with your admin API key. You can create organizations, add members to organizations with specific roles, add users to workspaces with defined permissions, and remove users. All management is done through REST API calls authenticated with the x-admin-key header." },
+  { question: "Can I scale Sim horizontally for high availability?", answer: "The Docker Compose setup is designed for single-node deployments. For production scaling, you can deploy on Kubernetes with multiple application replicas behind a load balancer. The database can be scaled independently using managed PostgreSQL services. Redis can be configured for session and cache management across multiple instances." },
+  { question: "How do access control permission groups work?", answer: "Permission groups let you restrict which AI providers, workflow blocks, and platform features are available to specific team members. Users not assigned to any group have full access. Restrictions are enforced at both the UI level (hiding restricted options) and at execution time (blocking unauthorized operations). Enabling access control automatically enables organization management." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/execution/api.mdx

@@ -592,3 +592,15 @@ app.listen(3000, () => {
   console.log('Webhook server listening on port 3000');
 });
 ```
+
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How do I trigger async execution via the API?", answer: "Set the X-Execution-Mode header to 'async' on your POST request to /api/workflows/{id}/execute. The API returns a 202 response with a jobId, executionId, and a statusUrl you can poll to check when the job completes. Async mode does not support draft state, workflow overrides, or selective output options." },
+  { question: "What authentication methods does the API support?", answer: "The API supports two authentication methods: API keys passed in the x-api-key header, and session-based authentication for logged-in users. API keys can be generated from Settings > Sim Keys in the platform. Workflows with public API access enabled can also be called without authentication." },
+  { question: "How does the webhook retry policy work?", answer: "Failed webhook deliveries are retried up to 5 times with exponential backoff: 5 seconds, 15 seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, and 10 minutes, plus up to 10% jitter. Only HTTP 5xx and 429 responses trigger retries. Each delivery times out after 30 seconds." },
+  { question: "What rate limits apply to the Logs API?", answer: "Rate limits use a token bucket algorithm. Free plans get 30 requests/minute with 60 burst capacity, Pro gets 100/200, Team gets 200/400, and Enterprise gets 500/1000. These are separate from workflow execution rate limits, which are shown in the response body." },
+  { question: "How do I verify that a webhook is from Sim?", answer: "Configure a webhook secret when setting up notifications. Sim signs each delivery with HMAC-SHA256 using the format 't={timestamp},v1={signature}' in the sim-signature header. Compute the HMAC of '{timestamp}.{body}' with your secret and compare it to the signature value." },
+  { question: "What alert rules are available for notifications?", answer: "You can configure alerts for consecutive failures, failure rate thresholds, latency thresholds, latency spikes (percentage above average), cost thresholds, no-activity periods, and error counts within a time window. All alert types include a 1-hour cooldown to prevent notification spam." },
+  { question: "Can I filter which executions trigger notifications?", answer: "Yes. You can filter notifications by specific workflows (or select all), log level (info or error), and trigger type (api, webhook, schedule, manual, chat). You can also choose whether to include final output, trace spans, rate limits, and usage data in the notification payload." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/execution/costs.mdx

@@ -8,16 +8,22 @@ import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
 
 Sim automatically calculates costs for all workflow executions, providing transparent pricing based on AI model usage and execution charges. Understanding these costs helps you optimize workflows and manage your budget effectively.
 
+## Credits
+
+Sim uses **credits** as the unit of measurement for all usage. **1 credit = $0.005**.
+
+All plan limits, usage meters, and billing thresholds are displayed in credits throughout the Sim UI. Dollar amounts in this documentation are provided for reference.
+
 ## How Costs Are Calculated
 
 Every workflow execution includes two cost components:
 
-**Base Execution Charge**: $0.005 per execution
+**Base Execution Charge**: 1 credit ($0.005) per execution
 
 **AI Model Usage**: Variable cost based on token consumption
 ```javascript
 modelCost = (inputTokens × inputPrice + outputTokens × outputPrice) / 1,000,000
-totalCost = baseExecutionCharge + modelCost
+totalCredits = baseExecutionCharge + modelCost × 200
 ```
 
 <Callout type="info">
@@ -129,22 +135,131 @@ Use your own API keys for AI model providers instead of Sim's hosted keys to pay
 
 When configured, workflows use your key instead of Sim's hosted keys. If removed, workflows automatically fall back to hosted keys with the multiplier.
 
-## Cost Optimization Strategies
+## Plans
 
-- **Model Selection**: Choose models based on task complexity. Simple tasks can use GPT-4.1-nano while complex reasoning might need o1 or Claude Opus.
-- **Prompt Engineering**: Well-structured, concise prompts reduce token usage without sacrificing quality.
-- **Local Models**: Use Ollama or VLLM for non-critical tasks to eliminate API costs entirely.
-- **Caching and Reuse**: Store frequently used results in variables or files to avoid repeated AI model calls.
-- **Batch Processing**: Process multiple items in a single AI request rather than making individual calls.
+Sim has two paid plan tiers — **Pro** and **Max**. Either can be used individually or with a team. Team plans pool credits across all seats in the organization.
+
+| Plan | Price | Credits Included | Daily Refresh |
+|------|-------|------------------|---------------|
+| **Community** | $0 | 1,000 (one-time) | — |
+| **Pro** | $25/mo | 6,000/mo | +50/day |
+| **Max** | $100/mo | 25,000/mo | +200/day |
+| **Enterprise** | Custom | Custom | — |
+
+To use Pro or Max with a team, select **Get For Team** in subscription settings and choose the tier and number of seats. Credits are pooled across the organization at the per-seat rate (e.g. Max for Teams with 3 seats = 75,000 credits/mo pooled).
+
+### Daily Refresh Credits
+
+Paid plans include a small daily credit allowance that does not count toward your plan limit. Each day, usage up to the daily refresh amount is excluded from billable usage. This allowance resets every 24 hours and does not carry over — use it or lose it.
+
+| Plan | Daily Refresh |
+|------|---------------|
+| **Pro** | 50 credits/day ($0.25) |
+| **Max** | 200 credits/day ($1.00) |
+
+For team plans, the daily refresh scales with seats (e.g. Max for Teams with 3 seats = 600 credits/day).
+
+### Annual Billing
+
+All paid plans are available with annual billing at a **15% discount**. Switch between monthly and annual billing in Settings → Subscription.
+
+| Plan | Monthly | Annual (per month) | Annual Total |
+|------|---------|-------------------|--------------|
+| **Pro** | $25/mo | $21.25/mo | $255/yr |
+| **Max** | $100/mo | $85/mo | $1,020/yr |
+
+Team plans follow the same pricing per seat.
+
+### On-Demand Billing
+
+By default, your usage is capped at the credits included in your plan. To allow usage beyond your plan's included amount, you can either enable **on-demand billing** or manually edit your usage limit to any value above your plan's minimum.
+
+- **Enable On-Demand**: Removes the usage cap entirely. You pay for any overage at the end of the billing period.
+- **Edit Usage Limit**: Set a specific cap above your plan's included amount to control how much overage you're willing to allow.
+- **Disable On-Demand**: Resets your usage limit back to the plan's included amount (only available if your current usage hasn't already exceeded it).
+
+<Callout type="info">
+  On-demand billing is managed by workspace admins for team plans. Non-admin team members cannot toggle on-demand billing.
+</Callout>
+
+## Plan Limits
+
+### Rate Limits
+
+| Plan | Sync (req/min) | Async (req/min) |
+|------|----------------|-----------------|
+| **Free** | 50 | 200 |
+| **Pro** | 150 | 1,000 |
+| **Max** | 300 | 2,500 |
+| **Enterprise** | 600 | 5,000 |
+
+Max (individual) shares the same rate limits as team plans. Team plans (Pro or Max for Teams) use the Max-tier rate limits.
+
+### File Storage
+
+| Plan | Storage |
+|------|---------|
+| **Free** | 5 GB |
+| **Pro** | 50 GB |
+| **Max** | 500 GB |
+| **Enterprise** | 500 GB (customizable) |
+
+Team plans (Pro or Max for Teams) use 500 GB.
+
+### Execution Time Limits
+
+| Plan | Sync | Async |
+|------|------|-------|
+| **Free** | 5 minutes | 90 minutes |
+| **Pro / Max / Team / Enterprise** | 50 minutes | 90 minutes |
+
+**Sync executions** run immediately and return results directly. These are triggered via the API with `async: false` (default) or through the UI.
+**Async executions** (triggered via API with `async: true`, webhooks, or schedules) run in the background.
+
+<Callout type="info">
+  If a workflow exceeds its time limit, it will be terminated and marked as failed with a timeout error. Design long-running workflows to use async execution or break them into smaller workflows.
+</Callout>
+
+## Billing Model
+
+Sim uses a **base subscription + overage** billing model:
+
+### How It Works
+
+**Pro Plan ($25/month — 6,000 credits):**
+- Monthly subscription includes 6,000 credits of usage
+- Usage under 6,000 credits → No additional charges
+- Usage over 6,000 credits (with on-demand enabled) → Pay the overage at month end
+- Example: 7,000 credits used = $25 (subscription) + $5 (overage for 1,000 extra credits at $0.005/credit)
+
+**Team Plans:**
+- Usage is pooled across all team members in the organization
+- Overage is calculated from total team usage against the pooled limit
+- Organization owner receives one bill
+
+**Enterprise Plans:**
+- Fixed monthly price, no overages
+- Custom usage limits per agreement
+
+### Threshold Billing
+
+When on-demand is enabled and unbilled overage reaches $50, Sim automatically bills the full unbilled amount.
+
+**Example:**
+- Day 10: $70 overage → Bill $70 immediately
+- Day 15: Additional $35 usage ($105 total) → Already billed, no action
+- Day 20: Another $50 usage ($155 total, $85 unbilled) → Bill $85 immediately
+
+This spreads large overage charges throughout the month instead of one large bill at period end.
 
 ## Usage Monitoring
 
 Monitor your usage and billing in Settings → Subscription:
 
-- **Current Usage**: Real-time usage and costs for the current period
-- **Usage Limits**: Plan limits with visual progress indicators
-- **Billing Details**: Projected charges and minimum commitments
-- **Plan Management**: Upgrade options and billing history
+- **Current Usage**: Real-time credit usage for the current billing period
+- **Usage Limits**: Plan limits with a visual progress bar
+- **On-Demand Billing**: Toggle on-demand billing to allow usage beyond your plan's included credits
+- **Plan Management**: Upgrade, downgrade, or switch between monthly and annual billing
 
 ### Programmatic Usage Tracking
 
@@ -187,7 +302,7 @@ curl -X GET -H "X-API-Key: YOUR_API_KEY" -H "Content-Type: application/json" htt
   "usage": {
     "currentPeriodCost": 12.34,
     "limit": 100,
-    "plan": "pro"
+    "plan": "pro_6000"
   }
 }
 ```
@@ -198,83 +313,33 @@ curl -X GET -H "X-API-Key: YOUR_API_KEY" -H "Content-Type: application/json" htt
 - `remaining`: Current tokens available (can be up to `maxBurst`)
 
 **Response Fields:**
-- `currentPeriodCost` reflects usage in the current billing period
-- `limit` is derived from individual limits (Free/Pro) or pooled organization limits (Team/Enterprise)
+- `currentPeriodCost` reflects usage in the current billing period (in dollars)
+- `limit` is derived from individual limits (Free/Pro/Max) or pooled organization limits (Team/Enterprise)
 - `plan` is the highest-priority active plan associated with your user
 
-## Plan Limits
+## Cost Optimization Strategies
 
-Different subscription plans have different usage limits:
-
-| Plan | Monthly Usage Included | Rate Limits (per minute) |
-|------|------------------------|-------------------------|
-| **Free** | $20 | 50 sync, 200 async |
-| **Pro** | $20 (adjustable) | 150 sync, 1,000 async |
-| **Team** | $40/seat (pooled, adjustable) | 300 sync, 2,500 async |
-| **Enterprise** | Custom | Custom |
-
-## Execution Time Limits
-
-Workflows have maximum execution time limits based on your subscription plan:
-
-| Plan | Sync Execution | Async Execution |
-|------|----------------|-----------------|
-| **Free** | 5 minutes | 10 minutes |
-| **Pro** | 50 minutes | 90 minutes |
-| **Team** | 50 minutes | 90 minutes |
-| **Enterprise** | 50 minutes | 90 minutes |
-
-**Sync executions** run immediately and return results directly. These are triggered via the API with `async: false` (default) or through the UI.
-**Async executions** (triggered via API with `async: true`, webhooks, or schedules) run in the background. Async time limits are up to 2x the sync limit, capped at 90 minutes.
-
-
-<Callout type="info">
-  If a workflow exceeds its time limit, it will be terminated and marked as failed with a timeout error. Design long-running workflows to use async execution or break them into smaller workflows.
-</Callout>
-
-## Billing Model
-
-Sim uses a **base subscription + overage** billing model:
-
-### How It Works
-
-**Pro Plan ($20/month):**
-- Monthly subscription includes $20 of usage
-- Usage under $20 → No additional charges
-- Usage over $20 → Pay the overage at month end
-- Example: $35 usage = $20 (subscription) + $15 (overage)
-
-**Team Plan ($40/seat/month):**
-- Pooled usage across all team members
-- Overage calculated from total team usage
-- Organization owner receives one bill
-
-**Enterprise Plans:**
-- Fixed monthly price, no overages
-- Custom usage limits per agreement
-
-### Threshold Billing
-
-When unbilled overage reaches $50, Sim automatically bills the full unbilled amount.
-
-**Example:**
-- Day 10: $70 overage → Bill $70 immediately
-- Day 15: Additional $35 usage ($105 total) → Already billed, no action
-- Day 20: Another $50 usage ($155 total, $85 unbilled) → Bill $85 immediately
-
-This spreads large overage charges throughout the month instead of one large bill at period end.
-
-## Cost Management Best Practices
-
-1. **Monitor Regularly**: Check your usage dashboard frequently to avoid surprises
-2. **Set Budgets**: Use plan limits as guardrails for your spending
-3. **Optimize Workflows**: Review high-cost executions and optimize prompts or model selection
-4. **Use Appropriate Models**: Match model complexity to task requirements
-5. **Batch Similar Tasks**: Combine multiple requests when possible to reduce overhead
+- **Model Selection**: Choose models based on task complexity. Simple tasks can use GPT-4.1-nano while complex reasoning might need o1 or Claude Opus.
+- **Prompt Engineering**: Well-structured, concise prompts reduce token usage without sacrificing quality.
+- **Local Models**: Use Ollama or VLLM for non-critical tasks to eliminate API costs entirely.
+- **Caching and Reuse**: Store frequently used results in variables or files to avoid repeated AI model calls.
+- **Batch Processing**: Process multiple items in a single AI request rather than making individual calls.
 
 ## Next Steps
 
 - Review your current usage in [Settings → Subscription](https://sim.ai/settings/subscription)
 - Learn about [Logging](/execution/logging) to track execution details
 - Explore the [External API](/execution/api) for programmatic cost monitoring
-- Check out [workflow optimization techniques](/blocks) to reduce costs
+- Check out [workflow optimization techniques](/blocks) to reduce costs
+
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How much does a single workflow execution cost?", answer: "Every execution incurs a base charge of 1 credit ($0.005). On top of that, any AI model usage is billed based on token consumption. Workflows that do not use AI blocks only pay the base execution charge." },
+  { question: "What is the credit-to-dollar conversion rate?", answer: "1 credit equals $0.005. All plan limits, usage meters, and billing thresholds in the Sim UI are displayed in credits." },
+  { question: "Do unused daily refresh credits carry over?", answer: "No. Daily refresh credits reset every 24 hours and do not accumulate. If you do not use them within the day, they are lost." },
+  { question: "What happens when I exceed my plan's credit limit?", answer: "By default, your usage is capped at your plan's included credits and executions will stop. If you enable on-demand billing or manually raise your usage limit in Settings, you can continue running workflows and pay for the overage at the end of the billing period." },
+  { question: "How does the 1.1x hosted model multiplier work?", answer: "When you use Sim's hosted API keys (instead of bringing your own), a 1.1x multiplier is applied to the base model pricing for Agent blocks. This covers infrastructure and API management costs. You can avoid this multiplier by using your own API keys via the BYOK feature." },
+  { question: "Are there any free options for AI models?", answer: "Yes. If you run local models through Ollama or VLLM, there are no API costs for those model calls. You still pay the base execution charge of 1 credit per execution." },
+  { question: "When does threshold billing trigger?", answer: "When on-demand billing is enabled and your unbilled overage reaches $50, Sim automatically bills the full unbilled amount. This spreads large charges throughout the month instead of accumulating one large bill at period end." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/execution/files.mdx

@@ -166,3 +166,14 @@ Use `url` for direct downloads or `base64` for inline processing.
 2. **Check file types** - Ensure the file type matches what the receiving block expects. The Vision block needs images, the File block handles documents.
 
 3. **Consider file size** - Large files increase execution time. For very large files, consider using storage blocks (S3, Supabase) for intermediate storage.
+
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What is the maximum file size for uploads?", answer: "The maximum file size for files processed during workflow execution is 20 MB. Files exceeding this limit will be rejected with an error indicating the actual file size. For larger files, use storage blocks like S3 or Supabase for intermediate storage." },
+  { question: "What file input formats are supported via the API?", answer: "When triggering a workflow via API, you can send files as base64-encoded data (using a data URI with the format 'data:{mime};base64,{data}') or as a URL pointing to a publicly accessible file. In both cases, include the file name and MIME type in the request." },
+  { question: "How are files passed between blocks internally?", answer: "Files are represented as standardized UserFile objects with name, url, base64, type, and size properties. Most blocks accept the full file object and extract what they need automatically, so you typically pass the entire object rather than individual properties." },
+  { question: "Which blocks can output files?", answer: "Gmail outputs email attachments, Slack outputs downloaded files, TTS generates audio files, Video Generator and Image Generator produce media files. Storage blocks like S3, Supabase, Google Drive, and Dropbox can also retrieve files for use in downstream blocks." },
+  { question: "Do I need to extract base64 or URL from file objects manually?", answer: "No. Most blocks accept the full file object and handle the format conversion automatically. Simply pass the entire file reference (e.g., <gmail.attachments[0]>) and the receiving block will extract the data it needs." },
+  { question: "How do file fields work in the Start block's input format?", answer: "When you define a field with type 'file[]' in the Start block's input format, the execution engine automatically processes incoming file data (base64 or URL) and uploads it to storage, converting it into UserFile objects before the workflow runs." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/execution/index.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ title: Overview
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Card, Cards } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/card'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Sim's execution engine brings your workflows to life by processing blocks in the correct order, managing data flow, and handling errors gracefully, so you can understand exactly how workflows are executed in Sim.
 
@@ -55,7 +56,7 @@ Each workflow maintains a rich context during execution containing:
 
 ## Deployment Snapshots
 
-All public entry points—API, Chat, Schedule, Webhook, and Manual runs—execute the workflow’s active deployment snapshot. Publish a new deployment whenever you change the canvas so every trigger uses the updated version.
+API, Chat, Schedule, and Webhook executions run against the workflow’s active deployment snapshot. Manual runs from the editor execute the current draft canvas state, letting you test changes before deploying. Publish a new deployment whenever you change the canvas so every trigger uses the updated version.
 
 <div className='flex justify-center my-6'>
   <Image
@@ -114,3 +115,13 @@ const result = await client.executeWorkflow('workflow-id', {
 ## What's Next?
 
 Start with [Execution Basics](/execution/basics) to understand how workflows run, then explore [Logging](/execution/logging) to monitor your executions and [Cost Calculation](/execution/costs) to optimize your spending.
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What are the execution timeout limits?", answer: "Synchronous executions (API, chat) have a default timeout of 5 minutes on the Free plan and 50 minutes on Pro, Team, and Enterprise plans. Asynchronous executions (schedules, webhooks) allow up to 90 minutes across all plans. These limits are configurable by the platform administrator." },
+  { question: "How does parallel execution work?", answer: "The engine identifies layers of blocks with no dependencies on each other and runs them concurrently. Within loops and parallel blocks, the engine supports up to 20 parallel branches by default and up to 1,000 loop iterations. Nested subflows (loops inside parallels, or vice versa) are supported up to 10 levels deep." },
+  { question: "Can I cancel a running execution?", answer: "Yes. The engine supports cancellation through an abort signal mechanism. When you cancel an execution, the engine checks for cancellation between block executions (at roughly 500ms intervals when using Redis-backed cancellation). Any in-progress blocks complete, and the execution returns with a cancelled status." },
+  { question: "What is a deployment snapshot?", answer: "A deployment snapshot is a frozen copy of your workflow at the time you click Deploy. Trigger-based executions (API, chat, schedule, webhook) run against the active snapshot, not your draft canvas. Manual runs from the editor execute the current draft canvas state, so you can test changes before deploying. You can view, compare, and roll back snapshots from the Deploy modal." },
+  { question: "How are execution costs calculated?", answer: "Costs are tracked per block based on the AI model used. Each block log records input tokens, output tokens, and the computed cost using the model's pricing. The total workflow cost is the sum of all block-level costs for that execution. You can review costs in the execution logs." },
+  { question: "What happens when a block fails during execution?", answer: "When a block throws an error, the engine captures the error message in the block log, finalizes any incomplete logs with timing data, and halts the execution with a failure status. If the failing block has an error output handle connected to another block, that error path is followed instead of halting entirely." },
+  { question: "Can I re-run part of a workflow without starting from scratch?", answer: "Yes. The run-from-block feature lets you select a specific block and re-execute from that point. The engine computes which upstream blocks need to be re-run (the dirty set) and preserves cached outputs from blocks that have not changed, so only the affected portion of the workflow re-executes." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/execution/logging.mdx

@@ -121,10 +121,8 @@ The snapshot provides:
 
 ## Log Retention
 
-- **Free Plan**: 7 days of log retention
-- **Pro Plan**: 30 days of log retention
-- **Team Plan**: 90 days of log retention
-- **Enterprise Plan**: Custom retention periods available
+- **Free Plan**: 7 days of log retention (logs are archived to cloud storage and then deleted)
+- **Pro / Team / Enterprise Plans**: Logs are retained indefinitely (no automatic cleanup)
 
 ## Best Practices
 
@@ -147,4 +145,15 @@ The snapshot provides:
 
 - Learn about [Cost Calculation](/execution/costs) to understand workflow pricing
 - Explore the [External API](/execution/api) for programmatic log access
-- Set up [Notifications](/execution/api#notifications) for real-time alerts via webhook, email, or Slack
+- Set up [Notifications](/execution/api#notifications) for real-time alerts via webhook, email, or Slack
+
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How long are execution logs retained?", answer: "Free plans retain logs for 7 days — after that, logs are archived to cloud storage and deleted from the database. Pro, Team, and Enterprise plans retain logs indefinitely with no automatic cleanup." },
+  { question: "What data is captured in each execution log?", answer: "Each log entry includes the execution ID, workflow ID, trigger type, start and end timestamps, total duration in milliseconds, cost breakdown (total cost, token counts, and per-model breakdowns), execution data with trace spans, final output, and any associated files. The log details sidebar lets you inspect block-level inputs and outputs." },
+  { question: "Are API keys visible in the logs?", answer: "No. API keys and credentials are automatically redacted in the log input tab for security. You can safely inspect block inputs without exposing sensitive values." },
+  { question: "What is a workflow snapshot?", answer: "A workflow snapshot is a frozen copy of the workflow's structure (blocks, connections, and configuration) captured at execution time. It lets you see the exact state of the workflow when a particular execution ran, which is useful for debugging workflows that have been modified since the execution." },
+  { question: "Can I access logs programmatically?", answer: "Yes. The External API provides endpoints to query logs with filtering by workflow, time range, trigger type, duration, cost, and model. You can also set up webhook, email, or Slack notifications for real-time alerts when executions complete." },
+  { question: "What does Live mode do on the Logs page?", answer: "Live mode automatically refreshes the Logs page in real-time so new execution entries appear as they are logged, without requiring manual page refreshes. This is useful during deployments or when monitoring active workflows." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/getting-started/index.mdx

@@ -23,6 +23,7 @@ import {
 } from '@/components/icons'
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Build your first AI workflow in 10 minutes. In this tutorial, you'll create a people research agent that uses advanced LLM-powered search tools to extract and structure information about individuals.
 
@@ -177,7 +178,7 @@ Build, test, and refine workflows quickly with immediate feedback
     Discover API, Function, Condition, and other workflow blocks
   </Card>
   <Card title="Browse Integrations" href="/tools">
-    Connect 80+ services including Gmail, Slack, Notion, and more
+    Connect 160+ services including Gmail, Slack, Notion, and more
   </Card>
   <Card title="Add Custom Logic" href="/blocks/function">
     Write custom functions for advanced data processing
@@ -191,6 +192,16 @@ Build, test, and refine workflows quickly with immediate feedback
 
 **Need detailed explanations?** Visit the [Blocks documentation](/blocks) for comprehensive guides on each component.
 
-**Looking for integrations?** Explore the [Tools documentation](/tools) to see all 80+ available integrations.
+**Looking for integrations?** Explore the [Tools documentation](/tools) to see all 160+ available integrations.
 
 **Ready to go live?** Learn about [Execution and Deployment](/execution) to make your workflows production-ready.
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How long does the getting started tutorial take?", answer: "About 10 minutes. The tutorial walks you through creating a people research agent with web search tools and structured output. You will have a fully working workflow by the end." },
+  { question: "Do I need API keys to follow this tutorial?", answer: "You need API keys for the search tools (Exa and Linkup) used in this tutorial. For the AI model, you can either use Sim's hosted keys (included with your plan credits) or bring your own OpenAI API key. If you prefer not to set up search tool keys, you can still build a basic agent workflow without them." },
+  { question: "Do I need coding experience to complete this tutorial?", answer: "No. The entire tutorial uses the visual drag-and-drop interface. You will connect blocks, configure settings, and test through the chat panel without writing any code." },
+  { question: "Can I use a different AI model instead of GPT-4o?", answer: "Yes. The Agent block supports models from OpenAI, Anthropic, Google, Groq, Cerebras, DeepSeek, Mistral, xAI, and more. You can select any available model from the dropdown. If you self-host, you can also use local models through Ollama." },
+  { question: "Can I import workflows from other tools?", answer: "Sim does not currently support importing workflows from other automation platforms. However, you can use the Copilot feature to describe what you want in natural language and have it build the workflow for you, which is often faster than manual recreation." },
+  { question: "What if my workflow does not produce the expected output?", answer: "Use the Chat panel to test iteratively and inspect outputs from each block. You can click the dropdown to view different block outputs and pinpoint where the issue is. The execution logs (accessible from the Logs tab) show detailed information about each step including token usage, costs, and any errors." },
+  { question: "Where do I go after completing this tutorial?", answer: "Explore the Blocks documentation to learn about Condition, Router, Function, and API blocks. Browse the Tools section to discover 160+ integrations you can add to your agents. When you are ready to deploy, check the Execution docs for REST API, webhook, and scheduled trigger options." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/introduction/index.mdx

@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ import { Card, Cards } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/card'
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Sim is an open-source visual workflow builder for building and deploying AI agent workflows. Design intelligent automation systems using a no-code interface—connect AI models, databases, APIs, and business tools through an intuitive drag-and-drop canvas. Whether you're building chatbots, automating business processes, or orchestrating complex data pipelines, Sim provides the tools to bring your AI workflows to life.
 
@@ -57,11 +58,11 @@ Enable your team to build together. Multiple users can edit workflows simultaneo
 
 ## Integrations
 
-Sim provides native integrations with 80+ services across multiple categories:
+Sim provides native integrations with 160+ services across multiple categories:
 
 - **AI Models**: OpenAI, Anthropic, Google Gemini, Groq, Cerebras, local models via Ollama or VLLM
 - **Communication**: Gmail, Slack, Microsoft Teams, Telegram, WhatsApp  
-- **Productivity**: Notion, Google Workspace, Airtable, Monday.com
+- **Productivity**: Notion, Google Workspace, Airtable
 - **Development**: GitHub, Jira, Linear, automated browser testing
 - **Search & Data**: Google Search, Perplexity, Firecrawl, Exa AI
 - **Databases**: PostgreSQL, MySQL, Supabase, Pinecone, Qdrant
@@ -109,9 +110,20 @@ Ready to build your first AI workflow?
     Learn about the building blocks
   </Card>
   <Card title="Tools & Integrations" href="/tools">
-    Explore 80+ built-in integrations
+    Explore 160+ built-in integrations
   </Card>
   <Card title="Team Permissions" href="/permissions/roles-and-permissions">
     Set up workspace roles and permissions
   </Card>
 </Cards>
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Is Sim free to use?", answer: "Sim offers a free Community plan with 1,000 one-time credits to get started. Paid plans start at $25/month (Pro) with 5,000 credits and go up to $100/month (Max) with 20,000 credits. Annual billing is available at a 15% discount. You can also self-host Sim for free on your own infrastructure." },
+  { question: "Is Sim open source?", answer: "Yes. Sim is open source under the Apache 2.0 license. The full source code is available on GitHub and you can self-host it, contribute to development, or modify it for your own needs. Enterprise features (SSO, access control) have a separate license that requires a subscription for production use." },
+  { question: "Which AI models and providers are supported?", answer: "Sim supports 15+ providers including OpenAI, Anthropic, Google Gemini, Groq, Cerebras, DeepSeek, Mistral, xAI, and OpenRouter. You can also run local models through Ollama or VLLM at no API cost. Bring Your Own Key (BYOK) is supported so you can use your own API keys at base provider pricing with no markup." },
+  { question: "Do I need coding experience to use Sim?", answer: "No. Sim is a no-code visual builder where you design workflows by dragging blocks onto a canvas and connecting them. For advanced use cases, the Function block lets you write custom JavaScript, but it is entirely optional." },
+  { question: "Can I self-host Sim?", answer: "Yes. Sim provides Docker Compose configurations for self-hosted deployments. The stack includes the Sim application, a PostgreSQL database with pgvector, and a realtime collaboration server. You can also integrate local AI models via Ollama for a fully offline setup." },
+  { question: "Is there a limit on how many workflows I can create?", answer: "There is no limit on the number of workflows you can create on any plan. Usage limits apply to execution credits, rate limits, and file storage, which vary by plan tier." },
+  { question: "What integrations are available?", answer: "Sim offers 160+ native integrations across categories including AI models, communication tools (Gmail, Slack, Teams, Telegram), productivity apps (Notion, Google Workspace, Airtable), development tools (GitHub, Jira, Linear), search services (Google Search, Perplexity, Exa), and databases (PostgreSQL, Supabase, Pinecone). For anything not built in, you can use the MCP (Model Context Protocol) support to connect custom services." },
+  { question: "How does Sim compare to other workflow automation tools?", answer: "Sim is purpose-built for AI agent workflows rather than general task automation. It provides a visual canvas for orchestrating LLM-powered agents with built-in support for tool use, structured outputs, conditional branching, and real-time collaboration. The Copilot feature also lets you build and modify workflows using natural language." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/knowledgebase/connectors.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+---
+title: Connectors
+description: Automatically sync documents from external sources into your knowledge base
+---
+
+import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
+import { Step, Steps } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/steps'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+Connectors let you pull documents directly from external services into your knowledge base. Instead of manually uploading files, a connector continuously syncs content from sources like Notion, Google Drive, GitHub, Slack, and more — keeping your knowledge base up to date automatically.
+
+## Available Connectors
+
+Sim ships with 30 built-in connectors spanning productivity tools, cloud storage, development platforms, and more.
+
+| Category | Connectors |
+|----------|-----------|
+| **Productivity** | Notion, Confluence, Asana, Linear, Jira, Google Calendar, Google Sheets |
+| **Cloud Storage** | Google Drive, Dropbox, OneDrive, SharePoint |
+| **Documents** | Google Docs, WordPress, Webflow |
+| **Development** | GitHub |
+| **Communication** | Slack, Discord, Microsoft Teams, Reddit |
+| **Email** | Gmail, Outlook |
+| **CRM** | HubSpot, Salesforce |
+| **Support** | Intercom, ServiceNow, Zendesk |
+| **Data** | Airtable |
+| **Note-taking** | Evernote, Obsidian |
+| **Meetings** | Fireflies |
+
+## Adding a Connector
+
+<Steps>
+<Step>
+
+### Select a source
+
+Open a knowledge base and click **Add Connector**. You'll see the full list of available connectors — pick the service you want to sync from.
+
+</Step>
+<Step>
+
+### Authenticate
+
+Most connectors use **OAuth** — select an existing credential from the dropdown, or click **Connect new account** to authorize through the service's login flow. Tokens are refreshed automatically, so you won't need to re-authenticate unless you revoke access.
+
+A few connectors (Evernote, Obsidian, Fireflies) use **API keys** instead. Paste your key or developer token directly, and it will be stored securely.
+
+<Callout type="info">
+  If you rotate an API key in the external service, you'll need to update it in Sim as well. OAuth tokens are refreshed automatically, but API keys are not.
+</Callout>
+
+</Step>
+<Step>
+
+### Configure
+
+Each connector has its own configuration fields that control what gets synced. Some examples:
+
+- **Notion**: Choose between syncing an entire workspace, a specific database, or a single page tree
+- **GitHub**: Specify a repository, branch, and optional file extension filter
+- **Confluence**: Enter your Atlassian domain and optionally filter by space key or content type
+- **Obsidian**: Provide your vault URL and optionally restrict to a folder path
+
+All configuration is validated when you save — if a repository doesn't exist or a domain is unreachable, you'll get an immediate error.
+
+</Step>
+<Step>
+
+### Choose sync frequency
+
+Select how often the connector should re-sync:
+
+| Frequency | Description |
+|-----------|-------------|
+| Every hour | Best for fast-moving sources |
+| Every 6 hours | Good balance for most use cases |
+| **Daily** (default) | Suitable for content that changes infrequently |
+| Weekly | For stable, rarely-updated sources |
+| Manual only | Sync only when you trigger it |
+
+</Step>
+<Step>
+
+### Configure metadata tags (optional)
+
+If the connector supports metadata tags, you'll see checkboxes for each tag type (e.g., Labels, Last Modified, Notebook). All are enabled by default — uncheck any you don't need.
+
+See the [Metadata Tags](#metadata-tags) section below for details.
+
+</Step>
+<Step>
+
+### Connect & Sync
+
+Click **Connect & Sync** to save the connector and trigger the first sync immediately. Documents will begin appearing in your knowledge base as they are processed.
+
+</Step>
+</Steps>
+
+## How Syncing Works
+
+On each sync, the connector fetches documents from the external service and compares them against what's already in your knowledge base. Only documents that have actually changed are reprocessed — new content is added, updated content is re-chunked and re-embedded, and documents that no longer exist in the source are removed.
+
+This means syncing is efficient even for large document sets. A connector with thousands of documents will only do meaningful work when something changes.
+
+### Handling Failures
+
+If a single document fails to fetch (e.g., due to a permission issue or timeout), the sync continues with the remaining documents. The failed document will be retried on the next sync cycle.
+
+If an entire sync fails (e.g., the service is down or credentials expired), the connector automatically backs off and retries later. The backoff resets as soon as a sync succeeds.
+
+## Metadata Tags
+
+Connectors can automatically populate [tags](/docs/knowledgebase/tags) with metadata from the source, letting you filter documents in the Knowledge block based on information from the external service.
+
+For example, a Notion connector might tag documents with their **Labels**, **Last Modified** date, and **Created** date. A GitHub connector might tag documents with their **Repository** and **File Path**. This metadata becomes available for [tag-based filtering](/docs/knowledgebase/tags) in your workflows.
+
+### Opting Out
+
+You can disable specific metadata tags during connector setup. Disabled tags won't be populated, leaving those tag slots available for other connectors or manual tagging.
+
+<Callout type="info">
+  Tag slots are shared across all documents in a knowledge base. If you have multiple connectors, each one's metadata tags draw from the same pool of available slots.
+</Callout>
+
+## Excluding Documents
+
+You can manually exclude specific documents from a connector's sync. Excluded documents are skipped on every subsequent sync, even if they change in the source. This is useful for filtering out templates, drafts, or other content you don't want in your knowledge base.
+
+## Source Links
+
+Every synced document retains a link back to the original in the external service. This lets you trace any knowledge base document to its source — whether that's a Notion page, a GitHub file, a Confluence article, or a Slack conversation.
+
+## Multiple Connectors
+
+You can add multiple connectors to a single knowledge base. For example, you might sync internal documentation from Confluence alongside code from GitHub and meeting notes from Fireflies — all searchable together through the Knowledge block.
+
+Each connector manages its own documents independently. Metadata tag slots are shared across the knowledge base, so keep an eye on slot usage if you're combining several connectors that each populate tags.
+
+## Common Use Cases
+
+- **Internal knowledge base**: Sync your team's Notion workspace and Confluence spaces so AI agents can answer questions about internal processes, policies, and documentation
+- **Customer support**: Connect HubSpot or Salesforce alongside your help docs from WordPress or Google Docs to give support agents full context on customers and product information
+- **Engineering assistant**: Sync a GitHub repository and Jira or Linear issues so an AI agent can reference code, specs, and ticket history when answering developer questions
+- **Meeting intelligence**: Pull in Fireflies transcripts alongside Slack conversations to build a searchable archive of decisions and discussions
+- **Research and notes**: Sync Evernote notebooks or an Obsidian vault to make your personal notes available to AI workflows
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How often do connectors sync?", answer: "You can choose from hourly, every 6 hours, daily (default), weekly, or manual-only sync frequencies. Each connector can have its own schedule." },
+  { question: "What happens if a source document is deleted?", answer: "On the next sync, the connector detects that the document no longer exists in the source and removes it from your knowledge base automatically." },
+  { question: "Can I connect multiple services to one knowledge base?", answer: "Yes. You can add as many connectors as you need to a single knowledge base. Each connector manages its documents independently." },
+  { question: "Do I need to re-authenticate connectors?", answer: "OAuth-based connectors refresh tokens automatically. API key-based connectors (Evernote, Obsidian, Fireflies) need manual updates if you rotate the key." },
+  { question: "What if a connector sync fails?", answer: "If a single document fails, the rest of the sync continues. If the entire sync fails (e.g., service is down), the connector backs off and retries automatically." },
+  { question: "Can I exclude specific documents from syncing?", answer: "Yes. You can manually exclude documents from any connector. Excluded documents are skipped on every subsequent sync, even if they change in the source." },
+  { question: "Do metadata tags count against a limit?", answer: "Tag slots are shared across all documents in a knowledge base. If you have multiple connectors, their metadata tags draw from the same pool of available slots." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/knowledgebase/index.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ description: Upload, process, and search through your documents with intelligent
 
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
 import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 The knowledgebase allows you to upload, process, and search through your documents with intelligent vector search and chunking. Documents of various types are automatically processed, embedded, and made searchable. Your documents are intelligently chunked, and you can view, edit, and search through them using natural language queries.
 
@@ -25,7 +26,7 @@ The system handles the entire processing pipeline for you:
 
 ## Supported File Types
 
-Sim supports PDF, Word (DOC/DOCX), plain text (TXT), Markdown (MD), HTML, Excel (XLS/XLSX), PowerPoint (PPT/PPTX), and CSV files. Files can be up to 100MB each, with optimal performance for files under 50MB. You can upload multiple documents simultaneously, and PDF files include OCR processing for scanned documents.
+Sim supports PDF, Word (DOC/DOCX), plain text (TXT), Markdown (MD), HTML, HTM, Excel (XLS/XLSX), PowerPoint (PPT/PPTX), CSV, JSON, and YAML/YML files. Files can be up to 100MB each, with optimal performance for files under 50MB. You can upload multiple documents simultaneously, and PDF files include OCR processing for scanned documents.
 
 ## Viewing and Editing Chunks
 
@@ -40,8 +41,8 @@ When creating a knowledge base, you can configure how documents are split into c
 | Setting | Unit | Default | Range | Description |
 |---------|------|---------|-------|-------------|
 | **Max Chunk Size** | tokens | 1,024 | 100-4,000 | Maximum size of each chunk (1 token ≈ 4 characters) |
-| **Min Chunk Size** | characters | 1 | 1-2,000 | Minimum chunk size to avoid tiny fragments |
-| **Overlap** | characters | 200 | 0-500 | Context overlap between consecutive chunks |
+| **Min Chunk Size** | characters | 100 | 100-2,000 | Minimum chunk size to avoid tiny fragments |
+| **Overlap** | tokens | 200 | 0-500 | Context overlap between consecutive chunks |
 
 - **Hierarchical splitting**: Respects document structure (sections, paragraphs, sentences)
 
@@ -117,4 +118,14 @@ Sim uses vector search powered by [pgvector](https://github.com/pgvector/pgvecto
 4. **Explore chunks**: View and edit the processed content
 5. **Add to workflows**: Use the Knowledge block to integrate with your AI agents
 
-The knowledgebase transforms your static documents into an intelligent, searchable resource that your AI workflows can leverage for more informed and contextual responses.
+The knowledgebase transforms your static documents into an intelligent, searchable resource that your AI workflows can leverage for more informed and contextual responses.
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What file types are supported?", answer: "PDF, Word (DOC/DOCX), plain text (TXT), Markdown (MD), HTML, HTM, Excel (XLS/XLSX), PowerPoint (PPT/PPTX), CSV, JSON, and YAML/YML files." },
+  { question: "Is there a file size limit?", answer: "Files can be up to 100 MB each, with optimal performance for files under 50 MB." },
+  { question: "Can I edit chunks after processing?", answer: "Yes. You can view, edit, merge, split, and add metadata to individual chunks after documents are processed." },
+  { question: "How does semantic search work?", answer: "Documents are embedded as vectors using AI models. When you search, your query is also embedded and compared against document vectors to find conceptually similar content — even without exact keyword matches." },
+  { question: "Does it support scanned PDFs?", answer: "Yes. When configured with Azure or Mistral OCR, Sim can extract text from image-based and scanned PDF documents." },
+  { question: "Can I search across multiple knowledge bases?", answer: "Each Knowledge block targets a specific knowledge base. You can use multiple Knowledge blocks in a workflow to search across different knowledge bases." },
+  { question: "How do I control chunk size?", answer: "When creating a knowledge base, you can configure max chunk size (100-4,000 tokens), min chunk size (100-2,000 characters), and overlap (0-500 tokens)." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/knowledgebase/meta.json

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
 {
   "title": "Knowledgebase",
-  "pages": ["index", "tags"]
+  "pages": ["index", "connectors", "tags"]
 }

apps/docs/content/docs/en/knowledgebase/tags.mdx

@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ title: Tags and Filtering
 ---
 
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Tags provide a powerful way to organize your documents and create precise filtering for your vector searches. By combining tag-based filtering with semantic search, you can retrieve exactly the content you need from your knowledgebase.
 
@@ -16,7 +17,7 @@ You can add custom tags to any document in your knowledgebase to organize and ca
 
 ### Tag Management
 - **Custom tags**: Create your own tag system that fits your workflow
-- **Multiple tags per document**: Apply as many tags as needed to each document, there are 7 tag slots available per knowledgebase that are shared by all documents in the knowledgebase
+- **Multiple tags per document**: Apply as many tags as needed to each document. Each knowledgebase has 17 tag slots total: 7 text, 5 number, 2 date, and 3 boolean slots, shared by all documents in the knowledgebase
 - **Tag organization**: Group related documents with consistent tagging
 
 ### Tag Best Practices
@@ -65,10 +66,10 @@ When you **provide both tags and a search query**:
 ### Search Configuration
 
 #### Tag Filtering
-- **Multiple tags**: Use multiple tags for OR logic (document must have one or more of the tags)
+- **Multiple tags**: Use multiple tags with AND or OR logic to control whether documents must match all or any of the specified tags
 - **Tag combinations**: Mix different tag types for precise filtering
 - **Case sensitivity**: Tag matching is case-insensitive
-- **Partial matching**: Exact tag name matching required
+- **Partial matching**: Text fields support partial matching operators such as contains, starts_with, and ends_with in addition to exact matching
 
 #### Vector Search Parameters
 - **Query complexity**: Natural language questions work best
@@ -105,4 +106,13 @@ When you **provide both tags and a search query**:
 4. **Integrate into workflows**: Use the Knowledge block with your tagging strategy
 5. **Refine over time**: Adjust your tagging approach based on search results
 
-Tags transform your knowledgebase from a simple document store into a precisely organized, searchable intelligence system that your AI workflows can navigate with surgical precision.
+Tags transform your knowledgebase from a simple document store into a precisely organized, searchable intelligence system that your AI workflows can navigate with surgical precision.
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How many tag slots are available per knowledgebase?", answer: "Each knowledgebase supports up to 17 tag slots total across four field types: 7 text slots, 5 number slots, 2 date slots, and 3 boolean slots. These slots are shared across all documents in the knowledgebase." },
+  { question: "What tag field types are supported?", answer: "Four field types are supported: text (free-form string values), number (numeric values), date (date values in YYYY-MM-DD format), and boolean (true/false values). Each type has its own pool of available slots." },
+  { question: "Is tag matching case-sensitive?", answer: "No, tag matching is case-insensitive. You can use any capitalization when filtering by tags and it will match regardless of how the tag value was originally entered." },
+  { question: "How does combined tag and vector search work?", answer: "When you provide both tags and a search query, tag filtering is applied first to narrow down the document set, then vector search runs within that filtered subset. This approach is more efficient because it reduces the number of vectors that need similarity comparison." },
+  { question: "What is the default number of results returned from a knowledge search?", answer: "The default is 10 results. You can configure this with the topK parameter, which accepts values from 1 to 100." },
+  { question: "What embedding model does Sim use for knowledge base search?", answer: "Sim uses OpenAI's text-embedding-3-small model with 1536 dimensions for generating document embeddings and performing vector similarity search." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/mailer/index.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+---
+title: Sim Mailer
+description: Send emails to your workspace and let Sim handle them as tasks.
+---
+
+import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+Sim Mailer gives your workspace a dedicated email address. Forward or send emails to it and Sim will process them as tasks — reading the subject, body, and any attachments, then replying to the thread with the result.
+
+This means you can interact with Sim directly from your email client without switching apps.
+
+## Getting Started
+
+1. Navigate to **Settings** → **Inbox**
+2. Toggle the inbox on
+3. Optionally choose a custom address prefix (e.g., `acme` → `acme@mothership.sim.ai`)
+4. Copy your inbox address and start sending emails
+
+If you skip the custom prefix, one is generated automatically.
+
+<Callout type="info">
+  Changing your address creates a new inbox. The old address stops working immediately.
+</Callout>
+
+## What You Can Send
+
+Write your email like you would to a colleague. The subject and body become the task prompt.
+
+**Attachments are fully supported.** Images, PDFs, and documents (up to 10 MB each) are read by Sim and displayed inline in the conversation — image attachments show as previews, just like when you upload them directly in the chat.
+
+| Good email | Why it works |
+|------------|-------------|
+| "Summarize the attached PDF and list action items" | Clear task with an attachment |
+| "What's in this image?" with a photo attached | Sim reads and describes the image |
+| "Draft a reply to this forwarded thread" | Uses the email body as context |
+
+## Allowed Senders
+
+Only authorized senders can create tasks. Emails from anyone else are automatically rejected.
+
+- **Workspace members** are allowed by default — no setup needed
+- **External senders** can be added manually with an optional label for easy identification
+
+Manage your allowed senders list in **Settings** → **Inbox** → **Allowed Senders**.
+
+## Tracking Tasks
+
+Every email becomes a task you can track in **Settings** → **Inbox**:
+
+- **Search** by subject, sender, or body content
+- **Filter** by status to find what you need
+- **Click** any completed or failed task to jump to the full conversation
+
+### Task Statuses
+
+| Status | Meaning |
+|--------|---------|
+| **Received** | Email accepted, queued for processing |
+| **Processing** | Sim is actively working on it |
+| **Completed** | Done — the result was sent as an email reply |
+| **Failed** | Something went wrong during execution |
+| **Rejected** | Email blocked (sender not allowed, automated sender, or rate limit exceeded) |
+
+## Conversations
+
+Each email task creates a conversation in your workspace. You can continue the conversation from the Sim chat interface, and any follow-up emails in the same thread are linked to the same conversation.
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Can I use my own email domain?", answer: "Not currently. All inbox addresses use the @mothership.sim.ai domain. You can customize the prefix (e.g., acme@mothership.sim.ai) but not the domain itself." },
+  { question: "What happens if I send from an unauthorized email?", answer: "The email is automatically rejected. Only workspace members and manually added external senders can create tasks." },
+  { question: "Is there a size limit for attachments?", answer: "Yes, each attachment can be up to 10 MB. Images, PDFs, and common document formats are supported." },
+  { question: "Can I reply to Sim's email responses?", answer: "Yes. Replies in the same email thread are linked to the original conversation, so you can continue the interaction from your email client." },
+  { question: "How long does it take to process an email?", answer: "Most emails are processed within a few seconds. Emails with large attachments or complex tasks may take slightly longer." },
+  { question: "Can multiple people in my workspace use the same inbox?", answer: "Yes. All workspace members can send to the shared inbox address. Each email creates its own task and conversation." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/mcp/deploy-workflows.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ description: Expose your workflows as MCP tools for external AI assistants and a
 
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video'
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Deploy your workflows as MCP tools to make them accessible to external AI assistants like Claude Desktop, Cursor, and other MCP-compatible clients. This turns your workflows into callable tools that can be invoked from anywhere.
 
@@ -101,8 +102,18 @@ Workflows execute using the same deployment version as API calls, ensuring consi
 
 | Action | Required Permission |
 |--------|-------------------|
-| Create MCP servers | **Admin** |
+| Create MCP servers | **Write** or **Admin** |
 | Add workflows to servers | **Write** or **Admin** |
 | View MCP servers | **Read**, **Write**, or **Admin** |
 | Delete MCP servers | **Admin** |
 
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Does my workflow need to be deployed before adding it as an MCP tool?", answer: "Yes. Only deployed workflows can be added as MCP tools. The MCP tool executes the same deployment version as API calls, ensuring consistent behavior between both access methods." },
+  { question: "What MCP protocol does Sim implement?", answer: "Sim implements the standard MCP protocol using the official @modelcontextprotocol/sdk types, supporting JSON-RPC 2.0 messages including tools/list and tools/call methods. It handles both requests and notifications per the MCP specification." },
+  { question: "How do I authenticate MCP client connections?", answer: "Include your API key in the X-API-Key header when connecting via mcp-remote or other HTTP-based MCP transports. The server validates authentication using hybrid auth that supports both session-based and API key-based access." },
+  { question: "Can I add the same workflow to multiple MCP servers?", answer: "Yes. When configuring a workflow as an MCP tool, you can select multiple MCP servers to add it to. Each server exposes its own URL, so you can organize tools into different servers for different use cases or clients." },
+  { question: "What naming conventions should I follow for tool names?", answer: "Use lowercase letters, numbers, and underscores only. The name should be descriptive and follow MCP naming conventions, such as search_documents or send_email. This helps AI assistants understand and correctly invoke your tools." },
+  { question: "How are workflow inputs mapped to MCP tool parameters?", answer: "Your workflow's input format fields automatically become MCP tool parameters. You can add descriptions to each parameter in the MCP configuration to help AI assistants understand what values to provide." },
+]} />
+
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/mcp/index.mdx

@@ -97,10 +97,11 @@ MCP functionality requires specific workspace permissions:
 
 | Action | Required Permission |
 |--------|-------------------|
-| Configure MCP servers in settings | **Admin** |
+| Create or update MCP servers | **Write** or **Admin** |
+| Delete MCP servers | **Admin** |
 | Use MCP tools in agents | **Write** or **Admin** |
 | View available MCP tools | **Read**, **Write**, or **Admin** |
-| Execute MCP Tool blocks | **Write** or **Admin** |
+| Execute MCP Tool blocks | **Read**, **Write**, or **Admin** |
 
 ## Common Use Cases
 
@@ -141,4 +142,15 @@ Fetch live data from external systems during workflow execution.
 ### Permission Errors
 - Confirm your workspace permission level
 - Check if the MCP server requires additional authentication
-- Verify the server is properly configured for your workspace
+- Verify the server is properly configured for your workspace
+
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What is the difference between using MCP tools in an Agent block vs. the standalone MCP Tool block?", answer: "When you add MCP tools to an Agent block, the AI decides which tools to use based on the conversation context and its reasoning. This is best for dynamic, conversational workflows. The standalone MCP Tool block executes a specific tool with explicit parameters every time, giving you deterministic, predictable execution. Use Agent blocks for flexible reasoning and MCP Tool blocks for structured, repeatable steps." },
+  { question: "Who can configure MCP servers in a workspace?", answer: "Users with Write permission can configure (add and update) MCP servers in workspace settings. Only Admin permission is required to delete MCP servers. Users with Read permission can view available MCP tools and execute them in agents and MCP Tool blocks. This means all workspace members with at least Read access can use MCP tools in their workflows." },
+  { question: "Can I use MCP servers from multiple workspaces?", answer: "MCP servers are configured per workspace. Each workspace maintains its own set of MCP server connections. If you need the same MCP server in multiple workspaces, you need to configure it separately in each workspace's settings." },
+  { question: "How do I update MCP tool schemas after a server changes its available tools?", answer: "Click the Refresh button on the MCP server in your workspace settings. This fetches the latest tool schemas from the server and automatically updates any agent blocks that use those tools with the new parameter definitions." },
+  { question: "Can permission groups restrict access to MCP tools?", answer: "Yes. Organization admins can create permission groups that disable MCP tools for specific members using the disableMcpTools configuration option. When this is enabled, affected users will not be able to add or use MCP tools in their workflows." },
+  { question: "What happens if an MCP server goes offline during workflow execution?", answer: "If the MCP server is unreachable during execution, the tool call will fail and return an error. In an Agent block, the AI may attempt to handle the failure gracefully. In a standalone MCP Tool block, the workflow step will fail. Check MCP server logs and verify the server is running and accessible to troubleshoot connectivity issues." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/meta.json

@@ -10,8 +10,10 @@
     "connections",
     "mcp",
     "copilot",
+    "mailer",
     "skills",
     "knowledgebase",
+    "tables",
     "variables",
     "credentials",
     "execution",

apps/docs/content/docs/en/permissions/roles-and-permissions.mdx

@@ -154,8 +154,19 @@ When inviting someone to your organization, you can assign one of two roles:
 - Manage billing and subscription settings
 - Access all workspaces within the organization
 
-### Organization Member  
+### Organization Member
 **What they can do:**
 - Access workspaces they've been specifically invited to
 - View the list of organization members
-- Cannot invite new people or manage organization settings
+- Cannot invite new people or manage organization settings
+
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What is the difference between organization roles and workspace permissions?", answer: "Organization roles (Admin or Member) control who can manage the organization itself, including inviting people, creating workspaces, and handling billing. Workspace permissions (Read, Write, Admin) control what a user can do within a specific workspace, such as viewing, editing, or managing workflows. A user needs both an organization role and a workspace permission to work within a workspace." },
+  { question: "Can I restrict which integrations or model providers a team member can use?", answer: "Yes. Organization admins can create permission groups with fine-grained controls, including restricting allowed integrations and allowed model providers to specific lists. You can also disable access to MCP tools, custom tools, skills, and various platform features like the knowledge base, API keys, or Copilot on a per-group basis." },
+  { question: "What happens when a personal environment variable has the same name as a workspace variable?", answer: "The personal environment variable takes priority. When a workflow runs, if both a personal and workspace variable share the same name, the personal value is used. This allows individual users to override shared workspace configuration when needed." },
+  { question: "Can an Admin remove the workspace owner?", answer: "No. The workspace owner cannot be removed from the workspace by anyone. Only the workspace owner can delete the workspace or transfer ownership to another user. Admins can do everything else, including inviting and removing other users and managing workspace settings." },
+  { question: "What are permission groups and how do they work?", answer: "Permission groups are an advanced access control feature that lets organization admins define granular restrictions beyond the standard Read/Write/Admin roles. A permission group can hide UI sections (like trace spans, knowledge base, API keys, or deployment options), disable features (MCP tools, custom tools, skills, invitations), and restrict which integrations and model providers members can access. Members can be assigned to groups, and new members can be auto-added." },
+  { question: "How should I set up permissions for a new team member?", answer: "Start with the lowest permission level they need. Invite them to the organization as a Member, then add them to the relevant workspace with Read permission if they only need visibility, Write if they need to create and run workflows, or Admin if they need to manage the workspace and its users. You can always increase permissions later." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/sdks/python.mdx

@@ -65,14 +65,14 @@ Execute a workflow with optional input data.
 ```python
 result = client.execute_workflow(
     "workflow-id",
-    input_data={"message": "Hello, world!"},
+    input={"message": "Hello, world!"},
     timeout=30.0  # 30 seconds
 )
 ```
 
 **Parameters:**
 - `workflow_id` (str): The ID of the workflow to execute
-- `input_data` (dict, optional): Input data to pass to the workflow
+- `input` (dict, optional): Input data to pass to the workflow
 - `timeout` (float, optional): Timeout in seconds (default: 30.0)
 - `stream` (bool, optional): Enable streaming responses (default: False)
 - `selected_outputs` (list[str], optional): Block outputs to stream in `blockName.attribute` format (e.g., `["agent1.content"]`)
@@ -144,7 +144,7 @@ Execute a workflow with automatic retry on rate limit errors using exponential b
 ```python
 result = client.execute_with_retry(
     "workflow-id",
-    input_data={"message": "Hello"},
+    input={"message": "Hello"},
     timeout=30.0,
     max_retries=3,           # Maximum number of retries
     initial_delay=1.0,       # Initial delay in seconds
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ result = client.execute_with_retry(
 
 **Parameters:**
 - `workflow_id` (str): The ID of the workflow to execute
-- `input_data` (dict, optional): Input data to pass to the workflow
+- `input` (dict, optional): Input data to pass to the workflow
 - `timeout` (float, optional): Timeout in seconds
 - `stream` (bool, optional): Enable streaming responses
 - `selected_outputs` (list, optional): Block outputs to stream
@@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ def run_workflow():
         # Execute the workflow
         result = client.execute_workflow(
             "my-workflow-id",
-            input_data={
+            input={
                 "message": "Process this data",
                 "user_id": "12345"
             }
@@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ def execute_async():
         # Start async execution
         result = client.execute_workflow(
             "workflow-id",
-            input_data={"data": "large dataset"},
+            input={"data": "large dataset"},
             async_execution=True  # Execute asynchronously
         )
 
@@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ def execute_with_retry_handling():
         # Automatically retries on rate limit
         result = client.execute_with_retry(
             "workflow-id",
-            input_data={"message": "Process this"},
+            input={"message": "Process this"},
             max_retries=5,
             initial_delay=1.0,
             max_delay=60.0,
@@ -615,7 +615,7 @@ def execute_with_streaming():
         # Enable streaming for specific block outputs
         result = client.execute_workflow(
             "workflow-id",
-            input_data={"message": "Count to five"},
+            input={"message": "Count to five"},
             stream=True,
             selected_outputs=["agent1.content"]  # Use blockName.attribute format
         )
@@ -758,4 +758,15 @@ Configure the client using environment variables:
 
 ## License
 
-Apache-2.0 
+Apache-2.0
+
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Do I need to deploy a workflow before I can execute it via the SDK?", answer: "Yes. Workflows must be deployed before they can be executed through the SDK. You can use the validate_workflow() method to check whether a workflow is deployed and ready. If it returns False, deploy the workflow from the Sim UI first and create or select an API key during deployment." },
+  { question: "What is the difference between sync and async execution?", answer: "Sync execution (the default) blocks until the workflow completes and returns the full result. Async execution (async_execution=True) returns immediately with a task ID that you can poll using get_job_status(). Use async mode for long-running workflows to avoid request timeouts. Async job statuses include queued, processing, completed, failed, and cancelled." },
+  { question: "How does the SDK handle rate limiting?", answer: "The SDK provides built-in rate limiting support through the execute_with_retry() method. It uses exponential backoff (1s, 2s, 4s, 8s...) with 25% jitter to avoid thundering herd problems. If the API returns a retry-after header, that value is used instead. You can configure max_retries, initial_delay, max_delay, and backoff_multiplier. Use get_rate_limit_info() to check your current rate limit status." },
+  { question: "Can I use the Python SDK as a context manager?", answer: "Yes. The SimStudioClient supports Python's context manager protocol. Use it with the 'with' statement to automatically close the underlying HTTP session when you are done, which is especially useful for scripts that create and discard client instances." },
+  { question: "How do I handle different types of errors from the SDK?", answer: "The SDK raises SimStudioError with a code property for API-specific errors. Common error codes are UNAUTHORIZED (invalid API key), TIMEOUT (request timed out), RATE_LIMIT_EXCEEDED (too many requests), USAGE_LIMIT_EXCEEDED (billing limit reached), and EXECUTION_ERROR (workflow failed). Use the error code to implement targeted error handling and recovery logic." },
+  { question: "How do I monitor my API usage and remaining quota?", answer: "Use the get_usage_limits() method to check your current usage. It returns sync and async rate limit details (limit, remaining, reset time, whether you are currently limited), plus your current period cost, usage limit, and plan tier. This lets you monitor consumption and alert before hitting limits." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/sdks/typescript.mdx

@@ -78,16 +78,15 @@ new SimStudioClient(config: SimStudioConfig)
 Execute a workflow with optional input data.
 
 ```typescript
-const result = await client.executeWorkflow('workflow-id', {
-  input: { message: 'Hello, world!' },
+const result = await client.executeWorkflow('workflow-id', { message: 'Hello, world!' }, {
   timeout: 30000 // 30 seconds
 });
 ```
 
 **Parameters:**
 - `workflowId` (string): The ID of the workflow to execute
+- `input` (any, optional): Input data to pass to the workflow
 - `options` (ExecutionOptions, optional):
-  - `input` (any): Input data to pass to the workflow
   - `timeout` (number): Timeout in milliseconds (default: 30000)
   - `stream` (boolean): Enable streaming responses (default: false)
   - `selectedOutputs` (string[]): Block outputs to stream in `blockName.attribute` format (e.g., `["agent1.content"]`)
@@ -158,8 +157,7 @@ if (status.status === 'completed') {
 Execute a workflow with automatic retry on rate limit errors using exponential backoff.
 
 ```typescript
-const result = await client.executeWithRetry('workflow-id', {
-  input: { message: 'Hello' },
+const result = await client.executeWithRetry('workflow-id', { message: 'Hello' }, {
   timeout: 30000
 }, {
   maxRetries: 3,           // Maximum number of retries
@@ -171,6 +169,7 @@ const result = await client.executeWithRetry('workflow-id', {
 
 **Parameters:**
 - `workflowId` (string): The ID of the workflow to execute
+- `input` (any, optional): Input data to pass to the workflow
 - `options` (ExecutionOptions, optional): Same as `executeWorkflow()`
 - `retryOptions` (RetryOptions, optional):
   - `maxRetries` (number): Maximum number of retries (default: 3)
@@ -389,10 +388,8 @@ async function runWorkflow() {
 
     // Execute the workflow
     const result = await client.executeWorkflow('my-workflow-id', {
-      input: {
         message: 'Process this data',
         userId: '12345'
-      }
     });
 
     if (result.success) {
@@ -508,8 +505,7 @@ app.post('/execute-workflow', async (req, res) => {
   try {
     const { workflowId, input } = req.body;
     
-    const result = await client.executeWorkflow(workflowId, {
-      input,
+    const result = await client.executeWorkflow(workflowId, input, {
       timeout: 60000
     });
 
@@ -555,8 +551,7 @@ export default async function handler(
   try {
     const { workflowId, input } = req.body;
 
-    const result = await client.executeWorkflow(workflowId, {
-      input,
+    const result = await client.executeWorkflow(workflowId, input, {
       timeout: 30000
     });
 
@@ -586,9 +581,7 @@ const client = new SimStudioClient({
 async function executeClientSideWorkflow() {
   try {
     const result = await client.executeWorkflow('workflow-id', {
-      input: {
         userInput: 'Hello from browser'
-      }
     });
 
     console.log('Workflow result:', result);
@@ -642,10 +635,8 @@ Alternatively, you can manually provide files using the URL format:
 
       // Include files under the field name from your API trigger's input format
       const result = await client.executeWorkflow('workflow-id', {
-        input: {
           documents: files,  // Must match your workflow's "files" field name
           instructions: 'Analyze these documents'
-        }
       });
 
       console.log('Result:', result);
@@ -669,10 +660,8 @@ Alternatively, you can manually provide files using the URL format:
 
     // Include files under the field name from your API trigger's input format
     const result = await client.executeWorkflow('workflow-id', {
-      input: {
         documents: [file],  // Must match your workflow's "files" field name
         query: 'Summarize this document'
-      }
     });
     ```
   </Tab>
@@ -712,8 +701,7 @@ export function useWorkflow(): UseWorkflowResult {
     setResult(null);
 
     try {
-      const workflowResult = await client.executeWorkflow(workflowId, {
-        input,
+      const workflowResult = await client.executeWorkflow(workflowId, input, {
         timeout: 30000
       });
       setResult(workflowResult);
@@ -774,8 +762,7 @@ const client = new SimStudioClient({
 async function executeAsync() {
   try {
     // Start async execution
-    const result = await client.executeWorkflow('workflow-id', {
-      input: { data: 'large dataset' },
+    const result = await client.executeWorkflow('workflow-id', { data: 'large dataset' }, {
       async: true  // Execute asynchronously
     });
 
@@ -823,9 +810,7 @@ const client = new SimStudioClient({
 async function executeWithRetryHandling() {
   try {
     // Automatically retries on rate limit
-    const result = await client.executeWithRetry('workflow-id', {
-      input: { message: 'Process this' }
-    }, {
+    const result = await client.executeWithRetry('workflow-id', { message: 'Process this' }, {}, {
       maxRetries: 5,
       initialDelay: 1000,
       maxDelay: 60000,
@@ -908,8 +893,7 @@ const client = new SimStudioClient({
 async function executeWithStreaming() {
   try {
     // Enable streaming for specific block outputs
-    const result = await client.executeWorkflow('workflow-id', {
-      input: { message: 'Count to five' },
+    const result = await client.executeWorkflow('workflow-id', { message: 'Count to five' }, {
       stream: true,
       selectedOutputs: ['agent1.content'] // Use blockName.attribute format
     });
@@ -1033,3 +1017,14 @@ function StreamingWorkflow() {
 ## License
 
 Apache-2.0
+
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Do I need to deploy a workflow before I can execute it via the SDK?", answer: "Yes. Workflows must be deployed before they can be executed through the SDK. You can use the validateWorkflow() method to check whether a workflow is deployed and ready. If it returns false, deploy the workflow from the Sim UI first and create or select an API key during deployment." },
+  { question: "What is the difference between sync and async execution?", answer: "Sync execution (the default) blocks until the workflow completes and returns the full result. Async execution returns immediately with a task ID that you can poll using getJobStatus(). Use async mode for long-running workflows to avoid request timeouts. Async job statuses include queued, processing, completed, failed, and cancelled." },
+  { question: "How does streaming work with the SDK?", answer: "Enable streaming by setting stream: true and specifying selectedOutputs with block names and attributes in blockName.attribute format (e.g., ['agent1.content']). The response uses Server-Sent Events (SSE) format, sending incremental chunks as the workflow executes. Each chunk includes the blockId and the text content. A final done event includes the execution metadata." },
+  { question: "How does the SDK handle rate limiting?", answer: "The SDK provides built-in rate limiting support through the executeWithRetry() method. It uses exponential backoff (1s, 2s, 4s, 8s...) with 25% jitter to avoid thundering herd problems. If the API returns a retry-after header, that value is used instead. You can configure maxRetries, initialDelay, maxDelay, and backoffMultiplier. Use getRateLimitInfo() to check your current rate limit status." },
+  { question: "Is it safe to use the SDK in browser-side code?", answer: "You can use the SDK in the browser, but you should not expose your API key in client-side code. In production, use a backend proxy server to handle SDK calls, or use a public API key with limited permissions. The SDK works with both Node.js and browser environments, but sensitive keys should stay server-side." },
+  { question: "How do I send files to a workflow through the SDK?", answer: "File objects are automatically detected and converted to base64 format. Include them in the input object under the field name that matches your workflow's API trigger input format. In the browser, pass File objects directly from file inputs. In Node.js, create File objects from buffers. You can also provide files as URL references with type, data, name, and mime fields." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/self-hosting/docker.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ description: Deploy Sim with Docker Compose
 
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 ## Quick Start
 
@@ -148,3 +149,14 @@ docker compose -f docker-compose.prod.yml pull && docker compose -f docker-compo
 # Backup database
 docker compose -f docker-compose.prod.yml exec db pg_dump -U postgres simstudio > backup.sql
 ```
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What containers are started by docker-compose.prod.yml?", answer: "Four services are started: simstudio (main app on port 3000, 8 GB memory limit), realtime (WebSocket server on port 3002, 1 GB memory limit), db (PostgreSQL 17 with pgvector on port 5432), and migrations (runs once to apply database schema changes, then exits)." },
+  { question: "How do I configure SSL for production?", answer: "You can use either Caddy (recommended, handles certificates automatically) or Nginx with Certbot. Both need to reverse-proxy port 3000 for the main app and port 3002 for WebSocket connections at the /socket.io/ path." },
+  { question: "Why can I not connect to Ollama running on my host from inside Docker?", answer: "Inside a Docker container, localhost refers to the container itself, not your host machine. On macOS and Windows, use http://host.docker.internal:11434. On Linux, use your host machine's actual IP address (e.g., http://192.168.1.100:11434)." },
+  { question: "What is the difference between the GPU and CPU Ollama profiles?", answer: "The GPU profile (--profile gpu) configures NVIDIA driver capabilities and reserves GPU devices for accelerated inference. The CPU profile (--profile cpu) runs Ollama without GPU acceleration. Both use the --profile setup flag to automatically pull the gemma3:4b starter model." },
+  { question: "How do I update Sim to the latest version?", answer: "Run docker compose -f docker-compose.prod.yml pull to fetch the latest images, then docker compose -f docker-compose.prod.yml up -d to restart with the new versions. The migrations container will automatically apply any new database schema changes on startup." },
+  { question: "How do I back up and restore the database?", answer: "Back up with: docker compose -f docker-compose.prod.yml exec db pg_dump -U postgres simstudio > backup.sql. Restore with: docker compose -f docker-compose.prod.yml exec -T db psql -U postgres simstudio < backup.sql. The database data is persisted in a Docker volume named postgres_data." },
+  { question: "Can I customize the PostgreSQL credentials?", answer: "Yes. The docker-compose.prod.yml uses environment variable defaults: POSTGRES_USER (default: postgres), POSTGRES_PASSWORD (default: postgres), POSTGRES_DB (default: simstudio), and POSTGRES_PORT (default: 5432). Set these in your .env file to override them." },
+]} />
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/self-hosting/index.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ description: Deploy Sim on your own infrastructure
 
 import { Card, Cards } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/card'
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 Deploy Sim on your own infrastructure with Docker or Kubernetes.
 
@@ -63,3 +64,13 @@ Open [http://localhost:3000](http://localhost:3000)
 | db | 5432 | PostgreSQL with pgvector |
 | migrations | - | Database migrations (runs once) |
 
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What are the minimum requirements to self-host Sim?", answer: "At minimum you need 2 CPU cores, 12 GB RAM, 20 GB SSD storage, and Docker 20.10 or later. Memory is typically the constraining factor due to workflow execution (isolated-vm sandboxing), file processing, and vector operations (pgvector)." },
+  { question: "Which database does Sim use?", answer: "Sim uses PostgreSQL 17 with the pgvector extension for vector similarity search. The Docker setup uses the pgvector/pgvector:pg17 image, which comes with the vector extension pre-installed." },
+  { question: "What are the required environment variables for production?", answer: "Three secrets are required: BETTER_AUTH_SECRET (authentication), ENCRYPTION_KEY (data encryption), and INTERNAL_API_SECRET (service-to-service auth). Generate each with openssl rand -hex 32. You also need to set NEXT_PUBLIC_APP_URL and BETTER_AUTH_URL to your domain." },
+  { question: "What does the realtime service do?", answer: "The realtime service is a dedicated WebSocket server that runs on port 3002. It handles real-time communication for features like live workflow execution updates. It has a 1 GB memory limit and requires its own DATABASE_URL and BETTER_AUTH_SECRET configuration." },
+  { question: "How does the migrations service work?", answer: "The migrations container runs once at startup (restart: no) and executes bun run db:migrate to apply database schema changes. It depends on the database being healthy before running and must complete successfully before the main application starts." },
+  { question: "Can I use Sim with local AI models?", answer: "Yes. Sim supports Ollama for local model inference. Use docker-compose.ollama.yml instead of docker-compose.prod.yml. It offers both GPU (with NVIDIA support) and CPU-only profiles, and automatically pulls gemma3:4b as a starter model." },
+]} />
+
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/self-hosting/kubernetes.mdx

@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ description: Deploy Sim with Helm
 
 import { Tab, Tabs } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/tabs'
 import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
 
 ## Prerequisites
 
@@ -125,3 +126,13 @@ helm upgrade sim ./helm/sim --namespace simstudio
 # Uninstall
 helm uninstall sim --namespace simstudio
 ```
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "What are the default resource limits for the Sim app pod?", answer: "The Helm chart defaults to 8 Gi memory limit / 4 Gi request and 2000m CPU limit / 1000m request per app pod. The pod runs as non-root (UID 1001) with fsGroup 1001 for security." },
+  { question: "Can I use an external database instead of the bundled PostgreSQL?", answer: "Yes. Set postgresql.enabled to false and configure the externalDatabase section with your host, port, username, password, database name, and sslMode. The external database must have the pgvector extension installed." },
+  { question: "How do I manage secrets securely in Kubernetes?", answer: "The Helm chart supports pre-existing Kubernetes secrets via app.secrets.existingSecret. Set enabled to true and provide the secret name. This integrates with External Secrets Operator, HashiCorp Vault, Azure Key Vault, and similar tools. Key mappings can be customized if your secret uses different key names." },
+  { question: "Can I scale the app to multiple replicas?", answer: "Yes. Set app.replicaCount in your values.yaml. The chart supports standard Kubernetes scaling. Ensure your database can handle the additional connections from multiple replicas." },
+  { question: "Are there cloud-specific example configurations?", answer: "Yes. The Helm chart includes example values files for AWS EKS (values-aws.yaml), Azure AKS (values-azure.yaml), GCP GKE (values-gcp.yaml), as well as files for production, development, external databases, external secrets, and whitelabeled deployments." },
+  { question: "What ingress options are supported?", answer: "The chart supports ingress with configurable className (e.g., nginx), TLS termination, and separate host configuration for the app. Enable it with ingress.enabled: true and set your host under ingress.app.host." },
+]} />
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/skills/index.mdx

@@ -132,3 +132,15 @@ Skills are most valuable when agents need specialized knowledge or multi-step wo
 - [Agent Skills specification](https://agentskills.io) — The open format for portable agent skills
 - [Example skills](https://github.com/anthropics/skills) — Browse community skill examples
 - [Best practices](https://agentskills.io/what-are-skills) — Writing effective skills
+
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How many skills can I attach to a single agent?", answer: "You can attach as many skills as you want, but the recommended limit is 5-10 per agent. More skills mean more decision overhead for the agent when scanning descriptions. Since only the names and descriptions are included in the system prompt (about 50-100 tokens each), many skills will not dramatically increase context usage, but they can slow down the agent's decision-making." },
+  { question: "How does the agent decide when to load a skill?", answer: "The agent sees an available_skills section in its system prompt listing each skill's name and description. When the agent determines that a skill is relevant to the current task, it calls the load_skill tool with the skill name. The full skill content is then returned as a tool response. This is why writing a specific, keyword-rich description is critical -- it is the only thing the agent reads before deciding whether to activate a skill." },
+  { question: "Do skills work with all LLM providers?", answer: "Yes. The load_skill mechanism uses standard tool-calling, which is supported by all LLM providers in Sim. No provider-specific configuration is needed. The skill system works the same way whether you are using Anthropic, OpenAI, Google, or any other supported provider." },
+  { question: "When should I use skills vs. agent instructions?", answer: "Use skills for knowledge that applies across multiple workflows or changes frequently. Skills are reusable packages that can be attached to any agent. Use agent instructions for task-specific context that is unique to a single agent and workflow. If you find yourself copying the same instructions into multiple agents, that content should be a skill instead." },
+  { question: "Can permission groups disable skills for certain users?", answer: "Yes. Organization admins can create permission groups with the disableSkills option enabled. When a user is assigned to such a permission group, the skills dropdown in agent blocks will be disabled and they will not be able to add or use skills in their workflows." },
+  { question: "What is the recommended maximum length for skill content?", answer: "Keep skills focused and under 500 lines. If a skill grows too large, split it into multiple specialized skills. Shorter, focused skills are more effective because the agent can load exactly what it needs. A broad skill with too much content can overwhelm the agent and reduce the quality of its responses." },
+  { question: "Where do I create and manage skills?", answer: "Go to Settings and select Skills under the Tools section. From there you can add new skills with a name (kebab-case identifier, max 64 characters), description (max 1024 characters), and content (full instructions in markdown). You can also edit or delete existing skills from this page." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tables/index.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+---
+title: Tables
+description: Store, query, and manage structured data directly within your workspace
+---
+
+import { Callout } from 'fumadocs-ui/components/callout'
+import { Image } from '@/components/ui/image'
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq'
+
+Tables let you store and manage structured data directly in your workspace. Use them to maintain reference data, collect workflow outputs, or build lightweight databases — all without leaving Sim.
+
+<Image src="/static/tables/tables-overview.png" alt="Tables view showing structured data with typed columns for name, title, company, role, and more" width={800} height={500} />
+
+Each table has a schema of typed columns, supports filtering and sorting, and is fully accessible through the [Tables API](/docs/en/api-reference/(generated)/tables).
+
+## Creating a Table
+
+1. Open the **Tables** section from your workspace sidebar
+2. Click **New table**
+3. Name your table and start adding columns
+
+Tables start with a single text column. Add more columns by clicking **New column** in the column header area.
+
+## Column Types
+
+Each column has a type that determines how values are stored and validated.
+
+| Type | Description | Example Values |
+|------|-------------|----------------|
+| **Text** | Free-form string | `"Acme Corp"`, `"hello@example.com"` |
+| **Number** | Numeric value | `42`, `3.14`, `-100` |
+| **Boolean** | True or false | `true`, `false` |
+| **Date** | Date value | `2026-03-16` |
+| **JSON** | Structured object or array | `{"key": "value"}`, `[1, 2, 3]` |
+
+<Callout type="info">
+Column types are enforced on input. For example, typing into a Number column is restricted to digits, dots, and minus signs. Non-numeric values entered via paste are coerced to `0`.
+</Callout>
+
+## Working with Rows
+
+### Adding Rows
+
+- Click **New row** below the last row to append a new row
+- Press **Shift + Enter** while a cell is selected to insert a row below
+- Paste tabular data (from a spreadsheet or TSV) to bulk-create rows
+
+### Editing Cells
+
+Click a cell to select it, then press **Enter**, **F2**, or start typing to edit. Press **Escape** to cancel, or **Tab** to save and move to the next cell.
+
+### Selecting Rows
+
+Click a row's checkbox to select it. Selecting additional checkboxes adds to the selection without clearing previous selections.
+
+| Action | Behavior |
+|--------|----------|
+| Click checkbox | Toggle that row's selection |
+| Shift + click checkbox | Select range from last clicked to current |
+| Click header checkbox | Select all / deselect all |
+| Shift + Space | Toggle row selection from keyboard |
+
+### Deleting Rows
+
+Right-click a selected row (or group of selected rows) and choose **Delete row** from the context menu.
+
+## Filtering and Sorting
+
+Use the toolbar above the table to filter and sort your data.
+
+- **Filter**: Set conditions on any column (e.g., "Name contains Acme"). Multiple filters are combined with AND logic.
+- **Sort**: Order rows by any column, ascending or descending.
+
+Filters and sorts are applied in real time and do not modify the underlying data.
+
+## Keyboard Shortcuts
+
+All shortcuts work when the table is focused and no cell is being edited.
+
+<Callout type="info">
+**Mod** refers to `Cmd` on macOS and `Ctrl` on Windows/Linux.
+</Callout>
+
+### Navigation
+
+| Shortcut | Action |
+|----------|--------|
+| Arrow keys | Move one cell |
+| `Mod` + Arrow keys | Jump to edge of table |
+| `Tab` / `Shift` + `Tab` | Move to next / previous cell |
+| `Escape` | Clear selection |
+
+### Selection
+
+| Shortcut | Action |
+|----------|--------|
+| `Shift` + Arrow keys | Extend selection by one cell |
+| `Mod` + `Shift` + Arrow keys | Extend selection to edge |
+| `Mod` + `A` | Select all rows |
+| `Shift` + `Space` | Toggle current row selection |
+
+### Editing
+
+| Shortcut | Action |
+|----------|--------|
+| `Enter` or `F2` | Start editing selected cell |
+| `Escape` | Cancel editing |
+| Type any character | Start editing with that character |
+| `Shift` + `Enter` | Insert new row below |
+| `Space` | Expand row details |
+
+### Clipboard
+
+| Shortcut | Action |
+|----------|--------|
+| `Mod` + `C` | Copy selected cells |
+| `Mod` + `X` | Cut selected cells |
+| `Mod` + `V` | Paste |
+| `Delete` / `Backspace` | Clear selected cells (all columns when using checkbox selection) |
+
+### History
+
+| Shortcut | Action |
+|----------|--------|
+| `Mod` + `Z` | Undo |
+| `Mod` + `Shift` + `Z` | Redo |
+| `Mod` + `Y` | Redo (alternative) |
+
+## Using Tables in Workflows
+
+Tables can be read from and written to within your workflows using the **Table** block. Common patterns include:
+
+- **Lookup**: Query a table for reference data (e.g., pricing rules, customer metadata)
+- **Write-back**: Store workflow outputs in a table for later review or reporting
+- **Iteration**: Process each row in a table as part of a batch workflow
+
+## API Access
+
+Tables are fully accessible through the REST API. You can create, read, update, and delete both tables and rows programmatically.
+
+See the [Tables API Reference](/docs/en/api-reference/(generated)/tables) for endpoints, parameters, and examples.
+
+## Best Practices
+
+- **Use typed columns** to enforce data integrity — prefer Number and Boolean over storing everything as Text
+- **Name columns descriptively** so they are self-documenting when referenced in workflows
+- **Use JSON columns sparingly** — they are flexible but harder to filter and sort against
+- **Leverage the API** for bulk imports rather than manually entering large datasets
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "Is there a row limit per table?", answer: "Tables are designed for working datasets. For very large datasets (100k+ rows), consider paginating API reads or splitting data across multiple tables." },
+  { question: "Can I import data from a spreadsheet?", answer: "Yes. Copy rows from any spreadsheet application and paste them directly into the table. Column values will be validated against the column types." },
+  { question: "Do tables support formulas?", answer: "Tables store raw data and do not support computed formulas. Use workflow logic (Function block or Agent block) to derive computed values and write them back to the table." },
+  { question: "Can multiple workflows write to the same table?", answer: "Yes. Table writes are atomic at the row level, so multiple workflows can safely write to the same table concurrently." },
+  { question: "How do I reference a table from a workflow?", answer: "Use the Table block in your workflow. Select the target table from the dropdown, choose an operation (read, write, update), and configure the parameters." },
+  { question: "Are tables shared across workspace members?", answer: "Yes. Tables are workspace-scoped and accessible to all members with appropriate permissions." },
+  { question: "Can I undo changes?", answer: "In the table editor, Cmd/Ctrl+Z undoes recent cell edits, row insertions, and row deletions. API-driven changes are not covered by the editor's undo history." },
+]} />

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/airtable.mdx

@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Integrates Airtable into the workflow. Can list bases, list tables (with schema)
 
 ### `airtable_list_bases`
 
-List all Airtable bases the user has access to
+List all bases the authenticated user has access to
 
 #### Input
 
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ List all Airtable bases the user has access to
 
 | Parameter | Type | Description |
 | --------- | ---- | ----------- |
-| `bases` | array | List of Airtable bases |
+| `bases` | array | Array of Airtable bases with id, name, and permissionLevel |
 |   ↳ `id` | string | Base ID \(starts with "app"\) |
 |   ↳ `name` | string | Base name |
 |   ↳ `permissionLevel` | string | Permission level \(none, read, comment, edit, create\) |
@@ -204,4 +204,21 @@ Update multiple existing records in an Airtable table
 |   ↳ `recordCount` | number | Number of records updated |
 |   ↳ `updatedRecordIds` | array | List of updated record IDs |
 
+### `airtable_get_base_schema`
+
+Get the schema of all tables, fields, and views in an Airtable base
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `baseId` | string | Yes | Airtable base ID \(starts with "app", e.g., "appXXXXXXXXXXXXXX"\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `tables` | json | Array of table schemas with fields and views |
+| `metadata` | json | Operation metadata including total tables count |
+
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/ashby.mdx

@@ -30,12 +30,50 @@ In Sim, the Ashby integration enables your agents to programmatically manage you
 
 ## Usage Instructions
 
-Integrate Ashby into the workflow. Can list, search, create, and update candidates, list and get job details, create notes, list notes, list and get applications, create applications, and list offers.
+Integrate Ashby into the workflow. Manage candidates (list, get, create, update, search, tag), applications (list, get, create, change stage), jobs (list, get), job postings (list, get), offers (list, get), notes (list, create), interviews (list), and reference data (sources, tags, archive reasons, custom fields, departments, locations, openings, users).
 
 
 
 ## Tools
 
+### `ashby_add_candidate_tag`
+
+Adds a tag to a candidate in Ashby.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+| `candidateId` | string | Yes | The UUID of the candidate to add the tag to |
+| `tagId` | string | Yes | The UUID of the tag to add |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `success` | boolean | Whether the tag was successfully added |
+
+### `ashby_change_application_stage`
+
+Moves an application to a different interview stage. Requires an archive reason when moving to an Archived stage.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+| `applicationId` | string | Yes | The UUID of the application to update the stage of |
+| `interviewStageId` | string | Yes | The UUID of the interview stage to move the application to |
+| `archiveReasonId` | string | No | Archive reason UUID. Required when moving to an Archived stage, ignored otherwise |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `applicationId` | string | Application UUID |
+| `stageId` | string | New interview stage UUID |
+
 ### `ashby_create_application`
 
 Creates a new application for a candidate on a job. Optionally specify interview plan, stage, source, and credited user.
@@ -57,23 +95,7 @@ Creates a new application for a candidate on a job. Optionally specify interview
 
 | Parameter | Type | Description |
 | --------- | ---- | ----------- |
-| `id` | string | Created application UUID |
-| `status` | string | Application status \(Active, Hired, Archived, Lead\) |
-| `candidate` | object | Associated candidate |
-|   ↳ `id` | string | Candidate UUID |
-|   ↳ `name` | string | Candidate name |
-| `job` | object | Associated job |
-|   ↳ `id` | string | Job UUID |
-|   ↳ `title` | string | Job title |
-| `currentInterviewStage` | object | Current interview stage |
-|   ↳ `id` | string | Stage UUID |
-|   ↳ `title` | string | Stage title |
-|   ↳ `type` | string | Stage type |
-| `source` | object | Application source |
-|   ↳ `id` | string | Source UUID |
-|   ↳ `title` | string | Source title |
-| `createdAt` | string | ISO 8601 creation timestamp |
-| `updatedAt` | string | ISO 8601 last update timestamp |
+| `applicationId` | string | Created application UUID |
 
 ### `ashby_create_candidate`
 
@@ -85,10 +107,8 @@ Creates a new candidate record in Ashby.
 | --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
 | `name` | string | Yes | The candidate full name |
-| `email` | string | No | Primary email address for the candidate |
-| `emailType` | string | No | Email address type: Personal, Work, or Other \(default Work\) |
+| `email` | string | Yes | Primary email address for the candidate |
 | `phoneNumber` | string | No | Primary phone number for the candidate |
-| `phoneType` | string | No | Phone number type: Personal, Work, or Other \(default Work\) |
 | `linkedInUrl` | string | No | LinkedIn profile URL |
 | `githubUrl` | string | No | GitHub profile URL |
 | `sourceId` | string | No | UUID of the source to attribute the candidate to |
@@ -127,14 +147,7 @@ Creates a note on a candidate in Ashby. Supports plain text and HTML content (bo
 
 | Parameter | Type | Description |
 | --------- | ---- | ----------- |
-| `id` | string | Created note UUID |
-| `content` | string | Note content as stored |
-| `author` | object | Note author |
-|   ↳ `id` | string | Author user UUID |
-|   ↳ `firstName` | string | First name |
-|   ↳ `lastName` | string | Last name |
-|   ↳ `email` | string | Email address |
-| `createdAt` | string | ISO 8601 creation timestamp |
+| `noteId` | string | Created note UUID |
 
 ### `ashby_get_application`
 
@@ -228,7 +241,7 @@ Retrieves full details about a single job by its ID.
 | --------- | ---- | ----------- |
 | `id` | string | Job UUID |
 | `title` | string | Job title |
-| `status` | string | Job status \(Open, Closed, Draft, Archived, On Hold\) |
+| `status` | string | Job status \(Open, Closed, Draft, Archived\) |
 | `employmentType` | string | Employment type \(FullTime, PartTime, Intern, Contract, Temporary\) |
 | `departmentId` | string | Department UUID |
 | `locationId` | string | Location UUID |
@@ -237,6 +250,58 @@ Retrieves full details about a single job by its ID.
 | `createdAt` | string | ISO 8601 creation timestamp |
 | `updatedAt` | string | ISO 8601 last update timestamp |
 
+### `ashby_get_job_posting`
+
+Retrieves full details about a single job posting by its ID.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+| `jobPostingId` | string | Yes | The UUID of the job posting to fetch |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Job posting UUID |
+| `title` | string | Job posting title |
+| `jobId` | string | Associated job UUID |
+| `locationName` | string | Location name |
+| `departmentName` | string | Department name |
+| `employmentType` | string | Employment type \(e.g. FullTime, PartTime, Contract\) |
+| `descriptionPlain` | string | Job posting description in plain text |
+| `isListed` | boolean | Whether the posting is publicly listed |
+| `publishedDate` | string | ISO 8601 published date |
+| `externalLink` | string | External link to the job posting |
+
+### `ashby_get_offer`
+
+Retrieves full details about a single offer by its ID.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+| `offerId` | string | Yes | The UUID of the offer to fetch |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Offer UUID |
+| `offerStatus` | string | Offer status \(e.g. WaitingOnCandidateResponse, CandidateAccepted\) |
+| `acceptanceStatus` | string | Acceptance status \(e.g. Accepted, Declined, Pending\) |
+| `applicationId` | string | Associated application UUID |
+| `startDate` | string | Offer start date |
+| `salary` | object | Salary details |
+|   ↳ `currencyCode` | string | ISO 4217 currency code |
+|   ↳ `value` | number | Salary amount |
+| `openingId` | string | Associated opening UUID |
+| `createdAt` | string | ISO 8601 creation timestamp \(from latest version\) |
+
 ### `ashby_list_applications`
 
 Lists all applications in an Ashby organization with pagination and optional filters for status, job, candidate, and creation date.
@@ -278,6 +343,45 @@ Lists all applications in an Ashby organization with pagination and optional fil
 | `moreDataAvailable` | boolean | Whether more pages of results exist |
 | `nextCursor` | string | Opaque cursor for fetching the next page |
 
+### `ashby_list_archive_reasons`
+
+Lists all archive reasons configured in Ashby.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `archiveReasons` | array | List of archive reasons |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Archive reason UUID |
+|   ↳ `text` | string | Archive reason text |
+|   ↳ `reasonType` | string | Reason type |
+|   ↳ `isArchived` | boolean | Whether the reason is archived |
+
+### `ashby_list_candidate_tags`
+
+Lists all candidate tags configured in Ashby.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `tags` | array | List of candidate tags |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Tag UUID |
+|   ↳ `title` | string | Tag title |
+|   ↳ `isArchived` | boolean | Whether the tag is archived |
+
 ### `ashby_list_candidates`
 
 Lists all candidates in an Ashby organization with cursor-based pagination.
@@ -310,6 +414,98 @@ Lists all candidates in an Ashby organization with cursor-based pagination.
 | `moreDataAvailable` | boolean | Whether more pages of results exist |
 | `nextCursor` | string | Opaque cursor for fetching the next page |
 
+### `ashby_list_custom_fields`
+
+Lists all custom field definitions configured in Ashby.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `customFields` | array | List of custom field definitions |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Custom field UUID |
+|   ↳ `title` | string | Custom field title |
+|   ↳ `fieldType` | string | Field type \(e.g. String, Number, Boolean\) |
+|   ↳ `objectType` | string | Object type the field applies to \(e.g. Candidate, Application, Job\) |
+|   ↳ `isArchived` | boolean | Whether the custom field is archived |
+
+### `ashby_list_departments`
+
+Lists all departments in Ashby.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `departments` | array | List of departments |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Department UUID |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Department name |
+|   ↳ `isArchived` | boolean | Whether the department is archived |
+|   ↳ `parentId` | string | Parent department UUID |
+
+### `ashby_list_interviews`
+
+Lists interview schedules in Ashby, optionally filtered by application or interview stage.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+| `applicationId` | string | No | The UUID of the application to list interview schedules for |
+| `interviewStageId` | string | No | The UUID of the interview stage to list interview schedules for |
+| `cursor` | string | No | Opaque pagination cursor from a previous response nextCursor value |
+| `perPage` | number | No | Number of results per page \(default 100\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `interviewSchedules` | array | List of interview schedules |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Interview schedule UUID |
+|   ↳ `applicationId` | string | Associated application UUID |
+|   ↳ `interviewStageId` | string | Interview stage UUID |
+|   ↳ `status` | string | Schedule status |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | ISO 8601 creation timestamp |
+| `moreDataAvailable` | boolean | Whether more pages of results exist |
+| `nextCursor` | string | Opaque cursor for fetching the next page |
+
+### `ashby_list_job_postings`
+
+Lists all job postings in Ashby.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `jobPostings` | array | List of job postings |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Job posting UUID |
+|   ↳ `title` | string | Job posting title |
+|   ↳ `jobId` | string | Associated job UUID |
+|   ↳ `locationName` | string | Location name |
+|   ↳ `departmentName` | string | Department name |
+|   ↳ `employmentType` | string | Employment type \(e.g. FullTime, PartTime, Contract\) |
+|   ↳ `isListed` | boolean | Whether the posting is publicly listed |
+|   ↳ `publishedDate` | string | ISO 8601 published date |
+
 ### `ashby_list_jobs`
 
 Lists all jobs in an Ashby organization. By default returns Open, Closed, and Archived jobs. Specify status to filter.
@@ -339,6 +535,30 @@ Lists all jobs in an Ashby organization. By default returns Open, Closed, and Ar
 | `moreDataAvailable` | boolean | Whether more pages of results exist |
 | `nextCursor` | string | Opaque cursor for fetching the next page |
 
+### `ashby_list_locations`
+
+Lists all locations configured in Ashby.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `locations` | array | List of locations |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Location UUID |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Location name |
+|   ↳ `isArchived` | boolean | Whether the location is archived |
+|   ↳ `isRemote` | boolean | Whether this is a remote location |
+|   ↳ `address` | object | Location address |
+|     ↳ `city` | string | City |
+|     ↳ `region` | string | State or region |
+|     ↳ `country` | string | Country |
+
 ### `ashby_list_notes`
 
 Lists all notes on a candidate with pagination support.
@@ -386,18 +606,106 @@ Lists all offers with their latest version in an Ashby organization.
 | --------- | ---- | ----------- |
 | `offers` | array | List of offers |
 |   ↳ `id` | string | Offer UUID |
-|   ↳ `status` | string | Offer status |
-|   ↳ `candidate` | object | Associated candidate |
-|     ↳ `id` | string | Candidate UUID |
-|     ↳ `name` | string | Candidate name |
-|   ↳ `job` | object | Associated job |
-|     ↳ `id` | string | Job UUID |
-|     ↳ `title` | string | Job title |
+|   ↳ `offerStatus` | string | Offer status |
+|   ↳ `acceptanceStatus` | string | Acceptance status |
+|   ↳ `applicationId` | string | Associated application UUID |
+|   ↳ `startDate` | string | Offer start date |
+|   ↳ `salary` | object | Salary details |
+|     ↳ `currencyCode` | string | ISO 4217 currency code |
+|     ↳ `value` | number | Salary amount |
+|   ↳ `openingId` | string | Associated opening UUID |
 |   ↳ `createdAt` | string | ISO 8601 creation timestamp |
-|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | ISO 8601 last update timestamp |
 | `moreDataAvailable` | boolean | Whether more pages of results exist |
 | `nextCursor` | string | Opaque cursor for fetching the next page |
 
+### `ashby_list_openings`
+
+Lists all openings in Ashby with pagination.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+| `cursor` | string | No | Opaque pagination cursor from a previous response nextCursor value |
+| `perPage` | number | No | Number of results per page \(default 100\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `openings` | array | List of openings |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Opening UUID |
+|   ↳ `openingState` | string | Opening state \(Approved, Closed, Draft, Filled, Open\) |
+|   ↳ `isArchived` | boolean | Whether the opening is archived |
+|   ↳ `openedAt` | string | ISO 8601 opened timestamp |
+|   ↳ `closedAt` | string | ISO 8601 closed timestamp |
+| `moreDataAvailable` | boolean | Whether more pages of results exist |
+| `nextCursor` | string | Opaque cursor for fetching the next page |
+
+### `ashby_list_sources`
+
+Lists all candidate sources configured in Ashby.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `sources` | array | List of sources |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Source UUID |
+|   ↳ `title` | string | Source title |
+|   ↳ `isArchived` | boolean | Whether the source is archived |
+
+### `ashby_list_users`
+
+Lists all users in Ashby with pagination.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+| `cursor` | string | No | Opaque pagination cursor from a previous response nextCursor value |
+| `perPage` | number | No | Number of results per page \(default 100\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `users` | array | List of users |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | User UUID |
+|   ↳ `firstName` | string | First name |
+|   ↳ `lastName` | string | Last name |
+|   ↳ `email` | string | Email address |
+|   ↳ `isEnabled` | boolean | Whether the user account is enabled |
+|   ↳ `globalRole` | string | User role \(Organization Admin, Elevated Access, Limited Access, External Recruiter\) |
+| `moreDataAvailable` | boolean | Whether more pages of results exist |
+| `nextCursor` | string | Opaque cursor for fetching the next page |
+
+### `ashby_remove_candidate_tag`
+
+Removes a tag from a candidate in Ashby.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Ashby API Key |
+| `candidateId` | string | Yes | The UUID of the candidate to remove the tag from |
+| `tagId` | string | Yes | The UUID of the tag to remove |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `success` | boolean | Whether the tag was successfully removed |
+
 ### `ashby_search_candidates`
 
 Searches for candidates by name and/or email with AND logic. Results are limited to 100 matches. Use candidate.list for full pagination.
@@ -425,6 +733,8 @@ Searches for candidates by name and/or email with AND logic. Results are limited
 |     ↳ `value` | string | Phone number |
 |     ↳ `type` | string | Contact type \(Personal, Work, Other\) |
 |     ↳ `isPrimary` | boolean | Whether this is the primary phone |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | ISO 8601 creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | ISO 8601 last update timestamp |
 
 ### `ashby_update_candidate`
 
@@ -438,9 +748,7 @@ Updates an existing candidate record in Ashby. Only provided fields are changed.
 | `candidateId` | string | Yes | The UUID of the candidate to update |
 | `name` | string | No | Updated full name |
 | `email` | string | No | Updated primary email address |
-| `emailType` | string | No | Email address type: Personal, Work, or Other \(default Work\) |
 | `phoneNumber` | string | No | Updated primary phone number |
-| `phoneType` | string | No | Phone number type: Personal, Work, or Other \(default Work\) |
 | `linkedInUrl` | string | No | LinkedIn profile URL |
 | `githubUrl` | string | No | GitHub profile URL |
 | `websiteUrl` | string | No | Personal website URL |

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/box.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,440 @@
+---
+title: Box
+description: Manage files, folders, and e-signatures with Box
+---
+
+import { BlockInfoCard } from "@/components/ui/block-info-card"
+
+<BlockInfoCard 
+  type="box"
+  color="#FFFFFF"
+/>
+
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-START:intro */}
+[Box](https://www.box.com/) is a leading cloud content management and file sharing platform trusted by enterprises worldwide to securely store, manage, and collaborate on files. Box provides robust APIs for automating file operations and integrating with business workflows, including [Box Sign](https://www.box.com/esignature) for native e-signatures.
+
+With the Box integration in Sim, you can:
+
+- **Upload files**: Upload documents, images, and other files to any Box folder
+- **Download files**: Retrieve file content from Box for processing in your workflows
+- **Get file info**: Access detailed metadata including size, owner, timestamps, tags, and shared links
+- **List folder contents**: Browse files and folders with sorting and pagination support
+- **Create folders**: Organize your Box storage by creating new folders programmatically
+- **Delete files and folders**: Remove content with optional recursive deletion for folders
+- **Copy files**: Duplicate files across folders with optional renaming
+- **Search**: Find files and folders by name, content, extension, or location
+- **Update file metadata**: Rename, move, add descriptions, or tag files
+- **Create sign requests**: Send documents for e-signature with one or more signers
+- **Track signing status**: Monitor the progress of sign requests
+- **List sign requests**: View all sign requests with marker-based pagination
+- **Cancel sign requests**: Cancel pending sign requests that are no longer needed
+- **Resend sign reminders**: Send reminder notifications to signers who haven't completed signing
+
+These capabilities allow your Sim agents to automate Box operations directly within your workflows — from organizing documents and distributing content to processing uploaded files, managing e-signature workflows for offer letters and contracts, and maintaining structured cloud storage as part of your business processes.
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-END */}
+
+
+## Usage Instructions
+
+Integrate Box into your workflow to manage files, folders, and e-signatures. Upload and download files, search content, create folders, send documents for e-signature, track signing status, and more.
+
+
+
+## Tools
+
+### `box_upload_file`
+
+Upload a file to a Box folder
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `parentFolderId` | string | Yes | The ID of the folder to upload the file to \(use "0" for root\) |
+| `file` | file | No | The file to upload \(UserFile object\) |
+| `fileContent` | string | No | Legacy: base64 encoded file content |
+| `fileName` | string | No | Optional filename override |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | File ID |
+| `name` | string | File name |
+| `size` | number | File size in bytes |
+| `sha1` | string | SHA1 hash of file content |
+| `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `modifiedAt` | string | Last modified timestamp |
+| `parentId` | string | Parent folder ID |
+| `parentName` | string | Parent folder name |
+
+### `box_download_file`
+
+Download a file from Box
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `fileId` | string | Yes | The ID of the file to download |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `file` | file | Downloaded file stored in execution files |
+| `content` | string | Base64 encoded file content |
+
+### `box_get_file_info`
+
+Get detailed information about a file in Box
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `fileId` | string | Yes | The ID of the file to get information about |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | File ID |
+| `name` | string | File name |
+| `description` | string | File description |
+| `size` | number | File size in bytes |
+| `sha1` | string | SHA1 hash of file content |
+| `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `modifiedAt` | string | Last modified timestamp |
+| `createdBy` | object | User who created the file |
+| `modifiedBy` | object | User who last modified the file |
+| `ownedBy` | object | User who owns the file |
+| `parentId` | string | Parent folder ID |
+| `parentName` | string | Parent folder name |
+| `sharedLink` | json | Shared link details |
+| `tags` | array | File tags |
+| `commentCount` | number | Number of comments |
+
+### `box_list_folder_items`
+
+List files and folders in a Box folder
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `folderId` | string | Yes | The ID of the folder to list items from \(use "0" for root\) |
+| `limit` | number | No | Maximum number of items to return per page |
+| `offset` | number | No | The offset for pagination |
+| `sort` | string | No | Sort field: id, name, date, or size |
+| `direction` | string | No | Sort direction: ASC or DESC |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `entries` | array | List of items in the folder |
+|   ↳ `type` | string | Item type \(file, folder, web_link\) |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Item ID |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Item name |
+|   ↳ `size` | number | Item size in bytes |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `modifiedAt` | string | Last modified timestamp |
+| `totalCount` | number | Total number of items in the folder |
+| `offset` | number | Current pagination offset |
+| `limit` | number | Current pagination limit |
+
+### `box_create_folder`
+
+Create a new folder in Box
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `name` | string | Yes | Name for the new folder |
+| `parentFolderId` | string | Yes | The ID of the parent folder \(use "0" for root\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Folder ID |
+| `name` | string | Folder name |
+| `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `modifiedAt` | string | Last modified timestamp |
+| `parentId` | string | Parent folder ID |
+| `parentName` | string | Parent folder name |
+
+### `box_delete_file`
+
+Delete a file from Box
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `fileId` | string | Yes | The ID of the file to delete |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `deleted` | boolean | Whether the file was successfully deleted |
+| `message` | string | Success confirmation message |
+
+### `box_delete_folder`
+
+Delete a folder from Box
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `folderId` | string | Yes | The ID of the folder to delete |
+| `recursive` | boolean | No | Delete folder and all its contents recursively |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `deleted` | boolean | Whether the folder was successfully deleted |
+| `message` | string | Success confirmation message |
+
+### `box_copy_file`
+
+Copy a file to another folder in Box
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `fileId` | string | Yes | The ID of the file to copy |
+| `parentFolderId` | string | Yes | The ID of the destination folder |
+| `name` | string | No | Optional new name for the copied file |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | File ID |
+| `name` | string | File name |
+| `size` | number | File size in bytes |
+| `sha1` | string | SHA1 hash of file content |
+| `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `modifiedAt` | string | Last modified timestamp |
+| `parentId` | string | Parent folder ID |
+| `parentName` | string | Parent folder name |
+
+### `box_search`
+
+Search for files and folders in Box
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `query` | string | Yes | The search query string |
+| `limit` | number | No | Maximum number of results to return |
+| `offset` | number | No | The offset for pagination |
+| `ancestorFolderId` | string | No | Restrict search to a specific folder and its subfolders |
+| `fileExtensions` | string | No | Comma-separated file extensions to filter by \(e.g., pdf,docx\) |
+| `type` | string | No | Restrict to a specific content type: file, folder, or web_link |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `results` | array | Search results |
+|   ↳ `type` | string | Item type \(file, folder, web_link\) |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Item ID |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Item name |
+|   ↳ `size` | number | Item size in bytes |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `modifiedAt` | string | Last modified timestamp |
+|   ↳ `parentId` | string | Parent folder ID |
+|   ↳ `parentName` | string | Parent folder name |
+| `totalCount` | number | Total number of matching results |
+
+### `box_update_file`
+
+Update file info in Box (rename, move, change description, add tags)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `fileId` | string | Yes | The ID of the file to update |
+| `name` | string | No | New name for the file |
+| `description` | string | No | New description for the file \(max 256 characters\) |
+| `parentFolderId` | string | No | Move the file to a different folder by specifying the folder ID |
+| `tags` | string | No | Comma-separated tags to set on the file |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | File ID |
+| `name` | string | File name |
+| `description` | string | File description |
+| `size` | number | File size in bytes |
+| `sha1` | string | SHA1 hash of file content |
+| `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `modifiedAt` | string | Last modified timestamp |
+| `createdBy` | object | User who created the file |
+| `modifiedBy` | object | User who last modified the file |
+| `ownedBy` | object | User who owns the file |
+| `parentId` | string | Parent folder ID |
+| `parentName` | string | Parent folder name |
+| `sharedLink` | json | Shared link details |
+| `tags` | array | File tags |
+| `commentCount` | number | Number of comments |
+
+### `box_sign_create_request`
+
+Create a new Box Sign request to send documents for e-signature
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `sourceFileIds` | string | Yes | Comma-separated Box file IDs to send for signing |
+| `signerEmail` | string | Yes | Primary signer email address |
+| `signerRole` | string | No | Primary signer role: signer, approver, or final_copy_reader \(default: signer\) |
+| `additionalSigners` | string | No | JSON array of additional signers, e.g. \[\{"email":"user@example.com","role":"signer"\}\] |
+| `parentFolderId` | string | No | Box folder ID where signed documents will be stored \(default: user root\) |
+| `emailSubject` | string | No | Custom subject line for the signing email |
+| `emailMessage` | string | No | Custom message in the signing email body |
+| `name` | string | No | Name for the sign request |
+| `daysValid` | number | No | Number of days before the request expires \(0-730\) |
+| `areRemindersEnabled` | boolean | No | Whether to send automatic signing reminders |
+| `areTextSignaturesEnabled` | boolean | No | Whether to allow typed \(text\) signatures |
+| `signatureColor` | string | No | Signature color: blue, black, or red |
+| `redirectUrl` | string | No | URL to redirect signers to after signing |
+| `declinedRedirectUrl` | string | No | URL to redirect signers to after declining |
+| `isDocumentPreparationNeeded` | boolean | No | Whether document preparation is needed before sending |
+| `externalId` | string | No | External system reference ID |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Sign request ID |
+| `status` | string | Request status \(converting, created, sent, viewed, signed, cancelled, declined, expired, error_converting, error_sending, finalizing, error_finalizing\) |
+| `name` | string | Sign request name |
+| `shortId` | string | Human-readable short ID |
+| `signers` | array | List of signers |
+| `sourceFiles` | array | Source files for signing |
+| `emailSubject` | string | Custom email subject line |
+| `emailMessage` | string | Custom email message body |
+| `daysValid` | number | Number of days the request is valid |
+| `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `autoExpireAt` | string | Auto-expiration timestamp |
+| `prepareUrl` | string | URL for document preparation \(if preparation is needed\) |
+| `senderEmail` | string | Email of the sender |
+
+### `box_sign_get_request`
+
+Get the details and status of a Box Sign request
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `signRequestId` | string | Yes | The ID of the sign request to retrieve |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Sign request ID |
+| `status` | string | Request status \(converting, created, sent, viewed, signed, cancelled, declined, expired, error_converting, error_sending, finalizing, error_finalizing\) |
+| `name` | string | Sign request name |
+| `shortId` | string | Human-readable short ID |
+| `signers` | array | List of signers |
+| `sourceFiles` | array | Source files for signing |
+| `emailSubject` | string | Custom email subject line |
+| `emailMessage` | string | Custom email message body |
+| `daysValid` | number | Number of days the request is valid |
+| `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `autoExpireAt` | string | Auto-expiration timestamp |
+| `prepareUrl` | string | URL for document preparation \(if preparation is needed\) |
+| `senderEmail` | string | Email of the sender |
+
+### `box_sign_list_requests`
+
+List all Box Sign requests
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `limit` | number | No | Maximum number of sign requests to return \(max 1000\) |
+| `marker` | string | No | Pagination marker from a previous response |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `signRequests` | array | List of sign requests |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Sign request ID |
+|   ↳ `status` | string | Request status \(converting, created, sent, viewed, signed, cancelled, declined, expired, error_converting, error_sending, finalizing, error_finalizing\) |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Sign request name |
+|   ↳ `shortId` | string | Human-readable short ID |
+|   ↳ `signers` | array | List of signers |
+|   ↳ `sourceFiles` | array | Source files for signing |
+|   ↳ `emailSubject` | string | Custom email subject line |
+|   ↳ `emailMessage` | string | Custom email message body |
+|   ↳ `daysValid` | number | Number of days the request is valid |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `autoExpireAt` | string | Auto-expiration timestamp |
+|   ↳ `prepareUrl` | string | URL for document preparation \(if preparation is needed\) |
+|   ↳ `senderEmail` | string | Email of the sender |
+| `count` | number | Number of sign requests returned in this page |
+| `nextMarker` | string | Marker for next page of results |
+
+### `box_sign_cancel_request`
+
+Cancel a pending Box Sign request
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `signRequestId` | string | Yes | The ID of the sign request to cancel |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Sign request ID |
+| `status` | string | Request status \(converting, created, sent, viewed, signed, cancelled, declined, expired, error_converting, error_sending, finalizing, error_finalizing\) |
+| `name` | string | Sign request name |
+| `shortId` | string | Human-readable short ID |
+| `signers` | array | List of signers |
+| `sourceFiles` | array | Source files for signing |
+| `emailSubject` | string | Custom email subject line |
+| `emailMessage` | string | Custom email message body |
+| `daysValid` | number | Number of days the request is valid |
+| `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `autoExpireAt` | string | Auto-expiration timestamp |
+| `prepareUrl` | string | URL for document preparation \(if preparation is needed\) |
+| `senderEmail` | string | Email of the sender |
+
+### `box_sign_resend_request`
+
+Resend a Box Sign request to signers who have not yet signed
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `signRequestId` | string | Yes | The ID of the sign request to resend |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `message` | string | Success confirmation message |
+
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/docusign.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+---
+title: DocuSign
+description: Send documents for e-signature via DocuSign
+---
+
+import { BlockInfoCard } from "@/components/ui/block-info-card"
+
+<BlockInfoCard 
+  type="docusign"
+  color="#FFFFFF"
+/>
+
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-START:intro */}
+[DocuSign](https://www.docusign.com) is the world's leading e-signature platform, enabling businesses to send, sign, and manage agreements digitally. With its powerful eSignature REST API, DocuSign supports the full document lifecycle from creation through completion.
+
+With the DocuSign integration in Sim, you can:
+
+- **Send envelopes**: Create and send documents for e-signature with custom recipients and signing tabs
+- **Use templates**: Send envelopes from pre-configured DocuSign templates with role assignments
+- **Track status**: Get envelope details including signing progress, timestamps, and recipient status
+- **List envelopes**: Search and filter envelopes by date range, status, and text
+- **Download documents**: Retrieve signed documents as base64-encoded files
+- **Manage recipients**: View signer and CC recipient details and signing status
+- **Void envelopes**: Cancel in-progress envelopes with a reason
+
+In Sim, the DocuSign integration enables your agents to automate document workflows end-to-end. Agents can generate agreements, send them for signature, monitor completion, and retrieve signed copies—powering contract management, HR onboarding, sales closings, and compliance processes.
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-END */}
+
+
+## Usage Instructions
+
+Create and send envelopes for e-signature, use templates, check signing status, download signed documents, and manage recipients with DocuSign.
+
+
+
+## Tools
+
+### `docusign_send_envelope`
+
+Create and send a DocuSign envelope with a document for e-signature
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `emailSubject` | string | Yes | Email subject for the envelope |
+| `emailBody` | string | No | Email body message |
+| `signerEmail` | string | Yes | Email address of the signer |
+| `signerName` | string | Yes | Full name of the signer |
+| `ccEmail` | string | No | Email address of carbon copy recipient |
+| `ccName` | string | No | Full name of carbon copy recipient |
+| `file` | file | No | Document file to send for signature |
+| `status` | string | No | Envelope status: "sent" to send immediately, "created" for draft \(default: "sent"\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `envelopeId` | string | Created envelope ID |
+| `status` | string | Envelope status |
+| `statusDateTime` | string | Status change datetime |
+| `uri` | string | Envelope URI |
+
+### `docusign_create_from_template`
+
+Create and send a DocuSign envelope using a pre-built template
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `templateId` | string | Yes | DocuSign template ID to use |
+| `emailSubject` | string | No | Override email subject \(uses template default if not set\) |
+| `emailBody` | string | No | Override email body message |
+| `templateRoles` | string | Yes | JSON array of template roles, e.g. \[\{"roleName":"Signer","name":"John","email":"john@example.com"\}\] |
+| `status` | string | No | Envelope status: "sent" to send immediately, "created" for draft \(default: "sent"\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `envelopeId` | string | Created envelope ID |
+| `status` | string | Envelope status |
+| `statusDateTime` | string | Status change datetime |
+| `uri` | string | Envelope URI |
+
+### `docusign_get_envelope`
+
+Get the details and status of a DocuSign envelope
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `envelopeId` | string | Yes | The envelope ID to retrieve |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `envelopeId` | string | Envelope ID |
+| `status` | string | Envelope status \(created, sent, delivered, completed, declined, voided\) |
+| `emailSubject` | string | Email subject line |
+| `sentDateTime` | string | When the envelope was sent |
+| `completedDateTime` | string | When all recipients completed signing |
+| `createdDateTime` | string | When the envelope was created |
+| `statusChangedDateTime` | string | When the status last changed |
+| `voidedReason` | string | Reason the envelope was voided |
+| `signerCount` | number | Number of signers |
+| `documentCount` | number | Number of documents |
+
+### `docusign_list_envelopes`
+
+List envelopes from your DocuSign account with optional filters
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `fromDate` | string | No | Start date filter \(ISO 8601\). Defaults to 30 days ago |
+| `toDate` | string | No | End date filter \(ISO 8601\) |
+| `envelopeStatus` | string | No | Filter by status: created, sent, delivered, completed, declined, voided |
+| `searchText` | string | No | Search text to filter envelopes |
+| `count` | string | No | Maximum number of envelopes to return \(default: 25\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `envelopes` | array | Array of DocuSign envelopes |
+|   ↳ `envelopeId` | string | Unique envelope identifier |
+|   ↳ `status` | string | Envelope status \(created, sent, delivered, completed, declined, voided\) |
+|   ↳ `emailSubject` | string | Email subject line |
+|   ↳ `sentDateTime` | string | ISO 8601 datetime when envelope was sent |
+|   ↳ `completedDateTime` | string | ISO 8601 datetime when envelope was completed |
+|   ↳ `createdDateTime` | string | ISO 8601 datetime when envelope was created |
+|   ↳ `statusChangedDateTime` | string | ISO 8601 datetime of last status change |
+| `totalSetSize` | number | Total number of matching envelopes |
+| `resultSetSize` | number | Number of envelopes returned in this response |
+
+### `docusign_void_envelope`
+
+Void (cancel) a sent DocuSign envelope that has not yet been completed
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `envelopeId` | string | Yes | The envelope ID to void |
+| `voidedReason` | string | Yes | Reason for voiding the envelope |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `envelopeId` | string | Voided envelope ID |
+| `status` | string | Envelope status \(voided\) |
+
+### `docusign_download_document`
+
+Download a signed document from a completed DocuSign envelope
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `envelopeId` | string | Yes | The envelope ID containing the document |
+| `documentId` | string | No | Specific document ID to download, or "combined" for all documents merged \(default: "combined"\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `base64Content` | string | Base64-encoded document content |
+| `mimeType` | string | MIME type of the document |
+| `fileName` | string | Original file name |
+
+### `docusign_list_templates`
+
+List available templates in your DocuSign account
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `searchText` | string | No | Search text to filter templates by name |
+| `count` | string | No | Maximum number of templates to return |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `templates` | array | Array of DocuSign templates |
+|   ↳ `templateId` | string | Template identifier |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Template name |
+|   ↳ `description` | string | Template description |
+|   ↳ `shared` | boolean | Whether template is shared |
+|   ↳ `created` | string | ISO 8601 creation date |
+|   ↳ `lastModified` | string | ISO 8601 last modified date |
+| `totalSetSize` | number | Total number of matching templates |
+| `resultSetSize` | number | Number of templates returned in this response |
+
+### `docusign_list_recipients`
+
+Get the recipient status details for a DocuSign envelope
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `envelopeId` | string | Yes | The envelope ID to get recipients for |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `signers` | array | Array of DocuSign recipients |
+|   ↳ `recipientId` | string | Recipient identifier |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Recipient name |
+|   ↳ `email` | string | Recipient email address |
+|   ↳ `status` | string | Recipient signing status \(sent, delivered, completed, declined\) |
+|   ↳ `signedDateTime` | string | ISO 8601 datetime when recipient signed |
+|   ↳ `deliveredDateTime` | string | ISO 8601 datetime when delivered to recipient |
+| `carbonCopies` | array | Array of carbon copy recipients |
+|   ↳ `recipientId` | string | Recipient ID |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Recipient name |
+|   ↳ `email` | string | Recipient email |
+|   ↳ `status` | string | Recipient status |
+
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/exa.mdx

@@ -55,6 +55,9 @@ Search the web using Exa AI. Returns relevant search results with titles, URLs,
 | `summary` | boolean | No | Include AI-generated summaries in results \(default: false\) |
 | `livecrawl` | string | No | Live crawling mode: never \(default\), fallback, always, or preferred \(always try livecrawl, fall back to cache if fails\) |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Exa AI API Key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -87,6 +90,9 @@ Retrieve the contents of webpages using Exa AI. Returns the title, text content,
 | `highlights` | boolean | No | Include highlighted snippets in results \(default: false\) |
 | `livecrawl` | string | No | Live crawling mode: never \(default\), fallback, always, or preferred \(always try livecrawl, fall back to cache if fails\) |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Exa AI API Key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -116,6 +122,9 @@ Find webpages similar to a given URL using Exa AI. Returns a list of similar lin
 | `summary` | boolean | No | Include AI-generated summaries in results \(default: false\) |
 | `livecrawl` | string | No | Live crawling mode: never \(default\), fallback, always, or preferred \(always try livecrawl, fall back to cache if fails\) |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Exa AI API Key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -138,6 +147,9 @@ Get an AI-generated answer to a question with citations from the web using Exa A
 | `query` | string | Yes | The question to answer |
 | `text` | boolean | No | Whether to include the full text of the answer |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Exa AI API Key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/firecrawl.mdx

@@ -53,6 +53,9 @@ Extract structured content from web pages with comprehensive metadata support. C
 | `url` | string | Yes | The URL to scrape content from \(e.g., "https://example.com/page"\) |
 | `scrapeOptions` | json | No | Options for content scraping |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Firecrawl API key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -86,6 +89,9 @@ Search for information on the web using Firecrawl
 | --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
 | `query` | string | Yes | The search query to use |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Firecrawl API key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -123,6 +129,9 @@ Crawl entire websites and extract structured content from all accessible pages
 | `includePaths` | json | No | URL paths to include in crawling \(e.g., \["/docs/*", "/api/*"\]\). Only these paths will be crawled |
 | `onlyMainContent` | boolean | No | Extract only main content from pages |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Firecrawl API Key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -142,7 +151,6 @@ Crawl entire websites and extract structured content from all accessible pages
 |     ↳ `statusCode` | number | HTTP status code |
 |     ↳ `ogLocaleAlternate` | array | Alternate locale versions |
 | `total` | number | Total number of pages found during crawl |
-| `creditsUsed` | number | Number of credits consumed by the crawl operation |
 
 ### `firecrawl_map`
 
@@ -161,6 +169,9 @@ Get a complete list of URLs from any website quickly and reliably. Useful for di
 | `timeout` | number | No | Request timeout in milliseconds |
 | `location` | json | No | Geographic context for proxying \(country, languages\) |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Firecrawl API key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -187,6 +198,9 @@ Extract structured data from entire webpages using natural language prompts and
 | `ignoreInvalidURLs` | boolean | No | Skip invalid URLs in the array \(default: true\) |
 | `scrapeOptions` | json | No | Advanced scraping configuration options |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Firecrawl API key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -217,7 +231,6 @@ Autonomous web data extraction agent. Searches and gathers information based on
 | `success` | boolean | Whether the agent operation was successful |
 | `status` | string | Current status of the agent job \(processing, completed, failed\) |
 | `data` | object | Extracted data from the agent |
-| `creditsUsed` | number | Number of credits consumed by this agent task |
 | `expiresAt` | string | Timestamp when the results expire \(24 hours\) |
 | `sources` | object | Array of source URLs used by the agent |
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/google_books.mdx

@@ -46,6 +46,8 @@ Search for books using the Google Books API
 | `startIndex` | number | No | Index of the first result to return \(for pagination\) |
 | `maxResults` | number | No | Maximum number of results to return \(1-40\) |
 | `langRestrict` | string | No | Restrict results to a specific language \(ISO 639-1 code\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -82,6 +84,8 @@ Get detailed information about a specific book volume
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Google Books API key |
 | `volumeId` | string | Yes | The ID of the volume to retrieve |
 | `projection` | string | No | Projection level \(full, lite\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/google_maps.mdx

@@ -50,6 +50,8 @@ Get current air quality data for a location
 | `lat` | number | Yes | Latitude coordinate |
 | `lng` | number | Yes | Longitude coordinate |
 | `languageCode` | string | No | Language code for the response \(e.g., "en", "es"\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -91,6 +93,8 @@ Get directions and route information between two locations
 | `waypoints` | json | No | Array of intermediate waypoints |
 | `units` | string | No | Unit system: metric or imperial |
 | `language` | string | No | Language code for results \(e.g., en, es, fr\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -135,6 +139,8 @@ Calculate travel distance and time between multiple origins and destinations
 | `avoid` | string | No | Features to avoid: tolls, highways, or ferries |
 | `units` | string | No | Unit system: metric or imperial |
 | `language` | string | No | Language code for results \(e.g., en, es, fr\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -163,6 +169,8 @@ Get elevation data for a location
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Google Maps API key |
 | `lat` | number | Yes | Latitude coordinate |
 | `lng` | number | Yes | Longitude coordinate |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -185,6 +193,8 @@ Convert an address into geographic coordinates (latitude and longitude)
 | `address` | string | Yes | The address to geocode |
 | `language` | string | No | Language code for results \(e.g., en, es, fr\) |
 | `region` | string | No | Region bias as a ccTLD code \(e.g., us, uk\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -217,6 +227,8 @@ Geolocate a device using WiFi access points, cell towers, or IP address
 | `considerIp` | boolean | No | Whether to use IP address for geolocation \(default: true\) |
 | `cellTowers` | array | No | Array of cell tower objects with cellId, locationAreaCode, mobileCountryCode, mobileNetworkCode |
 | `wifiAccessPoints` | array | No | Array of WiFi access point objects with macAddress \(required\), signalStrength, etc. |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -238,6 +250,8 @@ Get detailed information about a specific place
 | `placeId` | string | Yes | Google Place ID |
 | `fields` | string | No | Comma-separated list of fields to return |
 | `language` | string | No | Language code for results \(e.g., en, es, fr\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -290,6 +304,8 @@ Search for places using a text query
 | `type` | string | No | Place type filter \(e.g., restaurant, cafe, hotel\) |
 | `language` | string | No | Language code for results \(e.g., en, es, fr\) |
 | `region` | string | No | Region bias as a ccTLD code \(e.g., us, uk\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -322,6 +338,8 @@ Convert geographic coordinates (latitude and longitude) into a human-readable ad
 | `lat` | number | Yes | Latitude coordinate |
 | `lng` | number | Yes | Longitude coordinate |
 | `language` | string | No | Language code for results \(e.g., en, es, fr\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -346,6 +364,8 @@ Snap GPS coordinates to the nearest road segment
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Google Maps API key with Roads API enabled |
 | `path` | string | Yes | Pipe-separated list of lat,lng coordinates \(e.g., "60.170880,24.942795\|60.170879,24.942796"\) |
 | `interpolate` | boolean | No | Whether to interpolate additional points along the road |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -399,6 +419,8 @@ Get timezone information for a location
 | `lng` | number | Yes | Longitude coordinate |
 | `timestamp` | number | No | Unix timestamp to determine DST offset \(defaults to current time\) |
 | `language` | string | No | Language code for timezone name \(e.g., en, es, fr\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -424,6 +446,8 @@ Validate and standardize a postal address
 | `regionCode` | string | No | ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 country code \(e.g., "US", "CA"\) |
 | `locality` | string | No | City or locality name |
 | `enableUspsCass` | boolean | No | Enable USPS CASS validation for US addresses |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/google_pagespeed.mdx

@@ -55,6 +55,8 @@ Analyze a webpage for performance, accessibility, SEO, and best practices using
 | `category` | string | No | Lighthouse categories to analyze \(comma-separated\): performance, accessibility, best-practices, seo |
 | `strategy` | string | No | Analysis strategy: desktop or mobile |
 | `locale` | string | No | Locale for results \(e.g., en, fr, de\) |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/google_translate.mdx

@@ -43,6 +43,9 @@ Translate text between languages using the Google Cloud Translation API. Support
 | `target` | string | Yes | Target language code \(e.g., "es", "fr", "de", "ja"\) |
 | `source` | string | No | Source language code. If omitted, the API will auto-detect the source language. |
 | `format` | string | No | Format of the text: "text" for plain text, "html" for HTML content |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -61,6 +64,9 @@ Detect the language of text using the Google Cloud Translation API.
 | --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Google Cloud API key with Cloud Translation API enabled |
 | `text` | string | Yes | The text to detect the language of |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/grain.mdx

@@ -138,6 +138,26 @@ Get the full transcript of a recording
 |   ↳ `end` | number | End timestamp in ms |
 |   ↳ `text` | string | Transcript text |
 
+### `grain_list_views`
+
+List available Grain views for webhook subscriptions
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Grain API key \(Personal Access Token\) |
+| `typeFilter` | string | No | Optional view type filter: recordings, highlights, or stories |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `views` | array | Array of Grain views |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | View UUID |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | View name |
+|   ↳ `type` | string | View type: recordings, highlights, or stories |
+
 ### `grain_list_teams`
 
 List all teams in the workspace
@@ -185,15 +205,9 @@ Create a webhook to receive recording events
 | --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Grain API key \(Personal Access Token\) |
 | `hookUrl` | string | Yes | Webhook endpoint URL \(e.g., "https://example.com/webhooks/grain"\) |
-| `hookType` | string | Yes | Type of webhook: "recording_added" or "upload_status" |
-| `filterBeforeDatetime` | string | No | Filter: recordings before this ISO8601 date \(e.g., "2024-01-15T00:00:00Z"\) |
-| `filterAfterDatetime` | string | No | Filter: recordings after this ISO8601 date \(e.g., "2024-01-01T00:00:00Z"\) |
-| `filterParticipantScope` | string | No | Filter: "internal" or "external" |
-| `filterTeamId` | string | No | Filter: specific team UUID \(e.g., "a1b2c3d4-e5f6-7890-abcd-ef1234567890"\) |
-| `filterMeetingTypeId` | string | No | Filter: specific meeting type UUID \(e.g., "a1b2c3d4-e5f6-7890-abcd-ef1234567890"\) |
-| `includeHighlights` | boolean | No | Include highlights in webhook payload |
-| `includeParticipants` | boolean | No | Include participants in webhook payload |
-| `includeAiSummary` | boolean | No | Include AI summary in webhook payload |
+| `viewId` | string | Yes | Grain view ID from GET /_/public-api/views |
+| `actions` | array | No | Optional list of actions to subscribe to: added, updated, removed |
+| `items` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -202,9 +216,8 @@ Create a webhook to receive recording events
 | `id` | string | Hook UUID |
 | `enabled` | boolean | Whether hook is active |
 | `hook_url` | string | The webhook URL |
-| `hook_type` | string | Type of hook: recording_added or upload_status |
-| `filter` | object | Applied filters |
-| `include` | object | Included fields |
+| `view_id` | string | Grain view ID for the webhook |
+| `actions` | array | Configured actions for the webhook |
 | `inserted_at` | string | ISO8601 creation timestamp |
 
 ### `grain_list_hooks`
@@ -225,9 +238,8 @@ List all webhooks for the account
 |   ↳ `id` | string | Hook UUID |
 |   ↳ `enabled` | boolean | Whether hook is active |
 |   ↳ `hook_url` | string | Webhook URL |
-|   ↳ `hook_type` | string | Type: recording_added or upload_status |
-|   ↳ `filter` | object | Applied filters |
-|   ↳ `include` | object | Included fields |
+|   ↳ `view_id` | string | Grain view ID |
+|   ↳ `actions` | array | Configured actions |
 |   ↳ `inserted_at` | string | Creation timestamp |
 
 ### `grain_delete_hook`

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/index.mdx

@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ description: Powerful tools to enhance your agentic workflows
 import { Card, Cards } from "fumadocs-ui/components/card";
 import { Step, Steps } from "fumadocs-ui/components/steps";
 import { Video } from '@/components/ui/video';
+import { FAQ } from '@/components/ui/faq';
 
 Tools are powerful components in Sim that allow your workflows to interact with external services, process data, and perform specialized tasks. They extend the capabilities of your agents and workflows by providing access to various APIs and services.
 
@@ -49,10 +50,10 @@ Each tool requires specific configuration to function properly. Common configura
 
 Sim provides a diverse collection of tools for various purposes, including:
 
-- **AI and Language Processing**: OpenAI, ElevenLabs, Translation services
+- **AI and Language Processing**: OpenAI, ElevenLabs, Google Translate
 - **Search and Research**: Google Search, Tavily, Exa, Perplexity
 - **Document Manipulation**: Google Docs, Google Sheets, Notion, Confluence
-- **Media Processing**: Vision, Image Generator
+- **Media Processing**: Vision
 - **Communication**: Slack, WhatsApp, Twilio SMS, Gmail
 - **Data Storage**: Pinecone, Supabase, Airtable
 - **Development**: GitHub
@@ -68,3 +69,13 @@ Tools typically return structured data that can be processed by subsequent block
 - Status information
 
 Refer to each tool's specific documentation to understand its exact output format.
+
+<FAQ items={[
+  { question: "How many tool integrations does Sim provide?", answer: "Sim includes over 180 service integrations with 1,000+ individual tool actions, spanning categories like AI and language processing, search and research, document manipulation, media processing, communication, data storage, development platforms, and more." },
+  { question: "What is the difference between using a tool as a standalone block vs. as an agent tool?", answer: "As a standalone block, the tool is called deterministically at a fixed point in your workflow, giving you precise control. As an agent tool, the tool is provided to an AI agent that dynamically decides whether and when to call it based on context and task requirements." },
+  { question: "How does tool authentication work?", answer: "Tools support multiple authentication methods. Many use OAuth for secure token-based access to external services. Others accept API keys provided by the user. Some tools also support Sim's hosted API keys, so you can use the tool without providing your own key." },
+  { question: "Can tools return files?", answer: "Yes. Tools can return file-typed outputs with associated metadata like file name, MIME type, and size. File data can be provided as a buffer, base64 string, or a URL to download from. This enables workflows that process documents, images, and other binary content." },
+  { question: "What happens when a tool API call fails?", answer: "Tools support configurable retry logic with settings for maximum retries, initial delay, and maximum delay. Error extractors parse provider-specific error responses to surface clear error messages. You can also configure whether only idempotent requests should be retried." },
+  { question: "Can tools dynamically adapt their parameters based on context?", answer: "Yes. Tools support schema enrichment, where parameter schemas are dynamically updated at runtime based on other parameter values. For example, the knowledge search tool enriches its tag filter options based on the selected knowledgebase's actual tag definitions." },
+]} />
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/infisical.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+---
+title: Infisical
+description: Manage secrets with Infisical
+---
+
+import { BlockInfoCard } from "@/components/ui/block-info-card"
+
+<BlockInfoCard 
+  type="infisical"
+  color="#F7FE62"
+/>
+
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-START:intro */}
+[Infisical](https://infisical.com/) is an open-source secrets management platform that helps teams centralize and manage application secrets, environment variables, and sensitive configuration data across their infrastructure. This integration brings Infisical's secrets management capabilities directly into Sim workflows.
+
+With Infisical in Sim, you can:
+
+- **List secrets**: Retrieve all secrets from a project environment with filtering by path, tags, and recursive subdirectory support
+- **Get a secret**: Fetch a specific secret by name, with optional version pinning and secret reference expansion
+- **Create secrets**: Add new secrets to any project environment with support for comments, paths, and tag assignments
+- **Update secrets**: Modify existing secret values, comments, names, and tags
+- **Delete secrets**: Remove secrets from a project environment
+
+In Sim, the Infisical integration enables your agents to programmatically manage secrets as part of automated workflows — for example, rotating credentials, syncing environment variables across environments, or auditing secret usage. Simply configure the Infisical block with your API key, select the operation, and provide the project ID and environment slug to get started.
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-END */}
+
+
+## Usage Instructions
+
+Integrate Infisical into your workflow. List, get, create, update, and delete secrets across project environments.
+
+
+
+## Tools
+
+### `infisical_list_secrets`
+
+List all secrets in a project environment. Returns secret keys, values, comments, tags, and metadata.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Infisical API token |
+| `baseUrl` | string | No | Infisical instance URL \(default: "https://us.infisical.com"\). Use "https://eu.infisical.com" for EU Cloud or your self-hosted URL. |
+| `projectId` | string | Yes | The ID of the project to list secrets from |
+| `environment` | string | Yes | The environment slug \(e.g., "dev", "staging", "prod"\) |
+| `secretPath` | string | No | The path of the secrets \(default: "/"\) |
+| `recursive` | boolean | No | Whether to fetch secrets recursively from subdirectories |
+| `expandSecretReferences` | boolean | No | Whether to expand secret references \(default: true\) |
+| `viewSecretValue` | boolean | No | Whether to include secret values in the response \(default: true\) |
+| `includeImports` | boolean | No | Whether to include imported secrets \(default: true\) |
+| `tagSlugs` | string | No | Comma-separated tag slugs to filter secrets by |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `secrets` | array | Array of secrets |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Secret ID |
+|   ↳ `workspace` | string | Workspace/project ID |
+|   ↳ `secretKey` | string | Secret name/key |
+|   ↳ `secretValue` | string | Secret value |
+|   ↳ `secretComment` | string | Secret comment |
+|   ↳ `secretPath` | string | Secret path |
+|   ↳ `version` | number | Secret version |
+|   ↳ `type` | string | Secret type \(shared or personal\) |
+|   ↳ `environment` | string | Environment slug |
+|   ↳ `tags` | array | Tags attached to the secret |
+|     ↳ `id` | string | Tag ID |
+|     ↳ `slug` | string | Tag slug |
+|     ↳ `color` | string | Tag color |
+|     ↳ `name` | string | Tag name |
+|   ↳ `secretMetadata` | array | Custom metadata key-value pairs |
+|     ↳ `key` | string | Metadata key |
+|     ↳ `value` | string | Metadata value |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `count` | number | Total number of secrets returned |
+
+### `infisical_get_secret`
+
+Retrieve a single secret by name from a project environment.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Infisical API token |
+| `baseUrl` | string | No | Infisical instance URL \(default: "https://us.infisical.com"\). Use "https://eu.infisical.com" for EU Cloud or your self-hosted URL. |
+| `projectId` | string | Yes | The ID of the project |
+| `environment` | string | Yes | The environment slug \(e.g., "dev", "staging", "prod"\) |
+| `secretName` | string | Yes | The name of the secret to retrieve |
+| `secretPath` | string | No | The path of the secret \(default: "/"\) |
+| `version` | number | No | Specific version of the secret to retrieve |
+| `type` | string | No | Secret type: "shared" or "personal" \(default: "shared"\) |
+| `viewSecretValue` | boolean | No | Whether to include the secret value in the response \(default: true\) |
+| `expandSecretReferences` | boolean | No | Whether to expand secret references \(default: true\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `secret` | object | The retrieved secret |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Secret ID |
+|   ↳ `workspace` | string | Workspace/project ID |
+|   ↳ `secretKey` | string | Secret name/key |
+|   ↳ `secretValue` | string | Secret value |
+|   ↳ `secretComment` | string | Secret comment |
+|   ↳ `secretPath` | string | Secret path |
+|   ↳ `version` | number | Secret version |
+|   ↳ `type` | string | Secret type \(shared or personal\) |
+|   ↳ `environment` | string | Environment slug |
+|   ↳ `tags` | array | Tags attached to the secret |
+|     ↳ `id` | string | Tag ID |
+|     ↳ `slug` | string | Tag slug |
+|     ↳ `color` | string | Tag color |
+|     ↳ `name` | string | Tag name |
+|   ↳ `secretMetadata` | array | Custom metadata key-value pairs |
+|     ↳ `key` | string | Metadata key |
+|     ↳ `value` | string | Metadata value |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+
+### `infisical_create_secret`
+
+Create a new secret in a project environment.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Infisical API token |
+| `baseUrl` | string | No | Infisical instance URL \(default: "https://us.infisical.com"\). Use "https://eu.infisical.com" for EU Cloud or your self-hosted URL. |
+| `projectId` | string | Yes | The ID of the project |
+| `environment` | string | Yes | The environment slug \(e.g., "dev", "staging", "prod"\) |
+| `secretName` | string | Yes | The name of the secret to create |
+| `secretValue` | string | Yes | The value of the secret |
+| `secretPath` | string | No | The path for the secret \(default: "/"\) |
+| `secretComment` | string | No | A comment for the secret |
+| `type` | string | No | Secret type: "shared" or "personal" \(default: "shared"\) |
+| `tagIds` | string | No | Comma-separated tag IDs to attach to the secret |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `secret` | object | The created secret |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Secret ID |
+|   ↳ `workspace` | string | Workspace/project ID |
+|   ↳ `secretKey` | string | Secret name/key |
+|   ↳ `secretValue` | string | Secret value |
+|   ↳ `secretComment` | string | Secret comment |
+|   ↳ `secretPath` | string | Secret path |
+|   ↳ `version` | number | Secret version |
+|   ↳ `type` | string | Secret type \(shared or personal\) |
+|   ↳ `environment` | string | Environment slug |
+|   ↳ `tags` | array | Tags attached to the secret |
+|     ↳ `id` | string | Tag ID |
+|     ↳ `slug` | string | Tag slug |
+|     ↳ `color` | string | Tag color |
+|     ↳ `name` | string | Tag name |
+|   ↳ `secretMetadata` | array | Custom metadata key-value pairs |
+|     ↳ `key` | string | Metadata key |
+|     ↳ `value` | string | Metadata value |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+
+### `infisical_update_secret`
+
+Update an existing secret in a project environment.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Infisical API token |
+| `baseUrl` | string | No | Infisical instance URL \(default: "https://us.infisical.com"\). Use "https://eu.infisical.com" for EU Cloud or your self-hosted URL. |
+| `projectId` | string | Yes | The ID of the project |
+| `environment` | string | Yes | The environment slug \(e.g., "dev", "staging", "prod"\) |
+| `secretName` | string | Yes | The name of the secret to update |
+| `secretValue` | string | No | The new value for the secret |
+| `secretPath` | string | No | The path of the secret \(default: "/"\) |
+| `secretComment` | string | No | A comment for the secret |
+| `newSecretName` | string | No | New name for the secret \(to rename it\) |
+| `type` | string | No | Secret type: "shared" or "personal" \(default: "shared"\) |
+| `tagIds` | string | No | Comma-separated tag IDs to set on the secret |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `secret` | object | The updated secret |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Secret ID |
+|   ↳ `workspace` | string | Workspace/project ID |
+|   ↳ `secretKey` | string | Secret name/key |
+|   ↳ `secretValue` | string | Secret value |
+|   ↳ `secretComment` | string | Secret comment |
+|   ↳ `secretPath` | string | Secret path |
+|   ↳ `version` | number | Secret version |
+|   ↳ `type` | string | Secret type \(shared or personal\) |
+|   ↳ `environment` | string | Environment slug |
+|   ↳ `tags` | array | Tags attached to the secret |
+|     ↳ `id` | string | Tag ID |
+|     ↳ `slug` | string | Tag slug |
+|     ↳ `color` | string | Tag color |
+|     ↳ `name` | string | Tag name |
+|   ↳ `secretMetadata` | array | Custom metadata key-value pairs |
+|     ↳ `key` | string | Metadata key |
+|     ↳ `value` | string | Metadata value |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+
+### `infisical_delete_secret`
+
+Delete a secret from a project environment.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Infisical API token |
+| `baseUrl` | string | No | Infisical instance URL \(default: "https://us.infisical.com"\). Use "https://eu.infisical.com" for EU Cloud or your self-hosted URL. |
+| `projectId` | string | Yes | The ID of the project |
+| `environment` | string | Yes | The environment slug \(e.g., "dev", "staging", "prod"\) |
+| `secretName` | string | Yes | The name of the secret to delete |
+| `secretPath` | string | No | The path of the secret \(default: "/"\) |
+| `type` | string | No | Secret type: "shared" or "personal" \(default: "shared"\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `secret` | object | The deleted secret |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Secret ID |
+|   ↳ `workspace` | string | Workspace/project ID |
+|   ↳ `secretKey` | string | Secret name/key |
+|   ↳ `secretValue` | string | Secret value |
+|   ↳ `secretComment` | string | Secret comment |
+|   ↳ `secretPath` | string | Secret path |
+|   ↳ `version` | number | Secret version |
+|   ↳ `type` | string | Secret type \(shared or personal\) |
+|   ↳ `environment` | string | Environment slug |
+|   ↳ `tags` | array | Tags attached to the secret |
+|     ↳ `id` | string | Tag ID |
+|     ↳ `slug` | string | Tag slug |
+|     ↳ `color` | string | Tag color |
+|     ↳ `name` | string | Tag name |
+|   ↳ `secretMetadata` | array | Custom metadata key-value pairs |
+|     ↳ `key` | string | Metadata key |
+|     ↳ `value` | string | Metadata value |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/jina.mdx

@@ -64,6 +64,7 @@ Extract and process web content into clean, LLM-friendly text using Jina AI Read
 | Parameter | Type | Description |
 | --------- | ---- | ----------- |
 | `content` | string | The extracted content from the URL, processed into clean, LLM-friendly text |
+| `tokensUsed` | number | Number of Jina tokens consumed by this request |
 
 ### `jina_search`
 
@@ -97,5 +98,6 @@ Search the web and return top 5 results with LLM-friendly content. Each result i
 |   ↳ `content` | string | LLM-friendly extracted content |
 |   ↳ `usage` | object | Token usage information |
 |     ↳ `tokens` | number | Number of tokens consumed by this request |
+| `tokensUsed` | number | Number of Jina tokens consumed by this request |
 
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/knowledge.mdx

@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ In Sim, the Knowledge Base block enables your agents to perform intelligent sema
 
 ## Usage Instructions
 
-Integrate Knowledge into the workflow. Can search, upload chunks, and create documents.
+Integrate Knowledge into the workflow. Perform full CRUD operations on documents, chunks, and tags.
 
 
 
@@ -122,4 +122,312 @@ Create a new document in a knowledge base
 | `message` | string | Success or error message describing the operation result |
 | `documentId` | string | ID of the created document |
 
+### `knowledge_upsert_document`
+
+Create or update a document in a knowledge base. If a document with the given ID or filename already exists, it will be replaced with the new content.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base containing the document |
+| `documentId` | string | No | Optional ID of an existing document to update. If not provided, lookup is done by filename. |
+| `name` | string | Yes | Name of the document |
+| `content` | string | Yes | Content of the document |
+| `documentTags` | json | No | Document tags |
+| `documentTags` | string | No | No description |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `data` | object | Information about the upserted document |
+|   ↳ `documentId` | string | Document ID |
+|   ↳ `documentName` | string | Document name |
+|   ↳ `type` | string | Document type |
+|   ↳ `enabled` | boolean | Whether the document is enabled |
+|   ↳ `isUpdate` | boolean | Whether an existing document was replaced |
+|   ↳ `previousDocumentId` | string | ID of the document that was replaced, if any |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `message` | string | Success or error message describing the operation result |
+| `documentId` | string | ID of the upserted document |
+
+### `knowledge_list_tags`
+
+List all tag definitions for a knowledge base
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base to list tags for |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | ID of the knowledge base |
+| `tags` | array | Array of tag definitions for the knowledge base |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Tag definition ID |
+|   ↳ `tagSlot` | string | Internal tag slot \(e.g. tag1, number1\) |
+|   ↳ `displayName` | string | Human-readable tag name |
+|   ↳ `fieldType` | string | Tag field type \(text, number, date, boolean\) |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `totalTags` | number | Total number of tag definitions |
+
+### `knowledge_list_documents`
+
+List documents in a knowledge base with optional filtering, search, and pagination
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base to list documents from |
+| `search` | string | No | Search query to filter documents by filename |
+| `enabledFilter` | string | No | Filter by enabled status: "all", "enabled", or "disabled" |
+| `limit` | number | No | Maximum number of documents to return \(default: 50\) |
+| `offset` | number | No | Number of documents to skip for pagination \(default: 0\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | ID of the knowledge base |
+| `documents` | array | Array of documents in the knowledge base |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Document ID |
+|   ↳ `filename` | string | Document filename |
+|   ↳ `fileSize` | number | File size in bytes |
+|   ↳ `mimeType` | string | MIME type of the document |
+|   ↳ `enabled` | boolean | Whether the document is enabled |
+|   ↳ `processingStatus` | string | Processing status \(pending, processing, completed, failed\) |
+|   ↳ `chunkCount` | number | Number of chunks in the document |
+|   ↳ `tokenCount` | number | Total token count across chunks |
+|   ↳ `uploadedAt` | string | Upload timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+|   ↳ `connectorId` | string | Connector ID if document was synced from an external source |
+|   ↳ `connectorType` | string | Connector type \(e.g. notion, github, confluence\) if synced |
+|   ↳ `sourceUrl` | string | Original URL in the source system if synced from a connector |
+| `totalDocuments` | number | Total number of documents matching the filter |
+| `limit` | number | Page size used |
+| `offset` | number | Offset used for pagination |
+
+### `knowledge_get_document`
+
+Get full details of a single document including tags, connector metadata, and processing status
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base the document belongs to |
+| `documentId` | string | Yes | ID of the document to retrieve |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Document ID |
+| `filename` | string | Document filename |
+| `fileSize` | number | File size in bytes |
+| `mimeType` | string | MIME type of the document |
+| `enabled` | boolean | Whether the document is enabled |
+| `processingStatus` | string | Processing status \(pending, processing, completed, failed\) |
+| `processingError` | string | Error message if processing failed |
+| `chunkCount` | number | Number of chunks in the document |
+| `tokenCount` | number | Total token count across chunks |
+| `characterCount` | number | Total character count |
+| `uploadedAt` | string | Upload timestamp |
+| `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `connectorId` | string | Connector ID if document was synced from an external source |
+| `sourceUrl` | string | Original URL in the source system if synced from a connector |
+| `externalId` | string | External ID from the source system |
+| `tags` | object | Tag values keyed by tag slot \(tag1-7, number1-5, date1-2, boolean1-3\) |
+
+### `knowledge_delete_document`
+
+Delete a document from a knowledge base
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base containing the document |
+| `documentId` | string | Yes | ID of the document to delete |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `documentId` | string | ID of the deleted document |
+| `message` | string | Confirmation message |
+
+### `knowledge_list_chunks`
+
+List chunks for a document in a knowledge base with optional filtering and pagination
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base |
+| `documentId` | string | Yes | ID of the document to list chunks from |
+| `search` | string | No | Search query to filter chunks by content |
+| `enabled` | string | No | Filter by enabled status: "true", "false", or "all" \(default: "all"\) |
+| `limit` | number | No | Maximum number of chunks to return \(1-100, default: 50\) |
+| `offset` | number | No | Number of chunks to skip for pagination \(default: 0\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | ID of the knowledge base |
+| `documentId` | string | ID of the document |
+| `chunks` | array | Array of chunks in the document |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Chunk ID |
+|   ↳ `chunkIndex` | number | Index of the chunk within the document |
+|   ↳ `content` | string | Chunk text content |
+|   ↳ `contentLength` | number | Content length in characters |
+|   ↳ `tokenCount` | number | Token count for the chunk |
+|   ↳ `enabled` | boolean | Whether the chunk is enabled |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `totalChunks` | number | Total number of chunks matching the filter |
+| `limit` | number | Page size used |
+| `offset` | number | Offset used for pagination |
+
+### `knowledge_update_chunk`
+
+Update the content or enabled status of a chunk in a knowledge base
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base |
+| `documentId` | string | Yes | ID of the document containing the chunk |
+| `chunkId` | string | Yes | ID of the chunk to update |
+| `content` | string | No | New content for the chunk |
+| `enabled` | boolean | No | Whether the chunk should be enabled or disabled |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `documentId` | string | ID of the parent document |
+| `id` | string | Chunk ID |
+| `chunkIndex` | number | Index of the chunk within the document |
+| `content` | string | Updated chunk content |
+| `contentLength` | number | Content length in characters |
+| `tokenCount` | number | Token count for the chunk |
+| `enabled` | boolean | Whether the chunk is enabled |
+| `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+
+### `knowledge_delete_chunk`
+
+Delete a chunk from a document in a knowledge base
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base |
+| `documentId` | string | Yes | ID of the document containing the chunk |
+| `chunkId` | string | Yes | ID of the chunk to delete |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `chunkId` | string | ID of the deleted chunk |
+| `documentId` | string | ID of the parent document |
+| `message` | string | Confirmation message |
+
+### `knowledge_list_connectors`
+
+List all connectors for a knowledge base, showing sync status, type, and document counts
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base to list connectors for |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | ID of the knowledge base |
+| `connectors` | array | Array of connectors for the knowledge base |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Connector ID |
+|   ↳ `connectorType` | string | Type of connector \(e.g. notion, github, confluence\) |
+|   ↳ `status` | string | Connector status \(active, paused, syncing\) |
+|   ↳ `syncIntervalMinutes` | number | Sync interval in minutes \(0 = manual only\) |
+|   ↳ `lastSyncAt` | string | Timestamp of last sync |
+|   ↳ `lastSyncError` | string | Error from last sync if failed |
+|   ↳ `lastSyncDocCount` | number | Number of documents synced in last sync |
+|   ↳ `nextSyncAt` | string | Timestamp of next scheduled sync |
+|   ↳ `consecutiveFailures` | number | Number of consecutive sync failures |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `totalConnectors` | number | Total number of connectors |
+
+### `knowledge_get_connector`
+
+Get detailed connector information including recent sync logs for monitoring sync health
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base the connector belongs to |
+| `connectorId` | string | Yes | ID of the connector to retrieve |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `connector` | object | Connector details |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Connector ID |
+|   ↳ `connectorType` | string | Type of connector |
+|   ↳ `status` | string | Connector status \(active, paused, syncing\) |
+|   ↳ `syncIntervalMinutes` | number | Sync interval in minutes |
+|   ↳ `lastSyncAt` | string | Timestamp of last sync |
+|   ↳ `lastSyncError` | string | Error from last sync if failed |
+|   ↳ `lastSyncDocCount` | number | Docs synced in last sync |
+|   ↳ `nextSyncAt` | string | Next scheduled sync timestamp |
+|   ↳ `consecutiveFailures` | number | Consecutive sync failures |
+|   ↳ `createdAt` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `updatedAt` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `syncLogs` | array | Recent sync log entries |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Sync log ID |
+|   ↳ `status` | string | Sync status |
+|   ↳ `startedAt` | string | Sync start time |
+|   ↳ `completedAt` | string | Sync completion time |
+|   ↳ `docsAdded` | number | Documents added |
+|   ↳ `docsUpdated` | number | Documents updated |
+|   ↳ `docsDeleted` | number | Documents deleted |
+|   ↳ `docsUnchanged` | number | Documents unchanged |
+|   ↳ `errorMessage` | string | Error message if sync failed |
+
+### `knowledge_trigger_sync`
+
+Trigger a manual sync for a knowledge base connector
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `knowledgeBaseId` | string | Yes | ID of the knowledge base the connector belongs to |
+| `connectorId` | string | Yes | ID of the connector to trigger sync for |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `connectorId` | string | ID of the connector that was synced |
+| `message` | string | Status message from the sync trigger |
+
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/linkup.mdx

@@ -51,6 +51,9 @@ Search the web for information using Linkup
 | `includeDomains` | string | No | Comma-separated list of domain names to restrict search results to |
 | `includeInlineCitations` | boolean | No | Add inline citations to answers \(only applies when outputType is "sourcedAnswer"\) |
 | `includeSources` | boolean | No | Include sources in response |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/meta.json

@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@
     "asana",
     "ashby",
     "attio",
+    "box",
     "brandfetch",
     "browser_use",
     "calcom",
@@ -27,6 +28,7 @@
     "datadog",
     "devin",
     "discord",
+    "docusign",
     "dropbox",
     "dspy",
     "dub",
@@ -75,6 +77,7 @@
     "image_generator",
     "imap",
     "incidentio",
+    "infisical",
     "intercom",
     "jina",
     "jira",
@@ -92,6 +95,7 @@
     "mailgun",
     "mem0",
     "memory",
+    "microsoft_ad",
     "microsoft_dataverse",
     "microsoft_excel",
     "microsoft_planner",
@@ -102,6 +106,7 @@
     "neo4j",
     "notion",
     "obsidian",
+    "okta",
     "onedrive",
     "onepassword",
     "openai",
@@ -116,6 +121,7 @@
     "posthog",
     "pulse",
     "qdrant",
+    "quiver",
     "rds",
     "reddit",
     "redis",
@@ -161,6 +167,7 @@
     "whatsapp",
     "wikipedia",
     "wordpress",
+    "workday",
     "x",
     "youtube",
     "zendesk",

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/microsoft_ad.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,336 @@
+---
+title: Azure AD
+description: Manage users and groups in Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+---
+
+import { BlockInfoCard } from "@/components/ui/block-info-card"
+
+<BlockInfoCard 
+  type="microsoft_ad"
+  color="#0078D4"
+/>
+
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-START:intro */}
+[Azure Active Directory](https://entra.microsoft.com) (now Microsoft Entra ID) is Microsoft's cloud-based identity and access management service. It helps organizations manage users, groups, and access to applications and resources across cloud and on-premises environments.
+
+With the Azure AD integration in Sim, you can:
+
+- **Manage users**: List, create, update, and delete user accounts in your directory
+- **Manage groups**: Create and configure security groups and Microsoft 365 groups
+- **Control group membership**: Add and remove members from groups programmatically
+- **Query directory data**: Search and filter users and groups using OData expressions
+- **Automate onboarding/offboarding**: Create new user accounts with initial passwords and enable/disable accounts as part of HR workflows
+
+In Sim, the Azure AD integration enables your agents to programmatically manage your organization's identity infrastructure. This allows for automation scenarios such as provisioning new employees, updating user profiles in bulk, managing team group memberships, and auditing directory data. By connecting Sim with Azure AD, you can streamline identity lifecycle management and ensure your directory stays in sync with your organization's needs.
+
+## Need Help?
+
+If you encounter issues with the Azure AD integration, contact us at [help@sim.ai](mailto:help@sim.ai)
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-END */}
+
+
+## Usage Instructions
+
+Integrate Azure Active Directory into your workflows. List, create, update, and delete users and groups. Manage group memberships programmatically.
+
+
+
+## Tools
+
+### `microsoft_ad_list_users`
+
+List users in Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `top` | number | No | Maximum number of users to return \(default 100, max 999\) |
+| `filter` | string | No | OData filter expression \(e.g., "department eq \'Sales\'"\) |
+| `search` | string | No | Search string to filter users by displayName or mail |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `users` | array | List of users |
+| `userCount` | number | Number of users returned |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_get_user`
+
+Get a user by ID or user principal name from Azure AD
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID or user principal name \(e.g., "user@example.com"\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `user` | object | User details |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | User ID |
+|   ↳ `displayName` | string | Display name |
+|   ↳ `givenName` | string | First name |
+|   ↳ `surname` | string | Last name |
+|   ↳ `userPrincipalName` | string | User principal name \(email\) |
+|   ↳ `mail` | string | Email address |
+|   ↳ `jobTitle` | string | Job title |
+|   ↳ `department` | string | Department |
+|   ↳ `officeLocation` | string | Office location |
+|   ↳ `mobilePhone` | string | Mobile phone number |
+|   ↳ `accountEnabled` | boolean | Whether the account is enabled |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_create_user`
+
+Create a new user in Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `displayName` | string | Yes | Display name for the user |
+| `mailNickname` | string | Yes | Mail alias for the user |
+| `userPrincipalName` | string | Yes | User principal name \(e.g., "user@example.com"\) |
+| `password` | string | Yes | Initial password for the user |
+| `accountEnabled` | boolean | Yes | Whether the account is enabled |
+| `givenName` | string | No | First name |
+| `surname` | string | No | Last name |
+| `jobTitle` | string | No | Job title |
+| `department` | string | No | Department |
+| `officeLocation` | string | No | Office location |
+| `mobilePhone` | string | No | Mobile phone number |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `user` | object | Created user details |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | User ID |
+|   ↳ `displayName` | string | Display name |
+|   ↳ `givenName` | string | First name |
+|   ↳ `surname` | string | Last name |
+|   ↳ `userPrincipalName` | string | User principal name \(email\) |
+|   ↳ `mail` | string | Email address |
+|   ↳ `jobTitle` | string | Job title |
+|   ↳ `department` | string | Department |
+|   ↳ `officeLocation` | string | Office location |
+|   ↳ `mobilePhone` | string | Mobile phone number |
+|   ↳ `accountEnabled` | boolean | Whether the account is enabled |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_update_user`
+
+Update user properties in Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID or user principal name |
+| `displayName` | string | No | Display name |
+| `givenName` | string | No | First name |
+| `surname` | string | No | Last name |
+| `jobTitle` | string | No | Job title |
+| `department` | string | No | Department |
+| `officeLocation` | string | No | Office location |
+| `mobilePhone` | string | No | Mobile phone number |
+| `accountEnabled` | boolean | No | Whether the account is enabled |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `updated` | boolean | Whether the update was successful |
+| `userId` | string | ID of the updated user |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_delete_user`
+
+Delete a user from Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID). The user is moved to a temporary container and can be restored within 30 days.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID or user principal name |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `deleted` | boolean | Whether the deletion was successful |
+| `userId` | string | ID of the deleted user |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_list_groups`
+
+List groups in Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `top` | number | No | Maximum number of groups to return \(default 100, max 999\) |
+| `filter` | string | No | OData filter expression \(e.g., "securityEnabled eq true"\) |
+| `search` | string | No | Search string to filter groups by displayName or description |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `groups` | array | List of groups |
+| `groupCount` | number | Number of groups returned |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_get_group`
+
+Get a group by ID from Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `group` | object | Group details |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Group ID |
+|   ↳ `displayName` | string | Display name |
+|   ↳ `description` | string | Group description |
+|   ↳ `mail` | string | Email address |
+|   ↳ `mailEnabled` | boolean | Whether mail is enabled |
+|   ↳ `mailNickname` | string | Mail nickname |
+|   ↳ `securityEnabled` | boolean | Whether security is enabled |
+|   ↳ `groupTypes` | array | Group types |
+|   ↳ `visibility` | string | Group visibility |
+|   ↳ `createdDateTime` | string | Creation date |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_create_group`
+
+Create a new group in Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `displayName` | string | Yes | Display name for the group |
+| `mailNickname` | string | Yes | Mail alias for the group \(ASCII only, max 64 characters\) |
+| `description` | string | No | Group description |
+| `mailEnabled` | boolean | Yes | Whether mail is enabled \(true for Microsoft 365 groups\) |
+| `securityEnabled` | boolean | Yes | Whether security is enabled \(true for security groups\) |
+| `groupTypes` | string | No | Group type: "Unified" for Microsoft 365 group, leave empty for security group |
+| `visibility` | string | No | Group visibility: "Private" or "Public" |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `group` | object | Created group details |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Group ID |
+|   ↳ `displayName` | string | Display name |
+|   ↳ `description` | string | Group description |
+|   ↳ `mail` | string | Email address |
+|   ↳ `mailEnabled` | boolean | Whether mail is enabled |
+|   ↳ `mailNickname` | string | Mail nickname |
+|   ↳ `securityEnabled` | boolean | Whether security is enabled |
+|   ↳ `groupTypes` | array | Group types |
+|   ↳ `visibility` | string | Group visibility |
+|   ↳ `createdDateTime` | string | Creation date |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_update_group`
+
+Update group properties in Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID |
+| `displayName` | string | No | Display name |
+| `description` | string | No | Group description |
+| `mailNickname` | string | No | Mail alias |
+| `visibility` | string | No | Group visibility: "Private" or "Public" |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `updated` | boolean | Whether the update was successful |
+| `groupId` | string | ID of the updated group |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_delete_group`
+
+Delete a group from Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID). Microsoft 365 and security groups can be restored within 30 days.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `deleted` | boolean | Whether the deletion was successful |
+| `groupId` | string | ID of the deleted group |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_list_group_members`
+
+List members of a group in Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID |
+| `top` | number | No | Maximum number of members to return \(default 100, max 999\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `members` | array | List of group members |
+| `memberCount` | number | Number of members returned |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_add_group_member`
+
+Add a member to a group in Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID |
+| `memberId` | string | Yes | User ID of the member to add |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `added` | boolean | Whether the member was added successfully |
+| `groupId` | string | Group ID |
+| `memberId` | string | Member ID that was added |
+
+### `microsoft_ad_remove_group_member`
+
+Remove a member from a group in Azure AD (Microsoft Entra ID)
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID |
+| `memberId` | string | Yes | User ID of the member to remove |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `removed` | boolean | Whether the member was removed successfully |
+| `groupId` | string | Group ID |
+| `memberId` | string | Member ID that was removed |
+
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/okta.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,517 @@
+---
+title: Okta
+description: Manage users and groups in Okta
+---
+
+import { BlockInfoCard } from "@/components/ui/block-info-card"
+
+<BlockInfoCard 
+  type="okta"
+  color="#191919"
+/>
+
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-START:intro */}
+[Okta](https://www.okta.com/) is an identity and access management platform that provides secure authentication, authorization, and user management for organizations.
+
+With the Okta integration in Sim, you can:
+
+- **List and search users**: Retrieve users from your Okta org with SCIM search expressions and filters
+- **Manage user lifecycle**: Create, activate, deactivate, suspend, unsuspend, and delete users
+- **Update user profiles**: Modify user attributes like name, email, phone, title, and department
+- **Reset passwords**: Trigger password reset flows with optional email notification
+- **Manage groups**: Create, update, delete, and list groups in your organization
+- **Manage group membership**: Add or remove users from groups, and list group members
+
+In Sim, the Okta integration enables your agents to automate identity management tasks as part of their workflows. This allows for scenarios such as onboarding new employees, offboarding departing users, managing group-based access, auditing user status, and responding to security events by suspending or deactivating accounts.
+
+## Need Help?
+
+If you encounter issues with the Okta integration, contact us at [help@sim.ai](mailto:help@sim.ai)
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-END */}
+
+
+## Usage Instructions
+
+Integrate Okta identity management into your workflow. List, create, update, activate, suspend, and delete users. Reset passwords. Manage groups and group membership.
+
+
+
+## Tools
+
+### `okta_list_users`
+
+List all users in your Okta organization with optional search and filtering
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `search` | string | No | Okta search expression \(e.g., profile.firstName eq "John" or profile.email co "example.com"\) |
+| `filter` | string | No | Okta filter expression \(e.g., status eq "ACTIVE"\) |
+| `limit` | number | No | Maximum number of users to return \(default: 200, max: 200\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `users` | array | Array of Okta user objects |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | User ID |
+|   ↳ `status` | string | User status \(ACTIVE, STAGED, PROVISIONED, etc.\) |
+|   ↳ `firstName` | string | First name |
+|   ↳ `lastName` | string | Last name |
+|   ↳ `email` | string | Email address |
+|   ↳ `login` | string | Login \(usually email\) |
+|   ↳ `mobilePhone` | string | Mobile phone |
+|   ↳ `title` | string | Job title |
+|   ↳ `department` | string | Department |
+|   ↳ `created` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `lastLogin` | string | Last login timestamp |
+|   ↳ `lastUpdated` | string | Last update timestamp |
+|   ↳ `activated` | string | Activation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `statusChanged` | string | Status change timestamp |
+| `count` | number | Number of users returned |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_get_user`
+
+Get a specific user by ID or login from your Okta organization
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID or login \(email\) to look up |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | User ID |
+| `status` | string | User status |
+| `firstName` | string | First name |
+| `lastName` | string | Last name |
+| `email` | string | Email address |
+| `login` | string | Login \(usually email\) |
+| `mobilePhone` | string | Mobile phone |
+| `secondEmail` | string | Secondary email |
+| `displayName` | string | Display name |
+| `title` | string | Job title |
+| `department` | string | Department |
+| `organization` | string | Organization |
+| `manager` | string | Manager name |
+| `managerId` | string | Manager ID |
+| `division` | string | Division |
+| `employeeNumber` | string | Employee number |
+| `userType` | string | User type |
+| `created` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `activated` | string | Activation timestamp |
+| `lastLogin` | string | Last login timestamp |
+| `lastUpdated` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `statusChanged` | string | Status change timestamp |
+| `passwordChanged` | string | Password change timestamp |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_create_user`
+
+Create a new user in your Okta organization
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `firstName` | string | Yes | First name of the user |
+| `lastName` | string | Yes | Last name of the user |
+| `email` | string | Yes | Email address of the user |
+| `login` | string | No | Login for the user \(defaults to email if not provided\) |
+| `password` | string | No | Password for the user \(if not set, user will be emailed to set password\) |
+| `mobilePhone` | string | No | Mobile phone number |
+| `title` | string | No | Job title |
+| `department` | string | No | Department |
+| `activate` | boolean | No | Whether to activate the user immediately \(default: true\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Created user ID |
+| `status` | string | User status |
+| `firstName` | string | First name |
+| `lastName` | string | Last name |
+| `email` | string | Email address |
+| `login` | string | Login |
+| `created` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `lastUpdated` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_update_user`
+
+Update a user profile in your Okta organization
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID or login to update |
+| `firstName` | string | No | Updated first name |
+| `lastName` | string | No | Updated last name |
+| `email` | string | No | Updated email address |
+| `login` | string | No | Updated login |
+| `mobilePhone` | string | No | Updated mobile phone number |
+| `title` | string | No | Updated job title |
+| `department` | string | No | Updated department |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | User ID |
+| `status` | string | User status |
+| `firstName` | string | First name |
+| `lastName` | string | Last name |
+| `email` | string | Email address |
+| `login` | string | Login |
+| `created` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `lastUpdated` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_activate_user`
+
+Activate a user in your Okta organization. Can only be performed on users with STAGED or DEPROVISIONED status. Optionally sends an activation email.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID or login to activate |
+| `sendEmail` | boolean | No | Send activation email to the user \(default: true\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `userId` | string | Activated user ID |
+| `activated` | boolean | Whether the user was activated |
+| `activationUrl` | string | Activation URL \(only returned when sendEmail is false\) |
+| `activationToken` | string | Activation token \(only returned when sendEmail is false\) |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_deactivate_user`
+
+Deactivate a user in your Okta organization. This transitions the user to DEPROVISIONED status.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID or login to deactivate |
+| `sendEmail` | boolean | No | Send deactivation email to admin \(default: false\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `userId` | string | Deactivated user ID |
+| `deactivated` | boolean | Whether the user was deactivated |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_suspend_user`
+
+Suspend a user in your Okta organization. Only users with ACTIVE status can be suspended. Suspended users cannot log in but retain group and app assignments.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID or login to suspend |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `userId` | string | Suspended user ID |
+| `suspended` | boolean | Whether the user was suspended |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_unsuspend_user`
+
+Unsuspend a previously suspended user in your Okta organization. Returns the user to ACTIVE status.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID or login to unsuspend |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `userId` | string | Unsuspended user ID |
+| `unsuspended` | boolean | Whether the user was unsuspended |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_reset_password`
+
+Generate a one-time token to reset a user password. Can email the reset link to the user or return it directly. Transitions the user to RECOVERY status.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID or login to reset password for |
+| `sendEmail` | boolean | No | Send password reset email to the user \(default: true\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `userId` | string | User ID |
+| `resetPasswordUrl` | string | Password reset URL \(only returned when sendEmail is false\) |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_delete_user`
+
+Permanently delete a user from your Okta organization. Can only be performed on DEPROVISIONED users. If the user is active, this will first deactivate them and a second call is needed to delete.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID to delete |
+| `sendEmail` | boolean | No | Send deactivation email to admin \(default: false\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `userId` | string | Deleted user ID |
+| `deleted` | boolean | Whether the user was deleted |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_list_groups`
+
+List all groups in your Okta organization with optional search and filtering
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `search` | string | No | Okta search expression for groups \(e.g., profile.name sw "Engineering" or type eq "OKTA_GROUP"\) |
+| `filter` | string | No | Okta filter expression \(e.g., type eq "OKTA_GROUP"\) |
+| `limit` | number | No | Maximum number of groups to return \(default: 10000, max: 10000\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `groups` | array | Array of Okta group objects |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Group ID |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Group name |
+|   ↳ `description` | string | Group description |
+|   ↳ `type` | string | Group type \(OKTA_GROUP, APP_GROUP, BUILT_IN\) |
+|   ↳ `created` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `lastUpdated` | string | Last update timestamp |
+|   ↳ `lastMembershipUpdated` | string | Last membership change timestamp |
+| `count` | number | Number of groups returned |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_get_group`
+
+Get a specific group by ID from your Okta organization
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID to look up |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Group ID |
+| `name` | string | Group name |
+| `description` | string | Group description |
+| `type` | string | Group type |
+| `created` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `lastUpdated` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `lastMembershipUpdated` | string | Last membership change timestamp |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_create_group`
+
+Create a new group in your Okta organization
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `name` | string | Yes | Name of the group |
+| `description` | string | No | Description of the group |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Created group ID |
+| `name` | string | Group name |
+| `description` | string | Group description |
+| `type` | string | Group type |
+| `created` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `lastUpdated` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `lastMembershipUpdated` | string | Last membership change timestamp |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_update_group`
+
+Update a group profile in your Okta organization. Only groups of OKTA_GROUP type can be updated. All profile properties must be specified (full replacement).
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID to update |
+| `name` | string | Yes | Updated group name |
+| `description` | string | No | Updated group description |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `id` | string | Group ID |
+| `name` | string | Group name |
+| `description` | string | Group description |
+| `type` | string | Group type |
+| `created` | string | Creation timestamp |
+| `lastUpdated` | string | Last update timestamp |
+| `lastMembershipUpdated` | string | Last membership change timestamp |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_delete_group`
+
+Delete a group from your Okta organization. Groups of OKTA_GROUP or APP_GROUP type can be removed.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID to delete |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `groupId` | string | Deleted group ID |
+| `deleted` | boolean | Whether the group was deleted |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_add_user_to_group`
+
+Add a user to a group in your Okta organization
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID to add the user to |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID to add to the group |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `groupId` | string | Group ID |
+| `userId` | string | User ID added to the group |
+| `added` | boolean | Whether the user was added |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_remove_user_from_group`
+
+Remove a user from a group in your Okta organization
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID to remove the user from |
+| `userId` | string | Yes | User ID to remove from the group |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `groupId` | string | Group ID |
+| `userId` | string | User ID removed from the group |
+| `removed` | boolean | Whether the user was removed |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+### `okta_list_group_members`
+
+List all members of a specific group in your Okta organization
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | Okta API token for authentication |
+| `domain` | string | Yes | Okta domain \(e.g., dev-123456.okta.com\) |
+| `groupId` | string | Yes | Group ID to list members for |
+| `limit` | number | No | Maximum number of members to return \(default: 1000, max: 1000\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `members` | array | Array of group member user objects |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | User ID |
+|   ↳ `status` | string | User status |
+|   ↳ `firstName` | string | First name |
+|   ↳ `lastName` | string | Last name |
+|   ↳ `email` | string | Email address |
+|   ↳ `login` | string | Login |
+|   ↳ `mobilePhone` | string | Mobile phone |
+|   ↳ `title` | string | Job title |
+|   ↳ `department` | string | Department |
+|   ↳ `created` | string | Creation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `lastLogin` | string | Last login timestamp |
+|   ↳ `lastUpdated` | string | Last update timestamp |
+|   ↳ `activated` | string | Activation timestamp |
+|   ↳ `statusChanged` | string | Status change timestamp |
+| `count` | number | Number of members returned |
+| `success` | boolean | Operation success status |
+
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/perplexity.mdx

@@ -49,6 +49,9 @@ Generate completions using Perplexity AI chat models
 | `max_tokens` | number | No | Maximum number of tokens to generate \(e.g., 1024, 2048, 4096\) |
 | `temperature` | number | No | Sampling temperature between 0 and 1 \(e.g., 0.0 for deterministic, 0.7 for creative\) |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Perplexity API key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 
@@ -78,6 +81,8 @@ Get ranked search results from Perplexity
 | `search_after_date` | string | No | Include only content published after this date \(format: MM/DD/YYYY\) |
 | `search_before_date` | string | No | Include only content published before this date \(format: MM/DD/YYYY\) |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Perplexity API key |
+| `pricing` | per_request | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/quiver.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+---
+title: Quiver
+description: Generate and vectorize SVGs
+---
+
+import { BlockInfoCard } from "@/components/ui/block-info-card"
+
+<BlockInfoCard 
+  type="quiver"
+  color="#000000"
+/>
+
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-START:intro */}
+[QuiverAI](https://quiver.ai/) is an AI-powered SVG generation platform that creates high-quality, scalable vector graphics from text descriptions or by vectorizing raster images. It produces clean, resolution-independent SVGs that are ideal for icons, illustrations, logos, and UI elements.
+
+With Quiver, you can:
+
+- **Generate SVGs from text prompts**: Describe the vector graphic you need and get production-ready SVG output
+- **Vectorize raster images**: Convert PNG, JPG, and other raster images into clean SVG vector format
+- **Provide reference images**: Upload up to 4 reference images to guide the style and composition of generated SVGs
+- **Control generation parameters**: Adjust temperature, number of outputs, and token limits to fine-tune results
+- **List available models**: Query available QuiverAI models to discover supported operations and capabilities
+- **Get clean SVG markup**: Receive raw SVG content alongside downloadable files for easy embedding
+
+In Sim, the Quiver integration enables your workflows to generate and vectorize graphics on demand. This is useful for creating dynamic illustrations, converting raster assets to scalable vectors, generating icons for applications, producing visual assets for content pipelines, or building design automation workflows. The generated SVGs are returned as files that can be passed to downstream blocks for further processing, storage, or delivery.
+{/* MANUAL-CONTENT-END */}
+
+
+## Usage Instructions
+
+Generate SVG images from text prompts or vectorize raster images into SVGs using QuiverAI. Supports reference images, style instructions, and multiple output generation.
+
+
+
+## Tools
+
+### `quiver_text_to_svg`
+
+Generate SVG images from text prompts using QuiverAI
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | QuiverAI API key |
+| `prompt` | string | Yes | A text description of the desired SVG |
+| `model` | string | Yes | The model to use for SVG generation \(e.g., "arrow-preview"\) |
+| `instructions` | string | No | Style or formatting guidance for the SVG output |
+| `references` | file | No | Reference images to guide SVG generation \(up to 4\) |
+| `n` | number | No | Number of SVGs to generate \(1-16, default 1\) |
+| `temperature` | number | No | Sampling temperature \(0-2, default 1\) |
+| `top_p` | number | No | Nucleus sampling probability \(0-1, default 1\) |
+| `max_output_tokens` | number | No | Maximum output tokens \(1-131072\) |
+| `presence_penalty` | number | No | Token penalty for prior output \(-2 to 2, default 0\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `success` | boolean | Whether the SVG generation succeeded |
+| `output` | object | Generated SVG output |
+|   ↳ `file` | file | Generated SVG file |
+|   ↳ `svgContent` | string | Raw SVG markup content |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Generation request ID |
+|   ↳ `usage` | json | Token usage statistics |
+|     ↳ `totalTokens` | number | Total tokens used |
+|     ↳ `inputTokens` | number | Input tokens used |
+|     ↳ `outputTokens` | number | Output tokens used |
+
+### `quiver_image_to_svg`
+
+Convert raster images into vector SVG format using QuiverAI
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | QuiverAI API key |
+| `model` | string | Yes | The model to use for vectorization \(e.g., "arrow-preview"\) |
+| `image` | file | Yes | The raster image to vectorize into SVG |
+| `temperature` | number | No | Sampling temperature \(0-2, default 1\) |
+| `top_p` | number | No | Nucleus sampling probability \(0-1, default 1\) |
+| `max_output_tokens` | number | No | Maximum output tokens \(1-131072\) |
+| `presence_penalty` | number | No | Token penalty for prior output \(-2 to 2, default 0\) |
+| `auto_crop` | boolean | No | Automatically crop the image before vectorizing |
+| `target_size` | number | No | Square resize target in pixels \(128-4096\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `success` | boolean | Whether the vectorization succeeded |
+| `output` | object | Vectorized SVG output |
+|   ↳ `file` | file | Generated SVG file |
+|   ↳ `svgContent` | string | Raw SVG markup content |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Vectorization request ID |
+|   ↳ `usage` | json | Token usage statistics |
+|     ↳ `totalTokens` | number | Total tokens used |
+|     ↳ `inputTokens` | number | Input tokens used |
+|     ↳ `outputTokens` | number | Output tokens used |
+
+### `quiver_list_models`
+
+List all available QuiverAI models
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `apiKey` | string | Yes | QuiverAI API key |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `success` | boolean | Whether the request succeeded |
+| `output` | object | Available models |
+|   ↳ `models` | json | List of available QuiverAI models |
+|     ↳ `id` | string | Model identifier |
+|     ↳ `name` | string | Human-readable model name |
+|     ↳ `description` | string | Model capabilities summary |
+|     ↳ `created` | number | Unix timestamp of creation |
+|     ↳ `ownedBy` | string | Organization that owns the model |
+|     ↳ `inputModalities` | json | Supported input types \(text, image, svg\) |
+|     ↳ `outputModalities` | json | Supported output types \(text, image, svg\) |
+|     ↳ `contextLength` | number | Maximum context window |
+|     ↳ `maxOutputLength` | number | Maximum generation length |
+|     ↳ `supportedOperations` | json | Available operations \(svg_generate, svg_edit, svg_animate, svg_vectorize, chat_completions\) |
+|     ↳ `supportedSamplingParameters` | json | Supported sampling parameters \(temperature, top_p, top_k, repetition_penalty, presence_penalty, stop\) |
+
+

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/serper.mdx

@@ -47,6 +47,9 @@ A powerful web search tool that provides access to Google search results through
 | `hl` | string | No | Language code for search results \(e.g., "en", "es", "de", "fr"\) |
 | `type` | string | No | Type of search to perform \(e.g., "search", "news", "images", "videos", "places", "shopping"\) |
 | `apiKey` | string | Yes | Serper API Key |
+| `pricing` | custom | No | No description |
+| `metadata` | string | No | No description |
+| `rateLimit` | string | No | No description |
 
 #### Output
 

apps/docs/content/docs/en/tools/slack.mdx

@@ -925,6 +925,82 @@ Create a canvas pinned to a Slack channel as its resource hub
 | --------- | ---- | ----------- |
 | `canvas_id` | string | ID of the created channel canvas |
 
+### `slack_create_conversation`
+
+Create a new public or private channel in a Slack workspace.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `authMethod` | string | No | Authentication method: oauth or bot_token |
+| `botToken` | string | No | Bot token for Custom Bot |
+| `name` | string | Yes | Name of the channel to create \(lowercase, numbers, hyphens, underscores only; max 80 characters\) |
+| `isPrivate` | boolean | No | Create a private channel instead of a public one \(default: false\) |
+| `teamId` | string | No | Encoded team ID to create the channel in \(required if using an org token\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `channelInfo` | object | The newly created channel object |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Channel ID \(e.g., C1234567890\) |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Channel name without # prefix |
+|   ↳ `is_channel` | boolean | Whether this is a channel |
+|   ↳ `is_private` | boolean | Whether channel is private |
+|   ↳ `is_archived` | boolean | Whether channel is archived |
+|   ↳ `is_general` | boolean | Whether this is the general channel |
+|   ↳ `is_member` | boolean | Whether the bot/user is a member |
+|   ↳ `is_shared` | boolean | Whether channel is shared across workspaces |
+|   ↳ `is_ext_shared` | boolean | Whether channel is externally shared |
+|   ↳ `is_org_shared` | boolean | Whether channel is org-wide shared |
+|   ↳ `num_members` | number | Number of members in the channel |
+|   ↳ `topic` | string | Channel topic |
+|   ↳ `purpose` | string | Channel purpose/description |
+|   ↳ `created` | number | Unix timestamp when channel was created |
+|   ↳ `creator` | string | User ID of channel creator |
+|   ↳ `updated` | number | Unix timestamp of last update |
+
+### `slack_invite_to_conversation`
+
+Invite one or more users to a Slack channel. Supports up to 100 users at a time.
+
+#### Input
+
+| Parameter | Type | Required | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | -------- | ----------- |
+| `authMethod` | string | No | Authentication method: oauth or bot_token |
+| `botToken` | string | No | Bot token for Custom Bot |
+| `channel` | string | Yes | The ID of the channel to invite users to |
+| `users` | string | Yes | Comma-separated list of user IDs to invite \(up to 100\) |
+| `force` | boolean | No | When true, continues inviting valid users while skipping invalid ones \(default: false\) |
+
+#### Output
+
+| Parameter | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ---- | ----------- |
+| `channelInfo` | object | The channel object after inviting users |
+|   ↳ `id` | string | Channel ID \(e.g., C1234567890\) |
+|   ↳ `name` | string | Channel name without # prefix |
+|   ↳ `is_channel` | boolean | Whether this is a channel |
+|   ↳ `is_private` | boolean | Whether channel is private |
+|   ↳ `is_archived` | boolean | Whether channel is archived |
+|   ↳ `is_general` | boolean | Whether this is the general channel |
+|   ↳ `is_member` | boolean | Whether the bot/user is a member |
+|   ↳ `is_shared` | boolean | Whether channel is shared across workspaces |
+|   ↳ `is_ext_shared` | boolean | Whether channel is externally shared |
+|   ↳ `is_org_shared` | boolean | Whether channel is org-wide shared |
+|   ↳ `num_members` | number | Number of members in the channel |
+|   ↳ `topic` | string | Channel topic |
+|   ↳ `purpose` | string | Channel purpose/description |
+|   ↳ `created` | number | Unix timestamp when channel was created |
+|   ↳ `creator` | string | User ID of channel creator |
+|   ↳ `updated` | number | Unix timestamp of last update |
+| `errors` | array | Per-user errors when force is true and some invitations failed |
+|   ↳ `user` | string | User ID that failed |
+|   ↳ `ok` | boolean | Always false for error entries |
+|   ↳ `error` | string | Error code for this user |
+
 ### `slack_open_view`
 
 Open a modal view in Slack using a trigger_id from an interaction payload. Used to display forms, confirmations, and other interactive modals.